JP2019115751A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of solving monotony in a special game state.SOLUTION: A sub CPU 71 of a game machine can control to perform a title pattern display on the basis of the number of prize balls given to a player in a big winning game state which is shifted from at least a probability variation/time-shortening game state, in a round game from the start of a big winning game state (specific game state) which is shifted to the probability variation/time-shortening game state to be shifted to a non-probability variation/non-time-shortening game state. The title pattern display is not displayed from the start of a 5R of a winning pattern 11 to the end of a 11R.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 16

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine capable of shifting to a specific gaming state advantageous to a player.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a first identification information display device (first) is provided on condition that a game ball hit in a gaming area on a gaming board passes through a first starting area (first starting opening). In the special symbol display device), the first identification information (the first special symbol) is variably displayed, and then the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific mode, whereby a specific gaming state (big hit game) advantageous to the player Second identification information (second special symbol display device) on the second identification information display device (second special symbol display device) on condition that the gaming ball passes through the second starting region (second starting opening) while shifting to the state). In some cases, the special symbol state that is advantageous to the player can be transitioned to by changing the special symbol) and displaying the second identification information in a specific manner. In the specific gaming state, a round game is performed multiple times so that the variable winning device (large winning opening) provided in the gaming area is in the opening mode and the closing mode, and the game ball is held in the open variable winning device. By winning, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out.

  By the way, the conventional gaming machine is provided with two variable winning devices (a first variable winning device and a second variable winning device), and the passing of the game ball inside the second variable winning device which is one of them A specific area in which a prize can be made is provided, and when the gaming ball is prized in the specific area during the specific gaming state (hereinafter, also referred to as "V prize"), the gaming state after the end of the specific gaming state is specified gaming state What controls to the special game state (probable variation game state) which is easy to shift to is proposed (refer to patent documents 1).

  In such a conventional gaming machine, while either the first identification information or the second identification information is exclusively varied and displayed in one of the first identification information display device and the second identification information display device, the identification information is varied. When the gaming ball passes through the first starting area or the second starting area while being displayed, the variable display of the identification information is suspended in association with the starting area which has passed. Thereafter, when the identification information is stopped and displayed on any one of the first identification information display device and the second identification information display device, the fluctuation display of the held identification information is started. At this time, when the variable identification display of the identification information is suspended in both the first identification information display device and the second identification information display device, the second identification display is performed more than the first variation display of the first identification information display device. The variable display of the second identification information in the identification information display device is prioritized.

  Further, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in one specific gaming state, a round game in which the first variable winning device opens and closes is executed a plurality of times, and a specific round game in which the second variable winning device opens and closes is performed only once. It is supposed to be As the opening and closing mode (opening and closing pattern) of the specific round game according to the second variable winning prize device, a long opening and closing pattern which becomes the opening mode continuously for a relatively long time and a short becoming the opening mode in a shorter time than the long opening and closing pattern An opening and closing pattern is provided.

  When the second variable winning device is in the open mode based on the above-described long opening and closing pattern, the gaming ball is more likely to win with respect to the second variable winning device, and as a result, the gaming ball is more likely to be V winning for the specific area. Thereby, in the long opening and closing pattern, it is easy to shift to the special game state. On the other hand, when the second variable winning device is in the open mode based on the short opening and closing pattern, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win against the second variable winning device, and consequently it becomes difficult for the gaming ball to win V for the specific area. . Thereby, in the short opening and closing pattern, it is difficult to shift to the special game state.

  Furthermore, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, when the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the first identification information display device, the ratio of shifting to the specific gaming state in which the specific round game of the short opening and closing pattern is executed is While being 50%, the ratio to shift to the specific gaming state where the specific round game of the long opening and closing pattern is executed is 50%. On the other hand, when the second identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner in the second identification information display device, the ratio of shifting to the specific gaming state where the specific round game of the short opening and closing pattern is executed is 0%. On the other hand, the ratio of shifting to the specific gaming state in which the specific round game of the long opening and closing pattern is executed is 100%.

  Thereby, when the variable display of the first identification information is suspended, when the variable display of the suspended first identification information is executed, the specific gaming state in which the short round open / close pattern specific round game is executed And there is a possibility of transition. Therefore, even if the first identification information is stopped and displayed in a specific manner, the specific gaming state is entered, but after the specific gaming state is over, the player is in a non-special gaming state (non-probable variation gaming state) disadvantageous to the player. May be

  In order to avoid such a disadvantageous situation, the state in which the variable display of the second identification information is suspended is maintained as much as possible, and the first identification is performed by preferentially changing and displaying the second identification information. The second identification information may be stopped and displayed in a specific manner prior to the information.

JP, 2013-248385, A

  However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned conventional patent document 1, the suspension relating to the variable display of the first identification information does not decide the transition to the specific gaming state in which the specific round game of the short opening and closing pattern is executed. There is not necessarily transition to the non-special game state due to the suspension of the first identification information. Therefore, it may not be necessary to maintain the state in which the variable display of the second identification information is suspended.

  There was a problem that the game in the special game state became monotonous.

  The present invention has been made in view of the problems described above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating the monotony of the special gaming state.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
(I)
A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passing area provided in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, on condition that game media has passed through the passage area;
Gaming state transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state based on the determination result of the determination means;
A variable winning device that can be displaced into an open state in which game media can be easily received and a closed state in which the game medium is more difficult to receive than the open state;
A non-special game state control means capable of controlling a non-special game state which is a game state controlled after the specific game state ends and which is difficult to shift to the specific game state;
Special gaming state control means capable of controlling the special gaming state that is easy to shift to the specific gaming state after the specific gaming state is ended;
A gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a round game to open and close the variable winning device a plurality of times,
Even in the middle of the opening and closing control, when a predetermined number of winnings occur in the variable winning device, control to end the round game of that time can be executed,
The effect executing means is capable of winning determined from among the plurality of types of possible prizes when starting the first round game for display concerning the possible number of prizes to the variable prize device in one specific gaming state After the initial display of the number is performed, the initial display is continuously displayed even after the first round game is finished and the variable winning device is closed, and the subsequent round game is started. It is possible to execute an addition display effect that increases the number of possible winnings from the initial display,
The specific display based on the game value given to the player in the round game from the start of the specific gaming state transitioning to the special gaming state to the transition to the non-special gaming state is at least transitioned from the special gaming state It is possible to perform in the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific display may not be displayed when a specific round game is executed.
(1)
A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A variable winning device provided in the game area and capable of changing between a first mode in which game media can be easily received and a second mode in which game media are not easily received;
A first start area provided in the game area and into which game media can enter;
First gaming state determination means for performing determination to determine whether or not to set a specific gaming state advantageous to the player on condition that gaming media has entered the first start area;
A second start area provided in the game area and into which game media can enter;
A second gaming state determination unit that makes a determination to determine whether or not to set the specific gaming state on condition that gaming media has entered the second start area;
Round game execution means capable of executing a round game in which the variable winning device is varied between the first mode and the second mode in the specific game state;
Special gaming state control means capable of controlling the special gaming state which is easy to shift to the specific gaming state after the specific gaming state is ended;
Non-special game state control means that can be controlled to a non-special game state that is difficult to shift to the specific game state after the specific game state is ended;
Notification means capable of notifying predetermined information;
A gaming machine equipped with
The specific gaming state is
A first specific gaming state in which the variable winning device easily accepts a game medium and a first specific gaming state in which the first number of the easy gaming is executed, and a second specific gaming in which the first prize is performed the second number less than the first number There is a state and
The first specific gaming state is a specific gaming state that is easier to shift to the non-special gaming state than the second specific gaming state,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification means can perform a predetermined notification on the condition that the first specific gaming state has been determined in a predetermined period of the special gaming state. .
(2)
Storage means capable of storing a plurality of determination results of the first gaming state determination means and the second gaming state determination means;
Display means capable of displaying the determination result in a specific display mode or a normal display mode;
Display mode changing means for changing the specific display mode to the normal display mode;
Equipped with
The display means can display the determination result in the specific display mode on condition that it is determined that the first specific gaming state is to be made,
The display mode changing means is
If a predetermined number of determination results of the second game state determination means are stored, the specific display mode according to the determination result of the first game state determination means is changed to the normal display mode.
When the determination result newly stored in the storage means is more advantageous for the player than the determination result displayed in the specific display mode, the predetermined number of determination results of the second gaming state determination means are stored. The gaming machine according to (1), wherein the specific display mode according to the determination result of the first gaming state determination means is changed to the normal display mode, even if not.

A game machine according to one aspect of the present invention is
A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A first variable winning device provided in the game area and capable of changing between a first mode in which game media can be easily received and a second mode in which game media can not easily be received;
A second variable winning device internally provided with a specific area which is provided in the game area and which can be changed between a first mode in which game media can be easily received and a second mode in which game media can not easily be received;
A first start area provided in the game area and into which game media can enter;
First storage means capable of storing a plurality of first start memories including information for determining whether or not to set a specific gaming state advantageous to the player on condition that game media has entered the first start area When,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information based on the first start storage under the first condition that the first start storage is stored in the first storage means, and the first start First identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information in a specific display mode when the storage determines the specific gaming state;
A second start area provided in the game area and into which game media can enter;
Second storage means capable of storing a plurality of second start memories including information for determining whether or not to set the specific gaming state on condition that gaming media has entered the second start area;
It is possible to perform variable display of the second identification information based on the second start storage under the second condition that the second start storage is stored in the second storage means, and the second start A second identification information display unit capable of stopping and displaying the second identification information in a specific display mode when storage determines the specific gaming state;
Specific gaming state control means for controlling the specific gaming state when the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific display mode;
First round game execution means capable of executing a first round game in which the first variable winning device is varied to the first aspect and the second aspect in the specific gaming state;
Second round game execution means capable of executing a second round game in which the second variable winning device is varied to the first aspect and the second aspect in the specific gaming state;
The stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is relative to the specific display mode after the specific game state is over on condition that game media has passed the specific area in the specific game state. Special game state control means that can be controlled to a special game state that is likely to occur
The stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is relative to the specific display mode after the specific game state is over on condition that the game medium does not pass the specific area in the specific game state. Non special game state control means which can be controlled to the non special game state which is difficult to become,
Notification means capable of notifying predetermined information;
A gaming machine equipped with
The second condition has priority over the first condition,
The second round game execution means is an easy-to-pass round game in which game media can easily pass through the specific area as the second round game, and game media can not easily pass through the specific area. It is possible to play round games,
The specific gaming state is
A first specific gaming state in which the first round game and the passing difficulty round game are at least executed;
Including a second specified gaming state in which the first round game and the easy-to-pass round game are executed at least;
In the first specific gaming state, a first winning easy round game in which the first variable winning device can easily accept gaming media is executed a first number of times as the first round gaming, while the second specific gaming state is the first specific gaming state. As a one round game, the winning easy round game is executed a second number of times less than the first number,
The specific gaming state control means has a relatively higher probability that the first identification information has a specific display mode, and the second identification information has a relatively higher probability than the specific display mode. While being controlled to the specific gaming state, it can be controlled to the second specific gaming state with relatively low probability,
In the special game state, the notification means stores a first start memory for determining the first specific game state in the first storage means, or the first specific game state in the first storage means It is characterized in that it is possible to carry out a predetermined notification on the condition that one of the first start-up memories that determines the condition is not stored.

  In such a configuration, in the special game state, for example, when the first start memory for determining the first specific game state is stored, that is, although the transition from the special game state to the specific game state is determined. When the first specific gaming state where it is difficult to shift to the special gaming state again even after shifting to the specific gaming state, it is informed that the first start memory corresponding to that is stored. The player who has received the notification can quickly recognize that it is difficult to shift to the special game state again. The player who has detected such a situation, for example, plays a game so as to give priority to the variable display and the stop display of the second identification information based on the second start memory as much as possible, and the special game state immediately ends. Can be avoided. On the other hand, when it is notified that the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state is not stored, it is not necessary to give priority to the variable display and the stop display of the second identification information, so that the game is appropriately performed. It can be interrupted safely. Thus, since the way of proceeding of the game changes according to the content to be notified, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game.

A game machine according to another aspect of the present invention is
A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A variable winning device internally provided with a specific area which can be provided between the game area and can easily be changed to the first mode and the second mode which can easily accept game media, and can pass the game medium.
A first start area provided in the game area and into which game media can enter;
First storage means capable of storing a plurality of first start memories including information for determining whether or not to set a specific gaming state advantageous to the player on condition that game media has entered the first start area When,
It is possible to perform variable display of the first identification information based on the first start storage under the first condition that the first start storage is stored in the first storage means, and the first start First identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information in a specific display mode when the storage determines the specific gaming state;
A second start area provided in the game area and into which game media can enter;
Second storage means capable of storing a plurality of second start memories including information for determining whether or not to set the specific gaming state on condition that gaming media has entered the second start area;
It is possible to perform variable display of the second identification information based on the second start storage under the second condition that the second start storage is stored in the second storage means, and the second start A second identification information display unit capable of stopping and displaying the second identification information in a specific display mode when storage determines the specific gaming state;
Specific gaming state control means for controlling the specific gaming state when the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific display mode;
In the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute round easy game where passing game media is relatively easy to pass through the specific area, and passing difficult round game where playing medium is relatively difficult to pass through the specific area Execution means,
The stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is relative to the specific display mode after the specific game state is over on condition that game media has passed the specific area in the specific game state. Special game state control means that can be controlled to a special game state that is likely to occur
The stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is relative to the specific display mode after the specific game state is over on condition that the game medium does not pass the specific area in the specific game state. Non special game state control means which can be controlled to the non special game state which is difficult to become,
Notification means capable of notifying predetermined information;
A gaming machine equipped with
The second condition has priority over the first condition,
The specific gaming state is
A first specific gaming state in which only the difficult-to-pass round game is executed;
The second specific gaming state in which the easy-to-pass round game is executed at least once,
The first specific gaming state is the first number of easy winning round games in which the variable winning device can easily receive the game medium is executed a first number of times, while the second specific gaming state is the first number of winning easy round games as the first number Run a second time less
The specific gaming state control means has a relatively higher probability that the first identification information has a specific display mode, and the second identification information has a relatively higher probability than the specific display mode. While being controlled to the specific gaming state, it can be controlled to the second specific gaming state with relatively low probability,
In the special game state, the notification means stores a first start memory for determining the first specific game state in the first storage means, or the first specific game state in the first storage means It is characterized in that it is possible to carry out a predetermined notification on the condition that one of the first start-up memories that determines the condition is not stored.

  Even in such a configuration, in the special game state, for example, when the first start memory for determining the first specific game state is stored, that is, although the transition from the special game state to the specific game state is determined. When the first specific gaming state where it is difficult to shift to the special gaming state again even after shifting to the specific gaming state, it is informed that the first start memory corresponding to that is stored. The player who has received the notification can quickly recognize that it is difficult to shift to the special game state again. The player who has detected such a situation, for example, plays a game so as to give priority to the variable display and the stop display of the second identification information based on the second start memory as much as possible, and the special game state immediately ends. Can be avoided. On the other hand, when it is notified that the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state is not stored, it is not necessary to give priority to the variable display and the stop display of the second identification information, so that the game is appropriately performed. It can be interrupted safely. Thus, since the way of proceeding of the game changes according to the content to be notified, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game.

As a preferred embodiment of the present invention,
The notification means may perform the predetermined notification when the second start storage stored in the second storage means is less than a predetermined number.
In addition, the special game state ends when the first identification information and the second identification information are changed a predetermined number of times,
The non-special game state is ended when the number of times of fluctuation of the first identification information and the second identification information is executed a number of times smaller than the predetermined number.

  According to such a configuration, when the second start memory is less than the predetermined number, it is informed that, for example, the first start memory for determining the first specific gaming state is stored. In other words, when there is a predetermined number or more of the second start memory, and the variable display and the stop display of the second identification information are preferentially performed, the first start memory that determines such a first specific game state Whether or not is stored is not particularly notified. This gives a sense of security that the special gaming state will not be interrupted for a while if there is a large number of second starting memories and there is no disadvantage for the player even if the above notification is not given. It is possible to advance the game while.

As another preferred embodiment of the present invention,
In the case where the notification means stores, in the first storage means, a first start memory for determining the first specific gaming state and there is another first start memory stored later than the first start memory. In this case, it is possible to perform the predetermined notification on condition that the other first start memory does not determine the second specific gaming state.

  According to such a configuration, for example, the first start memory that determines the first specific gaming state is stored, and further, there is another first start memory stored after that, and the other first start is stored. If the storage does not determine the second specific gaming state, it is informed that the first starting storage that it is difficult to shift to the special gaming state is stored by determining the first specific gaming state. In other words, even if the first starting memory to the effect that it is difficult to shift to the special game state is stored, another second to determine the second specified gaming state that it is easy to shift to the special game state after that If one start-up memory is stored, the first start-up memory to be saved first will not be notified. That is, although the game mode is temporarily shifted to the non-special game mode after the end of the special game mode, the special game mode is shifted to the second special game mode based on the other first start memory and the special game mode is again after the second special game mode is over If it is decided that it is easy to shift to the above, since the above notification will not be made, it is possible to prevent useless notification from being performed excessively, and according to the situation, it is possible to appropriately use useful information. The notification can be made, and the game can be progressed with ease.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating the monotony of the special gaming state.

It is an appearance perspective view of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board in the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a front view of the LED unit in the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a control circuit of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 7 is a transition diagram showing a gaming state and an effect mode of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the specifications of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a view showing a one round opening and closing pattern of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the displacement member operation pattern of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern and the interval time between rounds of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the super big bonus of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the challenge bonus of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in the addition bonus of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows the operation timing in hitting pattern 4 of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a timing chart which shows operation timing by hit pattern 11 and hit pattern 5 of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for challenge success or failure lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table of the single match game combination lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (1) for rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (2) for rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for 3 times for challenge lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for success notification round lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 6 is a view showing a surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) and a surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a table (4R)-(8R) for icon pattern lottery of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a table (4R white icon) for icon change lottery of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a table (5R white icon), (5R blue icon), (5R green icon) and (5R red icon) of an icon change lottery table of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a table (6R white icon), (6R blue icon), (6R green icon), and (6R red icon) of the icon change lottery table of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a table (7R white icon), (7R blue icon), (7R green icon) and (7R red icon) of the icon change lottery table of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a table (8R white icon), (8R blue icon), (8R green icon) and (8R red icon) of an icon change lottery table of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for surprise success character slot | lottery_lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (surprise pattern No. 2) and (surprise pattern No. 3) of the surprise failure character slot | lottery lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (surprise pattern No. 4) and (surprise pattern No. 5) of a surprise failure character slot | lottery lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (surprise pattern No. 6) for surprise failure character-slot lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a table (white icon) and a (blue icon) for a surprise gasse character band lottery of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing a table (green icon) and a (red icon) for the surprise gasse character band lottery of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for surprise gasse subsequent character slot | lottery lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for the bonus bonus continuation continuation lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for scenario group lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a scenario type lottery table (hit pattern 4), (hit pattern 5), (hit pattern 6) and (hit pattern 7) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a scenario type lottery table (hit pattern 8), (hit pattern 9), (hit pattern 10) and (hit pattern 11) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table (Aa) for scenario number lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (Ab) for scenario number lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (Ac) for scenario number lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (Ba) for scenario number lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (Bb) for scenario number lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (Bc) for scenario number lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (Ca) for scenario number lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (Cb) for scenario number lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (Da) for scenario number lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 6 is a view showing a bonus game bonus table (Aa) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a view showing a bonus game bonus table (Aa) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a view showing a bonus game bonus table (Aa) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a view showing a bonus game bonus table (Aa) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a view showing a bonus game bonus table (Aa) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a view showing a bonus game bonus table (Aa) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 6 is a view showing a bonus game bonus table (Aa) of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ab) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ab) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ab) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ab) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ac) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ba) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ba) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ba) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ba) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ba) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ba) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ba) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Bb) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Bb) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Bb) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Bc) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ca) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Ca) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Cb) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the bonus scenario table (Da) of a game machine top which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing the table for combo RUSH lottery of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the roulette lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the roulette pattern lottery table of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for title determination lotterys of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 7 is a view showing a chance-up lottery table of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table (effect classification C or H) for character classification lottery of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table (characteristic type D or J + upper limit reaching | attainment) of the character classification lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing a table for character type lottery of a game machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (effect type D or J + effect type F for next round), (other than effect type D or J + effect type F for next round). . Character type lottery table of game machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (effect type E or F or K or L + addition value by character appearance + 50), (effect type E or F or K or L + character addition value by appearance It is a figure which shows +100. Character type lottery table of game machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention (effect type E or F or K or L + addition value by character appearance + 150), (effect type E or F or K or L + character addition value by appearance It is a figure which shows +200. It is a figure showing the table for bull character revival lottery of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for bonus bonus completion screen lottery of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for title determination lottery of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the main control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows switch input processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol related switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st starting opening switch check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd starting opening switch check processing of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big winning a prize mouth switch check processing of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd big winning a prize mouth switch check processing of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol memory check process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol determination processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows waiting time management processing before big opening mouth reopening of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing under big winning opening opening of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows hit end interval management processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by the sub control circuit of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command reception interruption processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows depression operation button operation judging processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the timer update process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special mode process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit production pattern determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge bonus determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the main game production | presentation decision processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the 3rd challenge presentation determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the surprise production determination processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the icon determination process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the character strip production determination processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows a game machine additional bonus decision processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a game machine additional bonus reservation continuation decision processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the addition bonus scenario classification determination processing of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows a game machine top bonus initial processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the additional bonus presentation determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation lottery determination processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows a game machine top bonus end screen decision processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start presentation process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball counter addition process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows V winning a prize information processing of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production processing between rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production processing between the super big bonus rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation process between challenge bonus rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an effect processing between single game rounds of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between 3rd challenge rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between surprise rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production process between bonus rounds of the game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the processing between rounds of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process during round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an effect processing during a super big bonus round of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an effect process in a challenge bonus round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an effect | action process in the single game match round of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an effect process in the 3rd challenge round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows a presentation process in a surprise round of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an effect processing during a bonus machine during an addition bonus round of the gaming machine according to the first embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the V challenge during presentation processing of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a round of a gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end production process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the super big bonus end presentation process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the challenge bonus completion presentation process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows a game machine extra bonus end production processing concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows V challenge end production processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end production process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode change process of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows time saving mode end processing of a game machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows ST mode end processing of the gaming machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the discharge | release error alerting | reporting process of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display at the time of the normal time of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of time-saving mode of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display in 1st R-2R of the challenge bonus of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the single game game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the 3rd challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the 3rd challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the 3rd challenge of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the surprise of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the surprise of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the surprise of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of V challenge of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of V challenge of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of V challenge of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the presentation pattern of the game machine top bonus concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the addition bonus of the game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view showing a big winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern of the gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the displacement member action pattern of the game machine which concerns on other embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing of the game machine concerning other embodiments of the present invention. It is a front view of a game board in a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the big winning opening / closing pattern of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the table for hit symbol determination of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the table for hit pattern selection of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the starting memory area in the sub control circuit of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows special symbol control processing of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol display time management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit pattern selection process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start interval management process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows waiting time management processing before big opening mouth reopening of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing under big winning opening opening of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows a hit end interval management process of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol game end processing of the gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the switch input process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows gate switch check processing of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the production mode frequency | count counter update process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the start memory number update process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode change process of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit start presentation process of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows production processing before big winning a prize opening of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of big winning a prize opening opening of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows the hit end production processing of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows production mode control processing of a game machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows V winning a prize information processing of a gaming machine concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a screen display of the game machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the game flow of the gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

  1 and 2 are an external perspective view and a front view of a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the game board. FIG. 5 is a front view of the LED unit provided on the game board. The gaming machine of this embodiment is applied to a pachinko gaming machine as an example.

[Structure of gaming machine]
First, an overview of a pachinko gaming machine as a gaming machine will be described using FIGS. 1 to 5.

  As shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is a main frame base on which a game board 1 (see FIG. 3) having a game area in which game balls can roll and flow down is detachably provided. A front frame base plate 3a (also referred to as a front frame base) provided with a main body frame 2 provided with a board 2a (also referred to as a main body frame base) and an opening 3h (hereinafter referred to as a front frame opening) capable of visually recognizing the game board 1 And a front frame 3 rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 in front of the main body frame 2 (the player side), and a liquid crystal display device 4 for performing predetermined effect display (see FIG. 3). Comprises a rear frame base plate (not shown) detachably mounted, and a rear frame (not shown) rotatably supported by the main body frame 2 at the rear (the counter player side) of the main body frame 2 Have.

  The pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment is attached to an island facility (not shown) via the outer frame 6. The main body frame 2 is rotatably supported by the outer frame 6 via a main body frame hinge 2b. In addition, while the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2 in FIG. 1, the state which the main body frame 2 was closed with respect to the outer frame 6 is shown, and in this state, a back frame is Because it is housed in the outer frame 6, it is not shown.

  The front frame 3 has a front frame base plate 3a and various front frame constituent members provided on the front frame base plate 3a. The front frame component members include the protective glass 7, the dish unit 8, the operation unit 9, the speakers 10a to 10b, various decorative members (the top decoration 14, the right decorative member 15, the left decorative member 16) and the like. In addition, a front frame structural member is not limited to these, All the members which comprise the front frame 3 are contained. Further, in the pan unit 8, respective cover members (upper pan top cover 8a, lower pan cover 8b, etc.) are attached to the front frame base plate 3a via a locking structure described later.

  In the front frame 3, the above-mentioned front frame opening 3h is provided with a protective glass 7 having transparency. The protective glass 7 is detachably attached to the front frame opening 3 h (window portion) provided on the front frame base plate 3 a provided on the front frame 3 from the back side (back side) of the front frame base plate 3 a When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main frame 2, the front frame 3 faces the front (front) side of the game board 1 and covers the front (front) side. At the upper part of the front frame 3, speakers 10a and 10b are provided on both upper sides of the front frame opening 3h for producing effects by sound.

  Moreover, on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3, a decorative member for improving the appearance is provided so as to surround the front frame opening 3h. As an example of a decoration member, a top decoration 14 incorporating a playing card later described is provided on the upper side of the front frame opening 3h, and light emitting display modes are provided on the left and right of the front frame opening 3h. The right decorative member 15 (for example, the upper right lens 15a, the right middle lens 15b, the right panel cover 15c, etc.) and the left decorative member 16 (for example, the left outer lens 16a) that can be changed are provided.

  Inside the right side decorative member 15 and the left side decorative member 16, light emitting means (for example, a lamp, LED 27 etc.) controlled by a sub control circuit 70 (see FIG. 6) described later are provided (see FIG. 6) . The light emitted from the lamp / LED 27 passes through the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 and is detected from the right side decoration member 15 and the left side decoration member 16 as an aesthetically pleasing light or diffused light, for example. Thereby, since it is possible to change the display mode by the light, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

  Furthermore, a dish unit 8 is provided on the surface (front surface) of the front frame 3 below the front frame opening 3 h of the front frame base plate 3 a. The tray unit 8 is provided with an upper tray 17 for storing lending balls and prize balls, and a lower tray 18 provided on the lower side of the upper tray 17 and capable of storing, for example, gaming balls overflowing when the upper tray 17 is full. Is provided.

  The lower plate 18 includes a lower plate main body 18p capable of storing gaming balls, and a lower plate cover 8b attached so as to cover the upper portion of the lower plate main body 18p. On the other hand, the upper tray 17 includes an upper tray main body 17p capable of storing gaming balls, and an upper tray upper cover 8a removably attached to the front frame base plate 3a so as to cover the upper portion of the upper tray main body 17p. An upper plate decoration member is provided to improve the appearance of the upper plate 17. As an example of the upper dish decoration member, the upper dish main body 17p is provided with an upper dish left decoration 17a, an upper dish front decoration 17c, and the like so as to surround the upper dish upper cover 8a. In the upper plate upper cover 8a, it is bent from the left side to the lower side through the front side and from the middle toward the right side to the lower plate 18.

  A payout opening 20 for paying out gaming balls to the upper plate 17 and a discharge opening for discharging gaming balls stored in the upper tray 17 to the back side of the front frame base plate 3a (not shown) And a supply port 21 for supplying the lower plate 18 with gaming balls discharged from the discharge port. On the back side of the front frame base plate 3a, a ball passage cover (shown in FIG. 6) is configured to communicate the ball passage of the game ball dispensed from the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6) and the discharge port and the supply port 21. ) Is provided. When the gaming ball is paid out from the payout device 83, the gaming ball is sent to the upper tray 17 through the payout opening 20, but the upper portion of the gaming sphere is retained near the payout opening 20 although the gaming ball is paid out. Is full, or when the ball release button 22 provided on the upper plate upper cover 8a is pressed, the gaming balls stored in the upper plate 17 are discharged through the ball passage and the lower plate via the supply port 21. Sent to 18

  In the present embodiment, a plating member is used to decorate the front of the gaming machine, and the plating member 17b is also used to decorate the front portion 17c of the upper tray 17. By using the plating member 17b, the decorative effect of the appearance design of the game machine is enhanced to improve the player's interest.

  In addition to a return button 24 for returning a card from the card lending button 23 for receiving a ball lending, a card unit 84 for lending a gaming ball not shown (see FIG. 6), etc. An operation unit 9 is provided for changing the display mode of various effects by the player operating (pressing operation, rotating operation) during the game of. Although the arrangement configuration (position, orientation) of the operation unit 9 is not particularly limited, the pressing operation button 9A is vertically projected from the upper plate upper cover 8a in the drawing as an example, and the outer periphery of the pressing operation button 9A An operation unit 9 is shown in which the jog dial 9B is arranged.

  As for the front frame 3, among the front surface (front surface), a portion on the left side (that is, the side rotatably supported by the main body frame 2) from the player side, for example, an illegal piano wire or the like It is possible to assume that a fraudulent action by the fraudulent member is performed on various components built on the back surface of the front frame 3 in the vicinity of the back side of the portion by infiltrating the member.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an illegal act, a cover member (not shown) with a wire holding function is provided on the back surface of the front frame 3 at the portion where the intruding act by the illegal member is performed. The cover member with a wiring holding function includes a wiring holding portion for holding a wiring such as a harness, a substrate covering portion for covering a substrate (not shown) formed on the back surface of the front frame 3, and an illegal member such as a piano wire. It is configured to be integrated with a fraud prevention unit that prevents intrusion. According to this, it is possible to realize a single cover member with a wiring holding function that has the three functions of wiring holding, substrate covering, and fraud prevention, so it is necessary to separately prepare members for each of these functions. Can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced accordingly.

  The main body frame 2 includes a main body frame base plate 2 a and various main body frame components provided to the main body frame base plate 2 a. The main body frame constituent members include the launcher 26, the speaker 10c, various control boards, relay boards, and the like. The main body frame constituent members are not limited to these, and all the members constituting the main body frame 2 are included.

  In the main frame 2, a main frame opening (not shown) having substantially the same shape as the front frame opening 3 h is provided at a predetermined position of the main frame base plate 2 a facing the above front frame opening 3 h. In addition, on the surface (front surface) of the main body frame base plate 2a, on the lower right side of the main body frame opening portion, a launch device 26 for launching game balls is provided.

  The launcher 26 includes a panel 26a for disposing the launcher 26 on the lower right side of the surface of the body frame base plate 2a, a launch handle 26b disposed on the front side of the panel 26a, and a panel 26a. It is disposed on the lower right side of the surface of the main body frame base plate 2a opposite to the rear surface side of the main frame 2 and comprises a launch drive device (not shown) for launching game balls.

  In the lower right side of the front frame 3, a notch 3p for exposing the launcher 26 (panel body 26a, launch handle 26b) to the player side is provided. When the front frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 2, the launcher 26 (panel body 26 a, the launch handle 26 b) is exposed through the notch 3 p of the front frame 3 and adjacent to the above-described tray unit 8. Be positioned. Such a launcher 26 (panel body 26a, launch handle 26b) and the tray unit 8 have an aesthetic appearance as if they were integrated with one another in series.

  The launch handle 26b is rotatably mounted on a support portion (not shown) and the support portion, and is provided in a handle gop 26d rotatable clockwise and counterclockwise, and provided in the support portion. It is disposed so as to cover the opening of the handle grip 26d and a launch stop switch (not shown) for stopping the launch of the ball, a launch stop button 26e (also referred to as an operation member) for turning the launch stop switch ON / OFF. And a handle cap 26h.

  When the handle grip 26d of the discharge handle 26b is rotated clockwise, the drive force of the discharge drive is increased or decreased according to the amount of rotation (rotational angle), and the drive force at that time stores in the upper tray 17. The game ball being shot is launched toward the game area 1 p (see FIG. 3) of the game board 1. At this time, when the launch stop button 26e is operated, the launch drive device is controlled to stop, whereby the launch of the game ball can be stopped.

  In the present embodiment, the operation control of the firing stop switch and the firing handle 26b is performed by the payout / firing control circuit 82 (see FIG. 6) connected to the main control circuit 60 (see FIG. 6). Inside the launcher 26, a spring member (not shown) is provided for resiliently urging the handle grip 26d in the counterclockwise direction at all times, and the player can adjust the spring member to the elasticity. By rotating the handle grip 26d in the clockwise direction, the game ball is fired.

  Also, when the player interrupts the game and releases his hand from the handle grip 26d, the handle grip 26d is returned to the start time point position by the elasticity of the spring member. At this time, the firing stop button 26e is pressed by the protrusion (not shown) of the handle grip 26d, whereby the firing of the gaming ball is stopped.

  Here, as a method to increase or decrease the launch strength of the game ball, the resistance value of the launch volume (not shown) is changed according to the amount of rotation (rotation angle) of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b. Although it is known to increase or decrease the launch strength of the game ball by changing the power supplied to the a), the launch device 26 of this embodiment is operated to turn the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b. A firing spring (not shown) (not shown) and a gear mechanism (not shown) for rolling up (tightening) the firing spring are provided. In the launcher 26, the amount of rotation of the winding gear mechanism is adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle grip 26d of the launch handle 26b, thereby strengthening or weakening the degree of winding (tightening) of the launch spring. The launch strength of the is to be increased or decreased.

  The speaker 10 c is provided at the lower center of the main body frame 2 so as to perform effects by sound. A sound emitted from the speaker 10c is emitted through a speaker cover 10k provided at a portion of the plate unit 8 of the front frame 3 (specifically, a portion between the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 18). It has become.

  The game board 1 is disposed in front of a rear frame (not shown) so as to be located behind the protective glass 7, and has a game area 1p (see FIG. 3) in which the launched game balls can roll down. doing. In addition, although the game board 1 is formed by the material (for example, polycarbonate etc.) which has translucency, you may be formed by the material which does not have translucency like a plywood etc., for example.

  As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the game board 1 includes a guide rail 30, a stage 31, a first start opening 32, a second start opening 33, and a blade member 34 for opening and closing the second start opening 33. The first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, the first large winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second large winning opening 37, the second The specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B located below the big winning opening 37, the displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A, the plurality of general winning openings 40, the out opening 41, the upper movable effect member 42A, the lower movable effect A member 42B, a cover member 43, the liquid crystal display device 4, and the LED unit 5 are provided. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first start opening 32, the second start opening 33, the pass gate 35, the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, the specific area 38A, and the general winning opening 40. Thus, a winning area is formed. FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover member 43 is removed.

  The guide rail 30 is composed of an outer rail 30A and an inner rail 30B. The outer rail 30A is provided on the main body frame 2 and is disposed so as to surround the entire game area 1p. The inner rail 30B is for guiding the game ball to the upper portion of the game board 1 together with the outer rail, and is disposed on the left side of the game board 1 inside the outer rail. The game board 1 is attached to the main body frame 2 from the back side.

  The stage 31 is for distributing the flow-through area of the game balls in the game area 1 p and is disposed along the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  The game ball fired by the launch device 26 flows downward toward the lower part of the game board 1 while changing its traveling direction due to a collision with a game nail (not shown) or the stage 31 or the like which is driven into the game board 1. In this process, the game balls are collected by winning in any of the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, and the general winning opening 40, and If the player does not win a prize or passes the pass gate 35 and then does not win a prize, it is collected by being discharged from the out port 41.

  The term "winning" means that the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area. Specifically, the game ball passes through the winning area or enters the winning area to give an advantageous situation (for example, opening of the second start opening 33, symbol lottery, winning ball, etc. described later) to the player. It means to do. In this case, passage of the winning area by the gaming ball means mere passage, and entering of the winning area by the gaming ball means collecting the gaming ball separately from the out slot 41, but in any case, it will be described later. Since winning is detected when the game ball passes by the sensor switch, passage and entering are substantially equivalent. Therefore, the passage of the game ball to the winning area and the entering of the ball lead to the winning, so in the following description, it is unified by "winning" unless otherwise noted. In addition, the game ball may pass through the specific area 38A in some cases as "V prize winning".

  When the rotation angle of the firing handle 26 b is relatively small, the gaming balls flow down mainly on the left side of the stage 31 because the striking power given to the gaming balls is generally small. In addition, when the rotation angle of the firing handle 26b is relatively large, the game balls mainly flow down the right side of the stage 31 because the launch forces given to the game balls are generally large. In general, how to strike the game ball on the left side of the stage 31 is called "left-handed", and how to strike the game ball on the right side of the stage 31 is referred to as "right-handed".

  The first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 trigger a lottery under the condition that the game ball wins (enters), and the result of the lottery is displayed on the display area 4A of the LED unit 5 or the liquid crystal display device 4 Give an opportunity to In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 realize a first starting area and a second starting area.

  The first starting opening 32 is provided generally at the lower position at the center of the game board 1. When the game ball is won in the first starting opening 32, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper tray 17 or the lower tray 18 through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. The winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 32 is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6).

  The second start port 33 is provided immediately below the first start port 32. When a game ball is won in the second starting opening 33, a preset number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 17 or the lower plate 18 through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. In the second starting opening 33, the difficulty of winning is determined by the blade member 34 as a normal motorized part. The winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33 is detected by the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6).

  The wing members 34 open and close in the forward and backward directions of the game board 1 in the forward and backward directions, and an open state enabling the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33, and the second It is a so-called ordinary electric winning combination that switches between the closed state where it is impossible or difficult to win the game ball in the starting opening 33. The wing member 34 is driven by a wing member solenoid 340 (see FIG. 6).

  It should be noted that the ordinary motor winning combination is not limited to one operating the wing member 34 so as to open and close in the front and rear direction, for example, a so-called electric tulip type that opens the start opening by rotating in the left and right direction of the game board 1 It may be a tongue-like member that opens and closes the starting opening by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1.

  The passage gate 35 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33. The winning of the game ball on the passing gate 35 is detected by the passing gate switch 350 (see FIG. 6). Even if a game ball is won on the passing gate 35, no winning ball is generated.

  The first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are opened in a hit gaming state (big hit gaming state, small hit gaming state) which is a gaming state advantageous to the player. The first large winning opening 36 is generally on the right side of the first starting opening 32 and is provided immediately below the passage gate 35. The second large winning opening 37 is generally on the right side of the second starting opening 33 and is provided immediately below the first large winning opening 36. In addition, about the position where the 1st big winning opening 36 and the 2nd big winning opening 37 are arranged, it can change suitably according to the specification etc. of a game machine not only the position mentioned above.

  The first large winning opening 36 is formed in the gaming board 1 as an opening having a relatively large horizontal dimension so that a plurality of gaming balls can be simultaneously prized. In the vicinity of the first big winning opening 36, a first big winning opening shutter 36A for opening and closing the same is provided. The winning of the game ball to the first large winning opening 36 is detected by the first large winning opening count switch 360 (see FIG. 6).

  The second large winning opening 37 is formed on a part of the upper end surface of the cover member 43 as an opening having a relatively small vertical and horizontal dimension so that one game ball can win one by one. In the vicinity of the second large winning opening 37, a second large winning opening shutter 37A for opening and closing the second large winning opening 37 is provided. The winning of the game ball to the second large winning opening 37 is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370 (see FIG. 6).

  The first large winning opening shutter 36A switches the first large winning opening 36 to the open state or the closed state by opening and closing so as to be in the forward and backward posture in the front and rear direction of the gaming board 1, It is arranged to cover the first large winning opening 36 in the closed state. That is, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is changed to an open state in which the game ball can be won in the first large winning hole 36 and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. It is driven by the special winning opening shutter solenoid 360A (see FIG. 6).

  The second large winning opening shutter 37A switches the second large winning opening 37 to the open state or the closed state by moving horizontally in the longitudinal direction of the gaming board 1, and the second large winning opening 37 is closed in the closed state. It is arranged to cover. That is, the second large winning opening shutter 37A is changed to an open state in which the game ball can be won in the second large winning hole 37 and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. It is driven by the special winning opening shutter solenoid 370A (see FIG. 6).

  The specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B are areas through which gaming balls that have won the second large winning opening 37 can pass thereafter, and are covered with the cover member 43. A ball passage of the gaming ball from the second big winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B is formed by a partition wall (not shown) provided on the inner surface of the cover member 43. After passing through one of the specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B, the gaming ball having won the second large winning opening 37 is guided to the back of the game board 1 and collected. A second large winning opening count switch 370 is disposed at an intermediate position of the ball passage from the second large winning opening 37 to the specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B. The specific area switch 380A is disposed in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is disposed in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of gaming balls to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. Further, a displacement member 39 for opening and closing the specific area 38A is provided in the vicinity of the specific area 38A.

  The displacement member 39 switches the specific area 38A to the open state or the closed state by moving horizontally in the front-rear direction of the game board 1, and is positioned to cover the specific area 38A in the closed state. That is, the displacing member 39 changes to an open state (first state) in which the V winning of the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is easy (V1) and a closed state (V2) in which V winning is impossible or difficult. It is driven by a displacement member solenoid 390 (see FIG. 6). When the specific area 38A is in the closed state, the gaming ball for which the V winning is impossible will pass through the non-specific area 38B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first large winning opening 36, the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, and the first large winning opening count switch 360 are the first variable winning device. It has been realized. The second large winning opening 37, the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, and the second large winning opening count switch 370 realize a second variable winning device.

  One or more general winning openings 40 are provided at appropriate positions on the game board 1. When a game ball is won in the general winning opening 40, although a lottery is not performed, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out by the payout device 83 (see FIG. 6). The winning of the game ball on the general winning opening 40 is detected by the general winning opening switches 400A and 400B.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, as the normal gaming state controlled by the main control circuit 60 to be described later, the probability of winning the special symbol lottery and the non-probability change / non-time-short game state There is a probability variation gaming state (special gaming status) that is higher than the non-time saving gaming status, and a short gaming state when the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is higher than the non probability variation / non-time gaming status, special symbols in the normal gaming status When the lottery is won, it shifts to the big hit gaming state (specific gaming state).

  In the time saving game state, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is a high probability state, and therefore the winning of the second starting opening 33 is facilitated by the support of the blade members 34 as the normal electric throws. This state is a state called so-called "power support", and it becomes easy to store the holding balls of the special symbol game described later, and it is possible to suppress the loss of the game balls by winning in the second starting opening 33. Specifically, the time saving game state is a state in which the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is relatively high (time saving gaming state 1), the state in which the variation time of the special symbol or the normal symbol is relatively short (time saving gaming state 2 ), The opening time of the wing member 34 as a motorized part normally means at least one of the relatively long states (time saving gaming state 3). For example, the time saving game state also includes a state in which the time saving game state 1, the time saving game state 2, and the time short game state 3 simultaneously progress with any combination. In such a time saving game state, the possibility of shifting to the big hit game state is improved.

  After the end of the big hit gaming state that succeeded in V winning in the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state, transition to the probability change · short time gaming state (a normal gaming state that is a probability change gaming state, time saving game state) without fail It does not shift to a definite change / non-short time gaming state (a non normal probability gaming state, a non normal time gaming state, a normal gaming state). On the other hand, when the big hit gaming state ends with non-V winning without a V winning in the specific area 38A, the normal gaming state is a non-probability changing gaming state and a time saving gaming state after the end of the big hitting gaming state. It is supposed to move to

  Also, in this embodiment, after the end of the big hit gaming state, for example, the special symbol lottery (190 special symbol variation display or stop display) has been performed in the probability variation and time reduction gaming state non-offering, for example, non- It is supposed to shift to a definite change, non time saving game state. In addition, after the end of the jackpot gaming state, for example, in the non-probability · time-short game state 100 times or 4 special symbol lottery (100 or 4 times the variation display or stop display of special symbols) was triggered , Non-probability · non-time saving game state is to shift. In addition, after the end of the big hit gaming state, until it shifts to the next big hit gaming state, it may be made to maintain the probability variation / time saving gaming state. In the following description, the probability variation gaming state ending by performing the special symbol lottery a predetermined number of times as in the present embodiment will also be described as ST (Specia 1 Time) gaming state.

  The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B are in a state of being retracted behind the game board 1 at the time of non-operation, and appear in front of the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 when performing specific effects. Is located in The upper movable effect member 42A appears in front of the central portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and performs rotation operation and light emission. The lower movable effect member 42B appears in front of the lower portion of the display area 4A when a specific effect is performed, and emits light.

  The cover member 43 is provided to form the second large winning opening 37, and is attached below the first large winning opening 36. The cover member 43 forms the second large winning opening 37 by opening a part of the upper end surface thereof. In the state where the cover member 43 is attached to the game board 1, the displacement member 39 is positioned at the opening corresponding to the second large winning opening 37. Further, at the front edge of the upper end face of the cover member 43, a guide piece 43a for guiding the game ball toward the second large winning opening 37 is provided. Inside the cover member 43, a ball passage is formed from the opening corresponding to the second large winning opening 37 through the second large winning opening count switch 370 to the specific area 38A and the nonspecific area 38B. Such a cover member 43 is disposed to cover the second winning opening count switch 370, the specific area switch 380A, and the non-specific area switch 380B.

  The LED unit 5 notifies the player of each gaming state and the lottery result, and as shown in FIG. 5, the normal symbol display unit 51, the normal symbol hold display unit 52, the first special symbol display unit 53, the first 2) A special symbol display unit 54, a first special symbol hold display unit 55, a second special symbol hold display unit 56, and a round display unit 59 are provided. Although not illustrated, the lamp / LED 27 (see FIG. 6) disposed on the game board 1 etc. includes the one corresponding to the character appearance notification lamp, and the transition to the jackpot gaming state is normally determined Lights up (or blinks) when a special character (hereinafter also referred to as "SP character") appears in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 during part of the special symbol fluctuation in the gaming state or during the big hit gaming state It is supposed to be.

  The normal symbol display unit 51 determines whether or not the second starting port 33 is opened by driving the blade member 34 as a normal electric role when the gaming ball has won the passage gate 35 as a trigger. It displays the lottery result for the game. The normal symbol display unit 51 includes one LED lamp 511. The LED lamp 511 is capable of, for example, red lighting and blue lighting, and lights in red when winning in the normal symbol game, and lights in blue when losing in the normal symbol game. When the lighting mode of the LED lamp 511 in the normal symbol display unit 51 is, for example, a lighting mode of red, the blade member 34 is driven to open and close in a predetermined pattern, and the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting port 33 is permitted. In addition, as a lighting mode according to the winning and losing of the normal symbol game, other lighting modes may be used, for example, it becomes a lighting state or blink state in the case of winning, while it becomes the extinguishing state in the case of losing You may

  In the normal symbol holding display unit 52, a new gaming ball wins the passing gate 35 while the normal symbol display unit 51 is performing variable display by turning on or off the four LED lamps 521, 522, 523, 524. In the case of having performed, the number of executable times of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol held to perform the fluctuation display by the normal symbol display unit 51 after the next time is displayed. The four LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524 are normally located on the left side of the symbol display unit 51, and are arranged in a row along with the LED lamps 511. In the hold display by the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524, for example, when the number of holds is “1”, the LED lamp 521 is turned on and the LED lamps 522, 523 and 524 are turned off. When the number of reservations is "2", the LED lamps 521 and 522 turn on and the LED lamps 523 and 524 turn off. When the number of reservations is "3", the LED lamps 521, 522 and 523 are turned on and the LED lamp 524 is turned off. When the number of reservations is "4", all of the LED lamps 521, 522, 523 and 524 light.

  The first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 indicate the result of the winning lottery for the "special symbol game", and include, for example, a 7-segment LED. The first special symbol display unit 53 performs variable display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "first special symbols") serving as identification information triggered by winning of the game ball in the first starting opening 32 and The result of the winning lottery based on the winning on the starting opening 32 is stopped and displayed as the stopping symbol according to the first special symbol. The second special symbol display unit 54 performs variable display of symbols (hereinafter referred to as "second special symbols") serving as identification information triggered by winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 33, The result of the winning lottery based on the winning on the starting opening 33 is displayed as a stop symbol relating to the second special symbol. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 implement identification information display means.

  The variable display of the symbols by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is performed, for example, using a 7-segment LED or the like by repeating lighting and extinguishing each segment individually. The result of the winning lottery is displayed by a segment pattern (pattern) formed by turning on / off each segment of the first special symbol display section 53 and the second special symbol display section 54. At this time, the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the first special symbol and the plurality of hit symbols displayed by the second special symbol are different from each other. As a hit symbol of the first special symbol, it is a symbol serving as a transition trigger to the big hit gaming state, and indicates that it can shift to the probability variation playing state after the big hit gaming state ends, such as "probable change 1", "probable change 2" There is a nominal jackpot symbol such as "time saving 1" and "time saving 2" indicating transition to a non-probable and time-saving gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see FIG. 8). As a hit symbol of the second special symbol, it is a symbol that becomes a transition trigger to the big hit gaming state, and indicates that it can be shifted to the probability change gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, such as "probably 1 to 10" There is a nominal jackpot symbol and a nominal jackpot symbol such as "small hit" which is a trigger for transition to a so-called small hit gaming state (see FIG. 8). That is, there is no small hit symbol that triggers transition to the small hit gaming state in the first special symbol hit symbol, and the second special symbol hit symbol transitions to the short time gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends. There is no jackpot symbol to indicate. In addition, the 1st special symbol display part 53 and the 2nd special symbol display part 54 are not limited to 7 segment LED etc. For example, it may be based on combination of lighting and extinguishing of two or more LED lamps.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 includes four LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is obtained by turning on or off the LED lamps 551, 552, 553, 554. Or, for the first special symbol variation display for the next and subsequent special symbol games when the new game ball is won in the first starting opening 32 while the second special symbol display unit 54 is the variation display of the symbols for the special symbol game The number of executable times (number of holdings) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 held on the is displayed. The second special symbol hold display unit 56 includes four LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564, and the first special symbol display unit 53 is obtained by turning on or off the LED lamps 561, 562, 563, 564. Alternatively, the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended for the variation display of symbols for the next and subsequent special symbol games when a new game ball is won in the second starting opening 33 during the variation display of symbols for the special symbol game. The number of executable times (number of reservations) of the variable display of the second special symbol display portion 54 is displayed. Each of the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 is arranged side by side vertically, and is located above the normal symbol hold display unit 52. The display mode of the number of holdings in the first special symbol holding display unit 55 and the second special symbol holding display unit 56 is the same as the display mode of the number of holdings by the normal symbol holding display unit 52.

  The first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 are connected to the first starting opening 32 when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying variable. The game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 (see FIG. 6) provided in the communicating ball passage or the second starting opening switch 330 (see FIG. 6) provided in the ball passage leading to the second starting hole 33 If it is, the execution (start) of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended. When the symbols displayed variably in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 are stopped and displayed, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 which has been suspended is displayed. The variable display of the symbol is started.

  Here, an upper limit is set to the number of times the execution of the variable display of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is suspended, and in the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the first start opening 32 The number of pending variable displays of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 due to the winning of the game ball to the starting opening 33 is four at maximum. When the first special symbol game for the first special symbol display unit 53 is held for four times, the information of the first special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol display unit 53 during variation is the main RAM 63 (see FIG. Information of the first special symbol game for 4 times stored as starting memory (starting memory information) in the first special symbol starting memory area (0) of 6) is held as the first special symbol starting memory area ( 1) to 1st special symbol start storage area (4) is stored as start storage. Similarly, with respect to the second special symbol game, when held for four times, information of the second special symbol game corresponding to the second special symbol in motion is stored in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 ( Information on the second special symbol game stored for four times in the 0) as a start memory and held as a start memory in the second special symbol start memory area (1) to the second special symbol start memory area (4) It is memorized. Therefore, the number of prize holdings for both the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, that is, the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, is a maximum of eight in total.

  In addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56 or in addition to the first special symbol hold display unit 55 and the second special symbol hold display unit 56, the liquid crystal display device 4 Alternatively, the suspension of the winning on the first starting opening 32 and the suspension of the winning on the second starting opening 33 may be displayed.

  The round display unit 59 is lighted while the winning symbol is stopped, and indicates the number of rounds as the number of round games to be described later when the big hit gaming state is executed. The round display unit 59 includes three LED lamps 591, 592, and 593, and indicates the number of rounds when the big hit gaming state is executed by turning on or off the LED lamps 591, 592, and 593. In the present embodiment, for example, when the number of rounds is 16 (which may be described as “16R” in the following), the LED lamp 591 is turned on and the LED lamps 592, 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is twelve (sometimes referred to as “12R” in the following), the LED lamp 592 is turned on and the LED lamps 591 and 593 are turned off. When the number of rounds is eleven (sometimes referred to as "11R" in the following), the LED lamp 593 is turned on and the LED lamps 591, 592 are turned off. The number of rounds (number of rounds) may mean the whole number of times a round game (round game) is executed, or an ordinal number indicating the order in which the round games are sequentially executed. The number of rounds is, for example, "16 rounds" or "16 R", "12 rounds" or "12 R", when the former is meant, and when the latter is meant, for example, "16 R eyes", "12 R eyes" Write as etc. In the following description, "round game" may be simply referred to as "round".

  The liquid crystal display device 4 is disposed behind the gaming board 1 as shown in FIG. 3, and the display area 4A is disposed substantially at the center of the display panel 4 so that the player can visually recognize it. Other than the result of the hit lottery based on the winning of the game ball to the mouth 32 and the second starting opening 33, various images related to the game, for example identification symbol for effect, effect image in normal game state, effect in big hit game state An image, an effect image for demonstration display, and the like are displayed. That is, the liquid crystal display device 4 is configured to perform the fluctuation display of the identification information on condition that the gaming ball has won the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the liquid crystal display device 4 constitutes display means, and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c and the lamp / LED 27 constitute an effect execution means. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, these effect execution means are also used as notification means.

[Electric configuration of gaming machine]
Next, the control circuit of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 6, “switch” is abbreviated as “SW”, and “solenoid” is abbreviated as “SOL”.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the pachinko gaming machine includes a main control circuit 60 as a main control means for controlling a game and a sub control circuit 70 as a sub control means for controlling an effect according to the progress of the game. Have.

  The main control circuit 60 includes a main CPU 61, a main ROM 62 which is a read only memory, a main RAM 63 which is a read / write memory, an initial reset circuit 64, an I / O port 65, a command output port 66 as a command transmission means, and a backup capacitor 67. Is equipped. The main control circuit 60 is connected to various devices (devices, switches, and the like) including the LED unit 5.

  The main CPU 61 is connected to the main ROM 62 and the main RAM 63, and has a function of executing various processing in accordance with the program stored in the main ROM 62. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 determines the specific gaming state transition determining means (the first specific gaming state transition determining means and the second specific gaming state transition determining means), the specific gaming state control means, and the special gaming state control means , And a round game execution means (a first round game execution means and a second round game execution means) are realized.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first start opening switch 320 disposed behind the first start opening 32. When the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320, a winning lottery is performed.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second start port switch 330 disposed behind the second start port 33. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 330, a winning lottery is performed.

  The first start opening switch 320 and the second start opening switch 330 are determined to have won when the game ball has entered the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, and thus the predetermined detection signal is set. It supplies the main control circuit 60.

  A pass gate switch 350 disposed behind the pass gate 35 is connected to the main control circuit 60. When the game ball is detected by the passage gate switch 350, it is determined that the game ball has won in the passage gate 35, and a normal symbol lottery is performed. The result of the normal symbol lottery is displayed on the normal symbol display section 51. When a specific symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal symbol display portion 51, an effect image is displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to make the player know that the result of the normal symbol lottery is winning. You may

  The passage gate switch 350 supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 noting that winning is achieved when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed the passage gate 35. Thus, the passing gate switch 350 gives an opportunity to open the second start port 33.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a general winning opening left switch 400A and a general winning opening right switch 400B disposed behind the general winning opening 40 located on the left and right sides of the game board 1. When the game balls are detected by the general winning opening left switch 400A and the general winning opening right switch 400B, the payout device 83 performs a predetermined number of winning balls.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a first large winning opening count switch 360 disposed at the back of the first large winning opening 36. The first large winning opening count switch 360 is for counting the number of winnings of the gaming ball to the first large winning opening 36. When the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the first large winning opening count switch 360, the payout device 83 sets the number of gaming balls set in advance as the winning ball to the upper tray 17 or lower through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. Pay out on the plate 18.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a second large winning opening count switch 370 disposed at the back of the second large winning opening 37. The second large winning opening count switch 370 is for counting the number of winnings of the game ball to the second large winning opening 37. When the winning of the gaming ball is detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370, the payout device 83 sets the number of gaming balls set in advance as the winning ball to the upper tray 17 through the payout opening 20 or the supply opening 21. Alternatively, the bottom plate 18 is paid out.

  When the gaming ball passes through the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37, the first large winning opening count switch 360 and the second large winning opening count switch 370 mainly control predetermined detection signals. The circuit 60 is supplied.

  The main control circuit 60 is connected to a specific area switch 380A and a non-specific area switch 380B disposed in the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B. The specific area switch 380A supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 on the assumption that the V winning is achieved when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state. The non-specific area switch 380B supplies a predetermined detection signal to the main control circuit 60 on the assumption that the non-V prize is won when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed through the non-specific area 38B in the big hit gaming state.

  The main control circuit 60 drives a first large winning opening shutter 36A that opens and closes the first large winning opening 36, and a second large winning opening shutter opens and closes the second large winning opening 37. It exclusively controls the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A which drives 37A. As a result, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven to change to an open state in which the game ball can be won to the first large winning hole 36 and a closed state in which the winning of the game ball is impossible or difficult. In the situation where the first large winning opening 36 is at least in the closed state, the second large winning opening shutter 37A is in the open state where the game ball can be won to the second large winning opening 37 and the winning of the gaming ball Is driven to change into an impossible or difficult closed state. The opening driving of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 by the first large winning opening shutter 36A and the second large winning opening shutter 37A is the first special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display. It is performed when the special symbol in the part 54 becomes a specific stop display mode and is shifted to the big hit gaming state.

  The main control circuit 60 controls a blade member solenoid 340 that opens and closes the blade member 34. Thereby, when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed in the predetermined light emission mode in the normal symbol display portion 51, the blade member 34 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the gaming ball is put in the second starting opening 33 It becomes easy.

  For example, in the normal symbol game of this embodiment, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the gaming state which is not the short time gaming state (in the present embodiment "non-probability change / non-short time gaming state") is 0/257. Will not be released. On the other hand, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the high probability state (time-saving gaming state) is, for example, 257/257, and when it is won, the blade member 34 is opened three times for 1.3 seconds. Further, the number of normal symbols to be hit symbols in the normal symbol game is one, and the winning count number to be an upper limit when the second starting opening 33 is open is 10 (10).

  The main control circuit 60 controls a displacement member solenoid 390 that operates to open and close the displacement member 39 in the specific area 38A. Thereby, when the round game to be described later is being executed in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member 39 is opened for a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time, and the game ball easily passes through the specific area 38A. On the other hand, when the displacement member 39 is in the closed state even in the big hit gaming state, the game ball can not pass through the specific area 38A or becomes difficult, and the game ball easily passes through the non-specific area 38B.

  When the first starting opening switch 320 detects a game ball when the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is displaying the first special symbol hold display unit 55 variably, the first special symbol hold display unit 55 1) The first special symbol based on winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 32 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 The number of executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol is held, that is, the number of held according to the first special symbol. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the first special symbol that has been suspended as the number of reservations according to the first special symbol is started.

  The second special symbol hold display unit 56 is a second special start symbol switch unit 330 when the game ball is detected while the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is fluctuatingly displayed. 1 until the first special symbol or the second special symbol being variably displayed in the special symbol display portion 53 or the second special symbol display portion 54 is stopped and displayed, the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 33 The number of executions (starts) of the variable display of the special symbol is put on hold, that is, the number of held on the second special symbol. When the first special symbol or the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the second special symbol that has been suspended as the number of reservations according to the second special symbol is started.

  Here, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the priority of the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set such that the second special symbol has priority over the first special symbol. However, according to the winning order to the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, the corresponding first special symbol and second special symbol may be variably displayed according to the winning order.

  In addition, the upper limit is set to the number of reservations for which the execution of the variable display of the special symbol is held, as described above, and in the present embodiment, the main CPU 61 controls the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 The number of pending displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol when the game ball is won and the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 320 and the second starting opening switch 330, up to 4 each. (Ie, the number of times of detection is 4), and the fifth and subsequent ones are not stored as the number of reservations. Under the present circumstances, when the number of reservations reduces by completion | finish of the fluctuation display of a special symbol, the number of reservations is again added by making four pieces into an upper limit.

  When the number of pending first special symbol games in the first special symbol display unit 53 is held, for example, up to four, the information of the special symbol game corresponding to the first special symbol display unit 53 in change is the first of the main RAM 63 1 Special symbol start storage area (0) is stored as start storage, and thereafter, information on special symbol games for which the number of reservations is 4 is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to (4) of the main RAM 63 It is sequentially stored as starting memory.

  Similarly, for the second special symbol game in the second special symbol display unit 54, when the number of pending second special symbol games is held, for example, up to four, the second corresponding to the second special symbol display unit 54 being changed 2 Special symbol game information is stored as starting storage in the second special symbol start storage area (0) of the main RAM 63, and thereafter, the information of the second special symbol game for the number of pending four is the second of the main RAM 63 2 Special symbols start storage areas (1) to (4) are sequentially stored as start storage.

  Therefore, the maximum number of pending game balls pertaining to the special symbol game associated with winning in the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33 is a maximum of eight in total, and the first special symbol hold display portion 54 and the second special symbol The number of pending display by the LEDs 551 to 554 and the LEDs 561 to 564 of the pending display unit 55 is also four.

  In the open state of the first large winning opening 36 by the first large winning opening shutter 36A, the count value (number of winning game balls) by the first large winning opening count switch 360 becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10 winning numbers) It is maintained until one of the conditions is met, such as passing a predetermined opening time described later. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the first large winning opening shutter 36A elapses, the first large winning opening shutter 36A is driven to close the first large winning opening 36. Be done.

  Similarly, in the open state of the second large winning opening 37 by the second large winning opening shutter 37A, the count value (the number of winnings of the game ball) by the second large winning opening count switch 370 is a predetermined number (for example, 10 winning numbers). Or one of the conditions such as passing a predetermined opening time described later is maintained. When the number of winning game balls reaches a predetermined number, or when the opening time of the second large winning opening shutter 37A has elapsed, the second large winning opening shutter 37A is driven to close the second large winning opening 37 Be done.

  In the big hit gaming state, the open state and the closed state of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are repeated based on a preset large winning opening opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. In the big hit game state, the game in which the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are opened and closed for a predetermined number of times including a plurality of times based on a large winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) described later Is called "round game (round game)". A round game (round game) may be simply called a round. After the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 is closed in one round game, the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 is opened as the next round game. The state of up to is also referred to as "inter-round game" or "inter-round interval" or simply "interval". In one round game, each of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 may be in the open state and the closed state for a plurality of times. Further, in one round game, the open / close state of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 is exclusively controlled. That is, in one round game, while one big winning opening is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times, the other big winning opening is continuously closed.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, a so-called small hit gaming state is provided as a gaming state having a property different from the big hit gaming state. Unlike the big hit gaming state, the small hit gaming state is not defined by the concept of a round game, and in the small hit gaming state of this embodiment, it is defined that the second big winning opening 37 is opened only once. ing. Of course, in the small hit gaming state, control may be performed so that an arbitrary or specific large winning opening is repeatedly opened several times. The small hit gaming state is a gaming state in which the game is shifted in response to the winning of the small hit by the special symbol lottery. Before and after the transition to the small hit gaming state, basically the gaming state does not change. For example, when a small hit is won in the non probability variation gaming state and the small hitting gaming status is shifted to, the gaming status after the end of the small hitting gaming status remains the non probability variation gaming state before shifting to the small hitting gaming status It does not shift to the probability variation gaming state. Similarly, when a small hit is won in the probability variation gaming state and the small hitting gaming status is entered, the gaming status after the termination of the small hitting gaming status is the small hitting gaming status as long as the number of games in the probability variation gaming state remains. It remains in the probability variation gaming state before transitioning to, and does not shift to the non probability variation gaming state.

  A round game is counted as the number of rounds (number of rounds) like one round and two rounds. For example, the first round game may be referred to as a first round, and the second round game may be referred to as a second round. In the following description (including the drawings to be referred to in connection with the description), with regard to the numbered “round” such as one round or the first round, for example, simply “R” as in 1R, 2R, 4R, 16R, etc. In addition, in one round game, before the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 is opened a predetermined number of times, the upper limit number of winnings per round If it reaches, the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 will be closed, and the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 will not be opened for the remaining number of times of opening , The round game is ended.

  Further, in a specific round game in which the second large winning opening 37 is in the open state in the big hit gaming state, the displacement member 39 is controlled based on a preset operation pattern (displacement member operation pattern) described later. As a result, the specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state in the specific round game in the big hit gaming state. That is, in the specific round game, the game ball may pass the specific area 38A and become a V prize, while in the round games other than the specific round game, the game ball temporarily wins the second big winning opening 37 Even if it is, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to pass through the specific area 38A. In other words, the type of big hit gaming state (specific gaming state) is a big hit gaming state (first specific gaming state) including a specific round game and a big hit gaming state not including a specific round game (second specific gaming state) There is.

  In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image associated with the special symbol displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is displayed. For example, in the variable display of the special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, the display region 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is made of numerals except in a specific case. Symbols (decorative symbols), for example, numbers such as “0”, “1”, “2”.

  On the other hand, when the special symbol variably displayed in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54 is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  In addition, in the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, when the special symbol that has been changed or stopped is a specific stop display mode, the player is made to grasp that it is a "big hit". The effect image is displayed in the display area 4 A of the liquid crystal display device 4.

  Specifically, a special symbol is displayed on one of the first special symbol display unit 53 and the second special symbol display unit 54, for example, in a specific display mode corresponding to a "big hit" that can be obtained by many balls. When the stop display is performed, the combination of the decorative symbols for effect displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 is a specific display mode (for example, a state in which all the same symbols are aligned in each of a plurality of symbol rows The display image for the big hit is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4).

  The main CPU 61 included in such a main control circuit 60 is placed in a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, on the condition that the game medium has passed through the first start area (the first start opening 32). It functions as a first specified game state transition determining unit that determines whether to shift. Further, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, on the condition that the game medium has passed through the second start area (the second start opening 33) It functions as a second specified gaming state transition determination means.

  Further, the main CPU 61 controls the gaming state to the specific gaming state on the condition that the first or second specific gaming state transition judging means obtains the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state. Act as.

  Further, the main CPU 61 determines that the specific gaming state transition determining unit causes the specific gaming state transition determination unit to shift to the specific gaming state after the specific gaming state ends on the condition that the game medium has passed the specific area 38A in the specific gaming state. Functions as special gaming state control means for controlling the special gaming state (probable variation gaming state) which is relatively easy to be obtained.

  In addition, the main CPU 61 is a round game (round game) in which the first variable winning device (the first large winning opening shutter 36A) is varied in the first mode (opened state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific gaming state. Function as a first round game execution means for executing a predetermined number of times. During execution of at least one round game, the main CPU 61 functioning as the first round game execution means can perform control to change the first variable winning device to the first aspect and the second aspect a plurality of times. .

  In addition, the main CPU 61 is a round game (round game) in which the second variable winning device (second large winning opening shutter 37A) is varied in the first mode (opened state) and the second mode (closed state) in the specific gaming state. Function as a second round game execution means for executing a predetermined number of times. The main CPU 61 functioning as the second round game execution means is a first round game mode in which passing of the second variable winning device to the specific area 38A is relatively easy during execution of at least one round game. It is possible to perform control to vary in the first aspect and the second aspect, and the passage of gaming media to the specific area 38A is relative to the second variable winning device during the execution of at least one other round game. It is possible to perform control which fluctuates to the 1st mode and the 2nd mode in the difficult 2nd round game mode.

  In the big hit gaming state, the round game is executed a predetermined number of times by the first round game execution means, and the easy round game is executed according to the first round execution pattern by the second round game execution means, and the round game is predetermined. The first specific gaming state which is executed a number of times and the round game is executed a predetermined number of times by the first round game executing means, and the second easy to run round game is different from the first round executing pattern by the second round game executing means The second specific gaming state in which the round game is executed a predetermined number of times while the round game is executed a predetermined number of times by the first round game execution means while being executed according to the round execution pattern The game is the first round execution pattern and the second round Being performed in accordance with the third round execution pattern different from the row pattern, round game is realized a specific game state (win sorting specific game state) containing a third specific game state that is executed a predetermined number of times.

  A specific example of control of the main CPU 61 for realizing each of the above-described means will be described later.

  The main ROM 62 stores programs for causing the main CPU 61 to execute various processes, which will be described later, including various functions of the main CPU 61 described above, and various tables.

  The main RAM 63 has a function of storing various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61. As a temporary storage area of the main CPU 61, another readable and writable storage medium can be used instead of the main RAM 63.

  The initial reset circuit 64 generates a reset signal when the power is turned on, and is connected to the main CPU 61.

  The I / O port 65 transmits input signals from various devices to the main CPU 61, and transmits output signals from the main CPU 61 to various devices.

  The command output port 66 transmits various commands from the main CPU 61 to the sub control circuit 70.

  The backup capacitor 67 is for holding various data stored in the main RAM 63 by supplying power to the main RAM 63 promptly when the power is disconnected.

  The various devices connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A, a second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A, a wing member solenoid 340, a displacement member solenoid 390, and an external terminal board 80. .

  The external terminal board 80 is connected to an external device such as a calling device (not shown) having a function of calling a hall clerk and a function of displaying the number of big hits, or a hall computer 100 managing a plurality of pachinko machines installed in the hall. Is for data communication.

  Various switches connected to the main control circuit 60 include a first start opening switch 320, a second start opening switch 330, a passing gate switch 350, a first large winning opening count switch 360, and a second large winning opening count switch 370. , A specific area switch 380A, a non-specific area switch 380B, a general winning opening left switch 400A, a general winning opening right switch 400B, and a backup clear switch 81.

  The backup clear switch 81 clears the backup data of the main control circuit 60 and the payout / firing control circuit 82 described later at the time of power interruption or the like according to the operation of the hole manager.

  Further, the main control circuit 60 is connected with the launch device 26, the payout device 83, and the card unit 84 via the payout / firing control circuit 82.

  The main control circuit 60 transmits a prize ball control command to the payout / emission control circuit 82. The dispensing and firing control circuit 82 mainly controls the launching device 26 and the dispensing device 83, and the launching device 26, the dispensing device 83, and the card unit 84 are connected. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the payout / firing control circuit 82 and the payout device 83 realize a game value giving unit.

  The card unit 84 is connected to a ball lending operation panel 85 that outputs a signal requesting the lending of gaming balls in accordance with the operation of a player, and can transmit and receive signals with the ball lending operation panel 85. .

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 receives a prize ball control command supplied from the main control circuit 60 and a rental ball control signal supplied from the card unit 84, and transmits a predetermined signal to the payout device 83. Causes the payout device 83 to pay out the game ball. The payout device 83, for example, pays out three game balls as the number of winning balls per winning to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40 or the first big winning opening 36 or the second Ten game balls are paid out as the number of winning balls per winning to the large winning opening 37.

  The payout / firing control circuit 82 is a solenoid (not shown) according to the amount of rotation when the player handles the firing handle 26b of the launching device 26 and rotates the device in the clockwise direction. Power is supplied to the game area 1p, and control is made to shoot the game ball toward the game area 1p.

  The main CPU 61 interrupts the main processing and executes timer interrupt processing as interrupt processing even during execution of main processing described later. The timer interrupt process is executed triggered by an interrupt condition that occurs every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms).

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the main control circuit 60, and is configured to be supplied with a command from the main control circuit 60.

  The sub control circuit 70 performs various controls in response to various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60, and the sub CPU 71, program ROM 72, work RAM 73, command input port 74, backup capacitor 75, display control A circuit 76, an audio control circuit 77, a lamp control circuit 78, and a movable effect apparatus control circuit 79 are included. The liquid crystal display device 4 is connected to the display control circuit 76. The voice control circuit 77 is connected to the speakers 10 a, 10 b and 10 c. A lamp / LED 27 is connected to the lamp control circuit 78. The movable effect device control circuit 79 is connected to the movable effect device 42 including a motor, a mechanism, and the like for driving the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B.

  The sub control circuit 70 is connected to the push operation button switch 90A provided to the push operation button 9A and to the jog dial switch 90B provided to the jog dial 9B. The pressing operation button switch 90A is for detecting the operation of the pressing operation button 9A, and the jog dial switch 90B is for identifying the rotation direction and the rotation angle of the jog dial 9B. The sub control circuit 70 is supplied with a pressing operation signal from the pressing operation button switch 90A, and is supplied with a rotation operation signal from the jog dial switch 90B.

  The sub CPU 71 has a function of executing various processes in accordance with the program stored in the program ROM 72. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit. In particular, the sub CPU 71 controls the entire sub control circuit 70 in accordance with various commands supplied from the main control circuit 60. In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the sub CPU 71 implements display control means, advance notification means, scheduled amount determination means, notification quantity change means, and effect pattern selection means. The program ROM 72 and the work RAM 73 implement storage means.

  The liquid crystal display device 4 displays at least a part of the number of times of execution of the round game executed by the first round game execution means and the second round game execution means in the prize distribution specific game state, the round number notification image (round number described later Functions as display means that can be displayed by the icon shown). The sub CPU 71 and the program ROM 72 function as display control means for controlling the display means (liquid crystal display device 4).

  The sub CPU 71 is a prize distribution specific game state (a round game of changing the first large winning opening 36 to the opening mode and the closing mode is executed a plurality of times by the specific game state transition determining means, and the second large winning port 37 is opened. Before the easy-to-pass round game is executed by the second round game execution means, on condition that it is decided to shift to the big hit gaming state in which the round game fluctuating to the aspect and the closing aspect is executed a plurality of times) It functions as a prior notification means capable of executing a prior notification to notify that the passing easy round game is to be executed. The liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a display unit capable of displaying a round number notification image based on the execution timing of the prior notification by the prior notification unit.

  In addition, the program ROM 72 changes the display pattern (display color) of the round number notification image (an icon indicating the number of rounds to be described later) until the notification round game is performed, for each round number at which the notification round game is executed. Functions as storage means for storing image display mode change pattern information (a table for an icon change lottery to be described later) indicating a change pattern of

  The sub CPU 71 is a number of substantive round games (round games in which winning to the first large winning opening 36 is facilitated) executed by the first round game executing means (main CPU 61) in the prize distribution specific gaming state, The upper limit number of accepted gaming media to the first variable winning device (the first large winning opening 36) specified for the number of times of the actual round game (upper limit winning number), and the gaming media to the first variable winning device The number of game values (game balls) awarded by the game value provider (payout device 83) per accepted number of games (winning numbers) and the number of award balls (the number of balls) and the second round game executing means (main CPU 61) The second variable defined for the number of substantial round games to be executed (round game that makes winning to the second large winning opening 37 easy) and the number of the substantial round games. The upper limit number of accepted gaming media to the prize device (second large winning opening 37) (upper limit number of winnings) and the gaming value provided by the gaming value giving means per accepted number of gaming media to the second variable winning device The present invention functions as a scheduled grant amount determining means for determining the scheduled grant amount of game value based on the grant number of and.

  In addition, the liquid crystal display device 4 functions as a notifying means capable of notifying a part of the planned provided quantities determined by the planned provided quantity determining means, and the sub CPU 71 plans the quantity notified by the notifying means. It functions as an informing amount changing means which can be changed within the range of the scheduled amount to be determined determined by the amount determining means.

  The sub CPU 71 functions as an effect pattern selection means capable of selecting an effect pattern according to the type of the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), and the liquid crystal display device 4, the speakers 10a, 10b, 10c and the lamp / LED 27 produce effects Based on the effect pattern selected by the pattern selection means, it functions as effect execution means capable of executing effects in the specific gaming state.

  A specific example of control of the sub CPU 71 that implements each of the above-described means will be described later.

  The program ROM 72 stores programs for controlling the various effects mainly by the sub CPU 71 and various tables.

  The work RAM 73 stores various data (flags, counters, timers, values of variables, etc.) as temporary storage areas of the sub CPU 71.

  The command input port 74 receives various commands transmitted from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60, and transmits the various commands to the sub CPU 71.

  The backup capacitor 75 is for holding various data stored in the work RAM 73 by supplying power to the work RAM 73 promptly when the power is disconnected.

  The display control circuit 76 is for performing display control in the liquid crystal display device 4 in accordance with data supplied from the sub CPU 71. For example, an image data processor (VDP) and various image data are generated. It comprises an image data ROM in which data is stored, a frame buffer for temporarily storing image data, and a D / A converter for converting image data as an image signal. The configuration of the display control circuit 76 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The display control circuit 76 temporarily stores, in the frame buffer, image data to be displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in response to an image display command supplied from the sub CPU 71. The image data includes, for example, decorative symbol image data, background image data, various effect image data, various fraud notification image data, and the like.

  The display control circuit 76 also supplies the image data stored in the frame buffer to the D / A converter at a predetermined timing. The D / A converter converts the image data as an image signal and supplies the image signal to the liquid crystal display device 4 at a predetermined timing. In the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an image is displayed based on the image signal from the D / A converter.

  The voice control circuit 77 is for performing control relating to voice and the like generated from the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, for example, a sound source IC for performing control relating to voice and the like, voice data ROM for storing various voice data, voice signal Includes an amplifier (AMP) for amplifying the The configuration of the voice control circuit 77 is also merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  The sound source IC controls the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b and 10c, and one of a plurality of sound data stored in the sound data ROM according to a sound generation command supplied from the sub CPU 71. Audio data can be selected.

  The sound source IC also reads out the selected audio data from the audio data ROM, converts the audio data into a predetermined audio signal, and supplies the audio signal to the amplifier. In addition, this amplifier amplifies an audio | voice signal and generates audio | voice from speaker 10a, 10b, 10c.

  The lamp control circuit 78 is for controlling the lamp / LED 27 including a decoration lamp and the like, a drive circuit for supplying a lamp control signal, and a decoration data ROM etc. in which a plurality of types of lamp decoration patterns are stored. It consists of The configuration of the lamp control circuit 78 is also merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.

  For example, in the big hit game state, the movable effect device control circuit 79 operates the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B by the operation of the pressing operation button 9A or the like during the effective period of the operation on the operation unit 9 Etc.) to control the rendering operation.

[Playing state and effect mode of the gaming machine]
Next, the gaming state and effect mode of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. The gaming state is controlled by the main CPU 61, and the effect mode is controlled by the sub CPU 71.

  As shown in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a normal mode, a special mode, a time saving mode, and an ST mode as effect modes in the normal gaming state. In the time saving mode, there are relatively many time saving modes such as the short mode which impresses that the time saving mode becomes the relatively small number of games (the number of times the special symbol changes, ie, the number of games of the special symbol game) as effects. There is a long mode to impress that it will be the number of games. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, a super big bonus, a challenge bonus, an additional bonus, and a V challenge are implemented as effect modes in the big hit gaming state. The challenge bonus includes one match, three challenges and a surprise.

  The normal mode is an effect mode of non-deterministic change and non-short time game state. The normal mode is a transition from the special mode when, for example, 10 special symbol games are consumed as the number of games in the special mode, and an effect of an impression different from the special mode is produced. In this normal mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "3" or "7", it shifts to a super big bonus as an effect mode. In addition, in the normal mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”, transition to a challenge bonus is performed as the effect mode. In the normal mode, the combination pattern of the decorative symbols "3" and "7" corresponds to the big hit symbols corresponding to the "special variation 1" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is displayed stopped together with these big hit symbols Ru. Also, in the normal mode, the combination pattern of the decorative symbols "1", "2" and "4" to "6" is any of the "special variation 2", "time 1 reduction" and "time 2 reduction" of the first special symbol. Corresponds to the jackpot symbols that correspond to crab, is displayed stopped with these jackpot symbols.

  The special mode is internally the same as the normal mode, and is an effect mode of non-deterministic change and non-time-short play state. The special mode shifts to the normal mode when, for example, 10 special symbol games are consumed. The special mode shifts from the short time mode when, for example, the special symbol game of 4 or 100 times is absorbed as the number of games in the short time mode, and the special symbol game of 190 times as the number of games in the ST mode. When it is digested, it shifts from the ST mode, and an effect of an impression different from the time saving mode or the ST mode is performed. Also in this special mode, similarly to the normal mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "3" or "7", the effect mode is shifted to a super big bonus. In addition, in the special mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “1”, “2”, “4” to “6”, it shifts to the challenge bonus as the effect mode. The relationship between the combination pattern of the decorative symbols “1” to “7” and the special symbol in the special mode is the same as that in the normal mode.

  The time saving mode is an effect mode of non-deterministic change and time saving gaming state. In the time saving mode, regardless of whether the normal gaming state is the time saving gaming state or the non time saving gaming state, when the big hit symbol corresponding to “time saving 1” of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state. This is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state corresponding to this "time saving 1" jackpot symbol, and is continued until the special symbol game of basically 100 times is digested by being given 100 times as the number of games, for example . In the time saving mode, when the big hit symbol corresponding to the "time saving 2" of the first special symbol is stopped in the normal gaming state of the time saving gaming state, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the "time saving 2" big hit symbol The game is executed after the end and is given 100 times as the number of games in the same manner as described above, and the game is continued until basically 100 special symbol games are consumed. On the other hand, in the time saving mode, when the big hit symbol corresponding to "time saving 2" of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in the normal gaming state of non time saving game state, the big hit game corresponding to the big hit symbol of "time saving 2" Although it is executed after the end of the state, it is given only four times as the number of games, and basically it will be continued until four special symbol games are consumed. Such a short time mode is executed after the end of the big hit gaming state, when it finally becomes a non-V prize in the big hit gaming state. In addition, in FIG. 8, for convenience, it is shown that it shifts to the time saving mode on condition of non-V prize from the challenge bonus of the big hit gaming state, but it is not limited to this, in this embodiment, other than the big hit gaming state Even in the production mode of, for example, super big bonus, additional bonus, or V challenge, the mode is shifted to the time saving mode if the condition for non-V winning is satisfied.

  In the time saving mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "3" or "7", it shifts to the super big bonus as the effect mode. In addition, in the time saving mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”, the effect mode is shifted to an additional bonus. Furthermore, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol different from “1” to “7” in the time saving mode, it shifts to V challenge as the effect mode. In the time saving mode, the combination pattern of the decorative symbols "3" and "7" corresponds to the big hit symbols corresponding to the "certain variation 1" of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and is stopped and displayed together with these big hit symbols Ru. Also, in the time saving mode, the combination pattern of the decorative symbols “1”, “2”, “4” to “6” is a big hit that corresponds to any of “certain 2” to “certain 9” of the second special symbol. It corresponds to the symbols, and is displayed stopped together with these jackpot symbols. Furthermore, in the time-saving mode, the specific symbol as the decorative symbol corresponds to the big hit symbol corresponding to the “special variation 10” of the second special symbol, and the small hit symbol of the second special symbol, and stops with these hit symbols Is displayed. In such a time-saving mode, transition to the special mode is performed when the special symbol game given as the number of times of the game is digested without being displayed as the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. Become.

  The short mode in the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that gives an impression when the number of games to be awarded is four, and even when the number of games is 100, it is up to the fourth which is the beginning To be performed. The long mode in the time saving mode is executed as an effect mode that gives an impression when the number of games to be given is 100 times, and for example, the short mode when the number of games becomes 4 or more from the start of the time saving mode. It may be performed with the presentation aspect which impresses promotion from.

  The ST mode is a production mode with a definite change and a short time gaming state, and is executed in conjunction with the transition of the gaming state to the positive change gaming state (ST gaming state) after the end of the big hit gaming state that finally became V prize winning. It is The ST mode is continued until the special symbol game of 190 times is basically absorbed by being given 190 times as the number of games, for example.

  When the decorative symbols “1” to “7” and the specific symbol are stopped and displayed in the ST mode, the operation is the same as in the time saving mode. That is, in the ST mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of "3" or "7", it shifts to a super big bonus as the effect mode. Further, in the ST mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination mode of “1”, “2”, and “4” to “6”, the effect mode is shifted to the additional bonus. Furthermore, in the ST mode, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a specific symbol, it shifts to V challenge as the effect mode. The relationship between the decorative symbol and the special symbol in the ST mode is the same as that in the time saving mode.

  The super big bonus is executed in conjunction with a so-called full open big hit gaming state of 16R, and is an effect mode executed as an effect mode that impresses the big hit gaming state. The big hit game state of 16R full open is a game state controlled so that hit pattern 1 occurs as a big winning opening / closing pattern to be described later (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such a big hit game state of 16R full open, when there is a V prize, as the effect mode, it shifts from the super big bonus to the ST mode. Although not particularly illustrated in FIG. 8, there is also a possibility that there is no V prize in the event of a 16R full open big hit game state, and in such a case, from super big bonus to time saving mode as an effect mode. It will be migrated.

  The challenge bonus is an effect mode that is executed in conjunction with the 12R jackpot gaming state and executed as an effect mode that impresses the jackpot gaming state. As the types of challenge bonus, one game, three challenges, and a surprise are prepared, and in the first round (in the embodiment, 1R to 2R) in which the challenge bonus is executed, the player performs the pressing operation. By operating the button 9A or the jog dial 9B, it is possible to select one match, three challenges, or a surprise. In one match, three challenges, and a surprise, different predetermined presentation contents are executed. The big hit game state of 12R is a game state controlled such that one of the hit patterns 2 and 3 occurs as a big winning opening opening and closing pattern described later (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such a 12R jackpot gaming state, when there is a V prize, as the effect mode, it shifts from the challenge bonus to the ST mode. On the other hand, in the 12R jackpot gaming state, when there is no V prize in the end, as the effect mode, it shifts from the challenge bonus to the time saving mode.

  The extra bonus is executed in conjunction with the 11R or 16R jackpot gaming state, and is an effect mode executed as an effect mode that impresses the jackpot gaming state. The 11R or 16R jackpot game state is a game state controlled to generate one of the hit patterns 4 to 11 as a large winning opening opening and closing pattern described later (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such a 11R or 16R jackpot gaming state, when there is a V prize, as the effect mode, transition from the bonus to the ST to the ST mode. Although not particularly illustrated in FIG. 8, there is also a possibility that there is no V prize in the event of a big hit game state of 11R or 16R, and in such a case, transition from an extra bonus to a time saving mode as the effect mode. It will be done.

  The V challenge is a round in which winning to the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 is possible, and a round in which the V winning becomes easy (a round game in which winning to the second large winning opening 37 is easy) It is an effect mode that is executed interlockingly with the 11R big hit gaming state (also referred to as a "slip V") or a small hit gaming state in which only 1R is included. The big hit gaming state of this bump V is a gaming state controlled so that the hit pattern 12 is generated as a big winning opening opening and closing pattern described later, and the small hitting gaming state is a hitting pattern 13 as a large winning opening opening and closing pattern described later It is a gaming state controlled to occur (see FIGS. 8 and 11). In such a big hit game state of the bump V, when there is a V prize, as the effect mode, it shifts from V challenge to ST mode. Although not particularly illustrated in FIG. 8, in the jackpot gaming state of the bump V, there may be a case where there is no V prize in the end, and in such a case, the effect mode is to shift from V challenge to time saving mode . In the small hit gaming state, while the V challenge is executed as the effect mode, when the small hit gaming state ends regardless of the V prize, the effect mode is basically the effect before the V challenge is executed. It will shift to the mode.

  In addition, the second special symbol becomes a big hit symbol or small hit symbol in the non-time saving game state, and accordingly, the first special symbol becomes a big hit symbol in the case of transitioning to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state In the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state accordingly, the effect mode corresponding to those hit symbols is to be executed. Therefore, there may be transition from the normal mode or the special mode to the additional bonus or V challenge, or transition from the ST mode to the super big bonus or the challenge bonus.

[Specs of gaming machines]
Next, specifications regarding the game characteristics of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the present embodiment, the hit probability of the special symbol including the small hit probability described later is 1 / 239.18 (274/65536) in the low probability time (non-probability changing gaming state), It is 1 / 81.92 (800/65536) in high probability (probability change gaming state). The small hit probability of being in the small hit gaming state is 0 in the first special symbol, and 1 / 299.25 (219/65536) in the second special symbol. The first special symbol and the second special symbol are digested in order of priority given to the lottery with the second special symbol. As the probability variation performance (specification of the probability variation gaming state), the ST gaming status in which the probability variation gaming state continues up to 190 times as the number of games (number of times of variation of the special symbol) is implemented.

  The distribution of special symbols is as follows. That is, in the big hit symbol “probable variation 1” of the first special symbol and the big hit symbol “probable variation 1” of the second special symbol, the big winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) becomes the hit pattern 1 and the number of rounds in the round game is 16R ( Among them, the real winning number which is easy to win is 16R), and the super big bonus is executed as the effect mode of the big hit gaming state, and the effect content is "16R bonus". The probability (rush rate) to be “certainly variable 1” as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is set to 5/100, and the probability (rush rate) to be “positive variation 1” as the big hit symbol for the second special symbol is , Is set to 10/100.

  The first special symbol of the big hit symbol "probable variation 2", the hit pattern 2 will be round number 12R (of which the actual number of rounds 10R) is granted, as a presentation mode is executed a challenge bonus, as a presentation content "challenge bonus 12R It is "successful". The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "Probability 2" of the first special symbol is set to 25/100.

  The first special symbol big hit symbols "time 1" and "time 2", the hit pattern 3 is, round number 12R (of which the actual number of rounds 10R) is given, as a presentation mode is performed a challenge bonus, as a presentation content Is a "challenge bonus 12R failure". The rush rate of the big hit symbol "time-shortening 1" of the first special symbol is set to 25/100, and the rush rate of the big hit symbol "time-shorting 2" of the first special symbol is set to 45/100.

  In the big hit design "probability variation 2" to "probability variation 9" of the second special symbol, it becomes hitting patterns 4-11. Among them, the second special symbol big hit symbols "probable variation 2"-"probable variation 4", the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 15R) is given, as the effect mode is executed bonus bonus, as the content of each The bonus bonus is 15R, the bonus after 4R → 15R, and the bonus after 8R → 15R. The rush rates of the big hit symbols “probability 2” to “probability 4” of the second special symbol are set to 8/100, 1/100, and 1/100, respectively.

  In the big hit symbols of the second special symbol "probability 5" to "probability 9", the number of rounds 16R (of which the actual number of rounds 12R), the number of rounds 11R (of which the actual number of rounds 10R), the number of rounds 11R (of which the actual number of rounds 8R The round number 11R (of which the actual number of rounds 6R) and the number of rounds 11R (of which the actual number of rounds 4R) are given, and an extra bonus is executed as the effect mode. The bonus 10R, the additional bonus 8R, the additional bonus 6R, and the additional bonus 4R are provided. The rush rates of the big hit symbols “probability 5” to “probability 9” of the second special symbol are set to 4/100, 11/100, 30/100, 5/100, 20/100, respectively.

  The second special symbol of the big hit design "probable variation 10", the hit pattern 12 will be given the number of rounds 11R (of which the actual number of rounds 1R) is given, V presentation is performed as the production mode, as the presentation content "V challenge success It is ". The rush rate of the jackpot symbol "Probability Variation 10" of the second special symbol is set to 10/100.

  In the small hit symbol of the second special symbol, it becomes the hit pattern 13, V challenge is performed as the effect mode, and "V challenge failure" as the effect content. The rush rate of the small hit symbol of the second special symbol is set to 1/1. In the small hit gaming state, unlike the big hit gaming state, there is no concept of a round game, so the number of rounds is not defined.

  The special winning opening count number is set to count up to 10 in each of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 as the upper limit winning number per round. Time-saving performance (specification of time-saving gaming state) is set so that the time-saving gaming state continues up to 100 times or 4 times during high probability (while in probability variation gaming state) or in non probability variation gaming state . The number of winning balls is three per winning combination to the starting opening (the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33), 10 per winning combination to the general winning opening 40, and the large winning opening (first It is set so that it will be 10 per one winning combination for the large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37). The hit probability of a normal symbol is set to 0/257 at low probability and 257/257 at high probability. The number of symbols per hit is set to one. The winning count number when the second starting opening 33 is opened is set to count up to 10 as the upper limit.

[1 round opening and closing pattern]
Next, the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening in one round will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality of opening and closing patterns A to I are defined as opening and closing patterns (one round opening and closing pattern) of one round for the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37. The opening and closing patterns A to H are opening and closing patterns corresponding to the big hit gaming state, and the opening and closing pattern I is an opening and closing pattern corresponding to the small hit gaming state. Note that the opening / closing pattern I of the small hit gaming state is not defined as one round, but is shown along with other opening / closing patterns A to H for convenience. The first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are simply referred to as a large winning opening unless it is necessary to distinguish them. The opening and closing patterns A to I shown in FIG. 9 are merely examples, and a specific time or the like defining the opening and closing patterns may be other than illustrated.

  The open / close pattern A is an open / close pattern in which the open state continues over 27.222 s. The open / close pattern A is defined as a round section from the time when it is first opened to the time when it is finally closed. Similarly to the other opening and closing patterns B to H, the round section is defined as the time from the first opening to the final closing. In the section where the open state is 27.222 s, the open state of the special winning opening is relatively long open. That is, in the opening and closing pattern A, long opening is generated once, and the total opening time of the opening and closing pattern A is 27.222 s.

  The open / close pattern B is an open / close pattern in which the closed state is 2.898 s after the open state is initially 0.102 s, and then the open state continues over 27.222 s. In the section where the open state is 0.102 s, the open state of the special winning opening is a relatively short open state. That is, in the open / close pattern B, after the short open has occurred once, the open state is generated once through the closed state, and the total open time of the open / close pattern B is 27.324 s. It should be noted that in the open state where the short opening is made, winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening becomes extremely difficult, while in the open state where the long opening is coming, winning of the gaming ball to the big winning opening is sufficiently possible and facilitated ing. Such short circuit opening is similar not only to the opening and closing pattern B but also to opening and closing patterns C and E to H described later.

  The open / close pattern C is an open / close pattern in which the open state is only for 0.102 s. That is, the opening and closing pattern B is such that short circuit opening occurs only once, and the total opening time of the opening and closing pattern C is 0.102 s.

  In the opening and closing pattern D, after the open state is 2.202 s, the closed state is 1.002 s, and after the open state is 2.802 s, a series of open and close cycles in which the closed state is 1.002 s are repeated five times It is an open / close pattern which is generated and then, finally, becomes 2.202 s in the open state. In sections where the opening status is 2.202s or 2.802s, the opening time of the big winning opening is longer than the short opening and is shorter than the long opening, and the middle opening is different from both the short opening and the long opening. . That is, the opening and closing pattern D is such that middle opening occurs repeatedly 11 times, and the total opening time of the opening and closing pattern D is 27.222 s. In the open state where the middle is open, it is possible for the game ball to win the big winning opening. Such middle opening is similar not only to the opening and closing pattern D but also to an opening and closing pattern E described later.

  The open / close pattern E repeatedly occurs six times as 0.102 s and 1.200 s, respectively, and then, similarly to the above-mentioned open / close pattern D, the above-mentioned series of open / close cycles occur repeatedly five times, and further thereafter Finally, the open / close pattern is 2.202 s. That is, in the open / close pattern E, after the short open repeatedly occurs 6 times, the middle open repeatedly occurs 11 times, and the total open time of the open / close pattern E is 27.834 s.

  The open / close pattern F is an open / close pattern in which the closed state is 1.200 s after the open state is initially 0.102 s, and then the open state is 0.102 s. That is, the opening and closing pattern F is such that short circuit opening occurs repeatedly twice, and the total opening time of the opening and closing pattern F is 0.204 s.

  In the opening and closing pattern G, after the open state is first 0.102 s, the closed state is 1.200 s, then the open state is 0.102 s, and then the closed state is 1.200 s, and finally the open state Is an open / close pattern of 0.102 s. That is, the opening and closing pattern G is such that short circuit opening occurs repeatedly three times, and the total opening time of the opening and closing pattern G is 0.306 s.

  The opening and closing pattern H is defined as the same opening and closing pattern as the opening and closing pattern C. That is, the open / close pattern H is such that only one short circuit opening occurs, and the total open time of the open / close pattern C is 0.102 s. In the present embodiment, the opening and closing patterns C and the opening and closing patterns H which are the same as each other are defined to be distinguished, but one opening and closing pattern may be defined collectively without particular distinction.

  The open / close pattern I is an open / close pattern that only causes the open state to be 1.5 s. The section in which the open state is 1.5 s is the middle open. That is, the opening and closing pattern I is such that only one middle opening occurs, and the total opening time of the opening and closing pattern I is 1.5 s.

  When the substantial round game in the jackpot gaming state is controlled on the basis of opening and closing patterns A, B, D, E including long opening or middle opening where winning of a game ball is possible among the opening and closing patterns A to I described above. The round game of corresponds. The round game when the opening and closing control is performed based on the remaining opening and closing patterns C, F to I is a non-actually round game that does not correspond to a substantial round game.

[Displacement member operation pattern]
Next, an operation pattern of the displacement member 39 which opens and closes the specific area 38A will be described with reference to FIG.

  The displacement member 39 basically operates in conjunction with the open / close state of the second large winning opening 37 regardless of the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state. As shown in FIG. 10, the actuation pattern of the displacement member 39 (displacement member actuation pattern) basically closes the specific region 38A after the first 0.102 s operation period in which the specific region 38A is opened. There are 2.898 s of non-operating periods, and then it is defined as an operating pattern that continues up to a maximum of 29.222 s. The total actuation time of the displacement member actuation pattern is 32.222s. Since the open state of the specific area 38A becomes relatively short in the operation period of 0.102s, the V winning to the specific area 38A becomes extremely difficult. On the other hand, since the open state of the specific area 38A is relatively long, the V winning to the specific area 38A is relatively easy because the operating period which is 29.222s at the longest is relatively long. In addition, about the operation period which becomes the longest 29.222 s, in the 1 round when the 2nd big winning opening 37 is opened and closed, for example, the 2nd winning opening 37 is closed by the large winning opening count number reaching the upper limit winning number When the predetermined monitoring processing time for residual balls, which will be described later, is passed, the displacement member 39 is inactivated and the specific area 38A is closed even before the maximum defined length of 29.222s has elapsed. Can be

[Large winning opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) and interval between rounds]
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the big hit opening / closing pattern (hit pattern) and the interval between rounds in the big hit gaming state and the small hit gaming state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 11, a plurality of hit patterns 1 to 13 are defined as the special winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern). The hit pattern 1 occurs during the super big bonus, and the number of rounds defined for the rounds that are generally open (hereinafter referred to as “prescribed round number”) and the long opening or the winning opening to the big winning opening is possible The number of substantial rounds defined only for the rounds including at least middle opening is the hit pattern defined as 16R. In addition, the interval between rounds is a section where the big winning opening is closed until the big winning opening is first opened in the next round after the big winning opening is finally closed in one round. Correspondingly, as shown in the figure, as a pattern of the interval between rounds, an interval pattern a in which the time (closing time) to be in the closed state is 1200 ms and an interval pattern b in which the time is 102 ms are defined. In hit pattern 1, all inter-round intervals are interval pattern a, and second large winning opening 37 becomes opening and closing pattern B and opening and closing pattern A at each of the 1R and 11R eyes, and 2R to 10R and 12R, respectively. The first large winning opening 36 is defined to be the open / close pattern A in all of the eyes to 16R. That is, hit pattern 1 is 16 rounds in which the actual number of rounds is equal to the specified number of rounds, and both of the 1st and 11th eyes are executed as rounds in which the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 2 is a hit pattern that occurs on a challenge bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 12R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 10R. In hit pattern 2, all inter-round intervals are interval pattern a, and second large winning opening 37 becomes opening and closing pattern H and opening and closing pattern B at each of the 1R and 11R eyes, and 2R to 10R and 12R, respectively. The first big winning opening 36 is defined to be the opening and closing pattern A and the opening and closing pattern C in the eye. That is, the hit pattern 2 is the 10th round of the 2Rth to 11Rth in the actual round number, and only the 11Rth is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 3 is a hit pattern that occurs on a challenge bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 12R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 10R. In hit pattern 3, only the inter-round interval between the 10th and 11th eyes is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern a, and the second big prize in any of the 1st and 11th eyes The opening 37 is defined as the opening and closing pattern H, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined as the opening and closing pattern A in all of the 2nd to 10th and 12th eyes. That is, hit pattern 3 is substantially round number of 2R to 10R and 10R of 12R, and both of 1R and 11R are executed as rounds in which it is impossible or difficult to win V specific area 38A. Ru.

  The hit pattern 4 is a hit pattern that is generated for the bonus bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 15R. In hit pattern 4, only the inter-round interval between the 10th and 11th eyes is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening in each of the 1st and 11th eyes The opening / closing pattern 37 and the opening / closing pattern H are defined as 37, and the first big winning opening 36 is defined as the opening / closing pattern D in all of the 2nd to 10th eyes and the 12th to 16th eyes. That is, the hit pattern 4 has 15 rounds of 1Rth to 10Rth and 12R to 16R in the actual round number, and only the 1R is executed as a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 5 is a hit pattern that is generated for the bonus bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 15R. In hit pattern 5, only the inter-round interval between the 10th and 11th eyes is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening in each of the 1st and 11th eyes 37 is the opening and closing pattern B and the opening and closing pattern H, and the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening and closing pattern E at the 5Rth, the second to the fourth R, the sixth to the tenth R, and the twelfth to the sixteenth It is defined that 1 large winning opening 36 has an opening and closing pattern D. That is, the hit pattern 5 has 15 rounds of 1Rth to 10Rth and 12R to 16R in the actual round number, and only the 1R is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 6 is a hit pattern which is generated for the bonus bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 15R. In hit pattern 6, only the inter-round interval between the 10th and 11th eyes is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening in each of the 1st and 11th eyes 37 is the opening and closing pattern B and the opening and closing pattern H, and the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening and closing pattern E at 9R, and the first winning at 2R to 8R, 10R, and 12R to 16R. The mouth 36 is defined to be the opening and closing pattern D. That is, in the hit pattern 6, the actual number of rounds is 1st to 10th and 12th to 16th, and 15 rounds, and only the 1Rth is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 7 is a hit pattern which is generated for the bonus bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 16R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 12R. In hit pattern 7, only the inter-round interval between the 10th and 11th eyes is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening in each of the 1st and 11th eyes 37 is the opening and closing pattern B and the opening and closing pattern H, and the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening and closing pattern F at the 14th to 16th eyes, and the first large prize at the 2nd to 10th eyes and the 12th to 13th eyes The mouth 36 is defined to be the opening and closing pattern D. That is, the hit pattern 7 has 12 rounds of 1R to 10R and 12R to 13R in the actual round number, and only the 1R is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 8 is a hit pattern which is generated upon an extra bonus and in which the specified number of rounds is 11R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 10R. In hit pattern 8, only the inter-round interval between the 10th and 11th eyes is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening in each of the 1st and 11th eyes The opening / closing pattern 37 and the opening / closing pattern H are defined as 37, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined as the opening / closing pattern D at the 2nd to 10th eyes. That is, the hit pattern 8 is the 10th round of the 1Rth to 10Rth in the actual round number, and only the 1Rth is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 9 is a hit pattern which is generated for the bonus bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 11R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 8R. In hit pattern 9, only the inter-round interval between the 10th and 11th eyes is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening in each of the 1st and 11th eyes The opening / closing pattern 37 and the opening / closing pattern H are defined as 37, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined as the opening / closing pattern D and the opening / closing pattern G at 2R-8R and 9R-10R. That is, the hit pattern 9 is an eighth round of the first to eighth R rounds, and the first R only is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 10 is a hit pattern which is generated upon an extra bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 11R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 6R. In hit pattern 10, only the inter-round interval between the 10th and 11th eyes is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening in each of the 1st and 11th eyes The first large winning opening 36 has the opening and closing pattern D, the opening and closing pattern F, and the opening and closing pattern at the 2nd to 6th, 7th to 8th, and 9th to 10R eyes. It is defined to be C. That is, in the hit pattern 10, the actual number of rounds is the first to sixth rounds of six, and only the first round is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 11 is a hit pattern that is generated for the bonus bonus, and in which the specified number of rounds is 11R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 4R. In hit pattern 11, only the inter-round interval between the 10th and 11th eyes is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening in each of the 1st and 11th eyes The opening / closing pattern 37 and the opening / closing pattern H are defined, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined as the opening / closing pattern D and the opening / closing pattern C in the 2nd to 4th and 5th to 10th eyes. That is, in the hit pattern 11, the actual number of rounds is four in the first to fourth R, and only the first R is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 12 is a hit pattern which occurs upon V challenge in the big hit gaming state, and in which the specified number of rounds is 11R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 1R. In hit pattern 12, only the inter-round interval between the 10th and 11th eyes is the interval pattern b, and the other inter-round interval is the interval pattern a, and the second big winning opening in each of the 1st and 11th eyes The opening / closing pattern 37 and the opening / closing pattern H are defined as 37, and the first large winning opening 36 is defined as the opening / closing pattern C at the 2nd to 10th eyes. That is, the hit pattern 12 is one round in which the substantial number of rounds is only the first R, and only the first R is executed as a round in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy.

  The hit pattern 13 is generated upon V challenge in the small hit gaming state, and the second large winning opening 37 is defined to be the opening / closing pattern I only once. That is, in the hit pattern 13, there is a possibility that the game ball may win against the second big winning opening 37, and there may be V winning on the specific area 38A, but temporarily there is V winning on the specific area 38A. Is also executed as it can not shift to the probability variation gaming state.

[Operation timing in super big bonus (hit pattern 1)]
Next, operation timing in the super big bonus (hit pattern 1) will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 12 as an example, at the 1R-th of the super big bonus (hit pattern 1), with the start of the open state of the second big winning opening 37, the displacement member based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. By activating 39, the specific area 38A is opened and closed so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 37. Specifically, in the first R, after the second large winning opening 37 ends the long opening (section of the opening state is 27.222s) and becomes the closing state, the second large winning opening 37 from the second large When a predetermined monitoring processing time for monitoring the remaining balls remaining in the ball passage up to the winning hole count switch 370 elapses, the displacement member 39 is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, The specific area 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific area 38A is in the closed state through the open state of about 28.320s, which is slightly shorter than 29.222s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. In addition, in the first R, while the second large winning opening 37 is long open, there is a case where the V winning of the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is not detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this case, the liquid crystal display device 4 does not particularly display a warning prompting a V winning on the specific area 38A.

  On the other hand, at the 11R's of the super big bonus (hit pattern 1), with the start of the open state of the second big winning opening 37, the displacement member 39 operates based on the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. The specific area 38A is in the open state and in the closed state so as to interlock with the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 37. However, even in the 11th R, when the second large winning opening 37 ends the long opening (the open state is a section of 27.222s) and enters the closing state, the displacement member 39 passes after passing the predetermined monitoring processing time described above. Is forcibly controlled from the operating state to the non-operating state, the specific area 38A changes from the open state to the closed state. That is, the specific area 38A is in the closed state through the open state of 25.320 s which is shorter than 29.222 s defined as the longest operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. In addition, in this 11R, it has been 10s since, for example, 13s, that is, the specific region 38A is opened according to the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern, after the second large winning opening 37 is opened long. However, when the V winning of the gaming ball in the specific area 38A is not detected by the specific area switch 380A, the liquid crystal display device 4 executes a warning display prompting the V winning in the specific area 38A. When a V winning is detected by the specific area switch 380A during execution of such a warning display, the execution of the warning display is ended. The execution of the warning display is also ended when the second large winning opening 37 is closed without detecting the V winning by the specific area switch 380A and the 11th R is finished.

[Operation timing in challenge bonus (hit pattern 2)]
Next, the operation timing in the challenge bonus (hit pattern 2) will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13 as an example, in the 1R's of the challenge bonus (hit pattern 2), as in the case of the 1R's of the super big bonus (hit pattern 1) shown in FIG. The specific area 38A is in the open state and the closed state so as to interlock with the opening and closing. In the first R of the challenge bonus (hit pattern 2), for example, 10 seconds after the second large winning opening 37 is opened long, that is, the specific area 38A is opened according to the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern. Even if 10 seconds have passed, if the V winning of the gaming ball in the specific area 38A is not detected by the specific area switch 380A, the liquid crystal display device 4 executes a warning display prompting the V winning in the specific area 38A. When a V winning is detected by the specific area switch 380A during execution of such a warning display, the execution of the warning display is ended. The execution of the warning display is also ended when the second large winning opening 37 is closed without detecting the V winning by the specific area switch 380A and the first R is finished.

  On the other hand, in the 11Rs of the challenge bonus (hit pattern 2), the second large winning opening 37 is only one short open (a section of 0.102 s in the open state), but this second large winning opening With the start of the open state 37, the displacement member 39 is actuated based on the displacement member actuation pattern shown in FIG. Thus, the specific area 38A is in the open state and in the closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 37. However, in this 11R, when the second big winning opening 37 ends short open and is in the closed state, the 11R ends, so control using the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. finish. Therefore, when the 11Rth eye ends, the displacement member 39 does not enter the operating state for the longest operating period, and the specific area 38A is switched from the open state to the closed state by being controlled to the non-operating state. That is, the specific area 38A is closed only through an open state of about 0.102s defined as a short operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. In the 11R's of such a challenge bonus (hit pattern 2), a warning display for prompting a V winning on the specific area 38A is not executed.

[Operation timing in bonus bonus (hit pattern 8)]
Next, the operation timing in the additional bonus (hit pattern 8) will be described using FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14 as an example, in the 1Rth of the additional bonus (hit pattern 8), the second large winning opening 37 is only one short open (a section of 0.102 s in open state). With the start of the open state of the second large winning opening 37, the displacement member 39 is actuated based on the displacement member actuation pattern shown in FIG. Thus, the specific area 38A is in the open state and in the closed state so as to be interlocked with the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 37. However, in this 1R, since the 1R ends when the second big winning opening 37 ends the short open and becomes the closed state, the control using the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. 10 is also performed at that time. finish. Therefore, when the first R is finished, the displacement member 39 is not in the operation state for the longest operation period, and the specific area 38A is in the closed state from the open state by being controlled to the non-operation state. That is, the specific area 38A is closed only through an open state of about 0.102s defined as a short operation period by the displacement member operation pattern shown in FIG. In the 11R's of such a challenge bonus (hit pattern 2), a warning display for prompting a V winning on the specific area 38A is not executed.

  On the other hand, in the 11R's of the extra bonus (hit pattern 8), as in the case of the 1R's of the challenge bonus (hit pattern 2) shown in FIG. 38A is in the open and closed states. In the 11Rth of this additional bonus (hit pattern 8), for example, 10 seconds after the second large winning opening 37 is opened long, that is, the specific area 38A is opened according to the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern. Even if 10 seconds have passed, if the V winning of the gaming ball in the specific area 38A is not detected by the specific area switch 380A, the liquid crystal display device 4 executes a warning display prompting the V winning in the specific area 38A. Even when such a warning is displayed, the second large winning opening 37 ends the long opening and enters the closed state without the V prize being detected by the specific area switch 380A, and the warning is displayed when the 11th R is finished. Will also end. In addition, when the V winning combination is detected by the specific area switch 380A during the execution of the warning display, the execution of the warning display is ended with this as a trigger. The execution of the warning display may be ended when the displacement member 39 is inactivated.

[Operation timing in hit pattern 4 (from the end of 9R to the beginning of 12R)]
Next, operation timing in the hit pattern 4 (from the end of the 9R to the beginning of the 12R) will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 15 as an example, when the 9th R is finished according to the hit pattern 4, the round state is transitioned to the round state A as an interval between rounds after the 9th R is finished.

  When the round state A ends after a predetermined closing time (1.2 s of the interval pattern a), the state shifts to the round state B in which the 10th R is under execution. In the round state B, the first large winning opening 36 repeats middle opening (opening states of 2.202 s and 2.802) 11 times in accordance with the opening / closing pattern D.

  When the last middle opening of 11 times is finished in the round state B, the round state B is ended, and the round state C is shifted to the round state C as an interval between rounds after the end of the 10th R.

  When the round state C ends after a predetermined closing time (0.102 s of the interval pattern b), the state transitions to the round state D in which the 11th R is under execution. In the round state D, the second large winning opening 37 is short-opened (opened state of 0.102 s) only once in accordance with the opening and closing pattern H.

  When one short release is completed in the round state D, the round state D is ended, and the round state E is shifted to the round state E as an interval between rounds after the end of the 11Rth.

  When the round state E ends after a predetermined closing time (1.2 s of the interval pattern a), the state shifts to the round state F in which the 12th R is in progress. In the round state F, the first large winning opening 36 repeats the middle opening according to the opening and closing pattern D again.

  According to the operation according to such a hit pattern 4, the open state of the second large winning opening 37 at the 11Rth is only one short opening, and the first large winning opening at the 10Rth and 12Rth before and after Since it becomes extremely short compared to the middle open state where the open state of 36 is made, it is difficult to tell that the open / close state of the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 has switched, and whether or not each round is executed It is considered difficult to determine. This is also due to the fact that the closing time of the inter-round interval (0.102 s of interval pattern b) before execution of the 11th R is shorter than the closing time of other inter-round intervals (1.2 s of interval pattern a) .

  In addition, in the inter-round interval (round state C) before the 11Rth execution and the 11Rth (round state D), the effect at the end of the 10Rth (round state B) is continuously executed. That is, it is difficult to recognize that a new effect is being executed even if the 10Rth to the 11Rth are shifted. The closing time of the game state E may be the same as the closing time of the game state C.

[Operation timing by hit pattern 11 and hit pattern 5]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the operation timing of the hit pattern 11 (from the end of 4R to the end of 11R) and the hit pattern 5 (from the end of 4R to the end of 5R) will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 16 as an example, in the case of the hit pattern 11, after the first large winning opening 36 ends the last open state (middle opening of 2.202s) according to the opening / closing pattern D at the 4Rth, 5R. According to the opening and closing pattern C, the first big winning opening 36 repeats short opening of 0.102 s six times to the eyes 10R. Then, after passing a predetermined closing time (0.102 s of the interval pattern b) after finishing the 10 R th, the second big winning opening 37 becomes an open of 0.1 02 s according to the open / close pattern H as an 11 R th .

  The liquid crystal display device 4 displays the following effect image from the end of the fourth R of the hit pattern 11 to the end of the 11R. That is, in the hit pattern 11, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating that the additional bonus is being performed, from the end of the 4Rth to the start of the 5Rs. From the start of the 5th R to the end of the 11R, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating an end display pattern. Then, when the 11th R is finished, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating a title pattern to be described later for a predetermined time. When the display of the effect image indicating the title pattern is ended, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the effect image indicating that the ST mode is in progress.

  Further, as shown as an example in FIG. 16, in the case of the hit pattern 5, the first large winning opening 36 ends the last open state (middle opening of 2.202 s) according to the opening and closing pattern D at the 4Rth. After a predetermined closing time (1.2 s of interval pattern a) from this end, the first large winning opening 36 repeats 0.102 s short opening six times in the early stage according to the opening and closing pattern E as the 5th R, Thereafter, middle opening (2.202 s and 2.802 s opening states) is repeated 11 times.

  The liquid crystal display device 4 displays the following effect image from the fourth R end to the fifth R end of the hit pattern 5 as described above. That is, in the hit pattern 5, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating that the additional bonus is being performed, from the end of the 4Rth to the start of the 5Rs. The liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image indicating an end display pattern while the first large winning opening 36 repeats the short open six times after the fifth R is started. Then, when the first big winning opening 36 finishes opening the short and starts opening the middle, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays an effect image for causing a special character (SP character) described later to appear. When the display of the effect image for causing the special character to appear is ended, the liquid crystal display device 4 displays the effect image indicating that the additional bonus is being performed again.

  According to the operation according to such a hit pattern 11, the fifth to eleventh eyes are executed while the effect image of the end display pattern is displayed, the effect image of the title pattern is displayed after the end of the 11R eye, and then the big hit In the state where the gaming state has ended, the effect image in the ST mode is displayed. On the other hand, according to the operation according to the hit pattern 5, since it is an early stage of the 5R during the display of the effect image of the end display pattern, after the early stage of the 5R concerned (after repeating the short open six times) The effect image of the special character appearance is displayed on the screen, and then the effect image in the additional bonus is redisplayed. Thereby, in the effect display at the time of execution of the hit pattern 5, a so-called "reverse effect" is realized.

  Further, during execution of the hit pattern 5, the effect image of the finish display pattern displayed in a pseudo-like manner is so controlled as to be displayed based on the display time matched to the time length of the 5th to 11th eyes of the hit pattern 11. It has become. That is, the effect image of the end display pattern in the hit pattern 5 is a short open time for seven rounds, an inter round interval time for five rounds (interval pattern a), and an inter round interval time for one round (intervals The pattern b) is continuously displayed for 6.816 s which is the total. Thus, it is difficult to distinguish the hit pattern 5 from the hit pattern 11 when the effect image of the end display pattern is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, in the operation according to hit pattern 5, only the effect image of the end display pattern is displayed at the beginning of the 5th R, but the effect image of the title pattern is displayed together with the end display pattern You may do it. Further, although the effect image of the end display pattern has the same content in both of the hit pattern 5 and the hit pattern 11, the effect image of the end display pattern corresponding to the hit pattern 5 corresponds to the hit pattern 11. The content may be different from the content, for example, the content may indicate that the additional bonus continues. In addition, by making the display timings of the effect image of the end display pattern corresponding to the hit pattern 5 different from the display timing of the effect image of the end display pattern corresponding to the hit pattern 11, it is suggested that the additional bonus continues. Good.

[Various tables]
Next, various tables referred to by the sub CPU 71 will be described with reference to FIGS. In the table, lottery value (random number value) information for determining predetermined items based on lottery values (random number values) extracted (lottery) from a predetermined random number range is defined. Value information is synonymous with a so-called lottery rate. The lottery value information (lottery rate) can be changed as appropriate. In the following description, "random number value" may be simply referred to as "random number".

<Table for Challenge Success Lottery>
FIG. 17 shows a challenge success / failure lottery table. The challenge success or failure lottery table is a table referred to in a challenge success or failure lottery process (S450 of FIG. 120) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The challenge success / failure lottery table has a challenge success / failure pattern No. 1 to 3 (No. 1: Challenge Failure → Last Chance Failure, No. 2: Challenge Failure → Last Chance Success, and No. 3: Challenge Success), "Success" and "Fail" Reference Items, and Reference Items In accordance with the above, lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the challenge success / failure pattern by random number lottery is defined. As an example, challenge success / failure pattern No. In 1, the lottery value information corresponding to “success” is 0 (lottery ratio 0), and the lottery value information corresponding to “failure” is 32768 (lottery ratio 32768/32768). The challenge success or failure pattern No. In 2, the lottery value information corresponding to "success" is 8192 (lottery ratio 8192/32768), and the lottery value information corresponding to "failure" is 0 (lottery ratio 0). The challenge success or failure pattern No. The lottery value information 3 corresponding to “success” is 24576 (lottery ratio 24576/32768), and the lottery value information corresponding to “failure” is 0 (lottery ratio 0). In the challenge success / failure lottery table, if the winning effect pattern flag to be described later is "02H" (the internal flag corresponding to the hitting pattern 2 with the big hit symbol of the first special symbol being "probable variation 2"), it corresponds to "success" If the lottery value information to be selected is referred to and the hit effect pattern flag is "03H" (the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is the "hour flag 1" or "time flag 2", an internal flag corresponding to hit 3), "failed The lottery value information corresponding to “is referred to. The challenge success or failure pattern No. When 1 to 3 are determined, challenge success / failure pattern flags “01H” to “03H” are set as internal flags corresponding to the respective ones.

  According to such a challenge success / failure lottery table, the challenge success / failure pattern No. is made based on a hit effect pattern to be described later. 1 to 3 are determined by lottery. For example, challenge success / failure pattern No. When 3 (challenge success) is determined, a presentation image impressing the "success" of the round execution that can be awarded V in the third to eighth R of the jackpot gaming state is displayed. Moreover, challenge success / failure pattern No. When 2 (challenge failure → last chance success) is determined, a presentation image impressing “success” of the round execution that can be awarded V in the 10R's of the big hit gaming state is displayed. Furthermore, challenge success / failure pattern No. When 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure) is determined, a presentation image impressing “failure” of the round execution that can be awarded V in the 10R's of the big hit gaming state is displayed.

  In addition, as the lottery value information corresponding to “success” of the challenge success / failure lottery table, challenge success / failure pattern No. The lottery rate of 2 is the challenge success or failure pattern No. It may be defined to be higher than the lottery rate of 3. Alternatively, it may be defined to be the same lottery rate. In addition, as lottery value information corresponding to “success”, challenge success / failure pattern No. It may be defined that the lottery rate for 1 is greater than 0. That is, even when the effect image which impresses the "fail" of the round execution which can be V-winning is displayed, the V-practicable round may be executed.

<One match and match combination drawing table>
FIG. 18 is a view showing a table for one-competition game combination lottery. The one-competition game combination lottery table is a table referred to in the one-competition game combination lottery process (S460 in FIG. 121) in the one-competition game effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The single match match combination drawing table is a No. 1 decision item. One match according to the reference items such as “1: failure → failure”, “2: failure → success”, and “3: success” of the challenge success / failure pattern and one match game combination pattern of 1 to 45 It defines lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a combination pattern by random number lottery. In the single match game combination lottery table, when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "01H", the lottery value information corresponding to "1: failure → failure" is referred to, and the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "02H" The lottery value information corresponding to “1: failure → success” is referred to, and when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is “03H”, the lottery value information corresponding to “3: success” is referred to. In addition, challenge success / failure pattern No. 1 to 3 are formally “challenge failure → last chance failure”, “challenge failure → last chance success”, “challenge success”, but for the sake of convenience, challenge success / failure pattern No. 1 to 3 are abbreviated as "failure → failure", "failure → success", "success". Also in the table described below, the challenge success / failure pattern No. It may be abbreviated about 1-3.

  According to such a single game combination lottery table, based on the challenge success or failure pattern, for example, a single game combination pattern No. 1 of the presentation content having a motif of rock-paper-scissors. 1 to 45 are determined by lottery. For example, one match game combination pattern No. If 43 (Aiko count "100" → serif "Decide to finalize !!" → small button → win as a result), in the 3Rs to 6Rs of the jackpot gaming state, draw continuously 100 times with a rock band After the effect image to be displayed is displayed, the effect image such as “I'm determined!” Is displayed with the generation of the speech by the speech, and the effect image showing the small effect button is further displayed in the eighth to ninth eyes. Afterward, an effect image showing the winning as a result of rocking rock is displayed.

  In addition, as a table for one game combination lottery, one in accordance with whether or not the information indicating the big hit is included in the holding information stored in the work RAM 73 as the information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game. The lottery rate of the game combination pattern may be defined to be different. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol includes information indicating winning of a big hit, and the information corresponds to a big hit gaming state in which a V-capable round can be executed, a single match In the case where the lottery rate of combination pattern No. 45 is defined to be relatively high, and corresponds to a big hit gaming state in which a round in which V winning is difficult is executed, single game combination pattern No. 44 It may be defined to be relatively high. In addition, the lottery rate of the single game combination pattern may be defined to be different depending on whether or not the information indicating the big hit is included in the suspension information of the second special symbol.

<Janken pattern lottery table>
FIG. 19 and FIG. 20 are diagrams showing rock-paper-scissors pattern drawing tables (1) and (2). The rocking patterns (1) and (2) are one table, but for convenience, the rocking patterns (1) and (2) are shown divided into two figures. The rocking pattern selection tables (1) and (2) are tables to be referred to in rocking pattern drawing processing (S461 in FIG. 121) in the single CPU game effect determination processing of the sub CPU 71 described later. The Janken pattern lottery tables (1) and (2) are the no. One to ten combination patterns and one match combination pattern No. The reference items 1 to 45 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the rock pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference items are defined. In the rocking patterns (1) and (2) for the rock-paper-scissors pattern, one-piece game combination pattern No. 1 is selected. The lottery value information corresponding to 1 to 45 is referred to.

  According to such a rock pattern table (1) and (2), the rock pattern No. 1 showing the contents of the first to third rock patterns based on the single match combination pattern is displayed. 1 to 10 are determined by lottery. For example, rock pattern pattern No. If 10 (the first par, the second par, the third par) is decided, it will be a par for the first round of the jack, a par for the second, a par for the second, and a draw for the third round with the start of execution of the third round of the big hit gaming state. The effect image is displayed.

  Whether or not the table indicating the jackpot pattern lottery tables (1) and (2) includes information indicating a big hit in the hold information stored in the work RAM 73 as the information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game The lottery rate of the rock pattern may be defined differently according to. For example, when the information indicating the winning of the big hit is included in the hold information of the first special symbol, and the information corresponds to the big hit gaming state in which the V-capable round can be executed, the pattern pattern No. No. It is prescribed that the lottery rate of .10 be relatively high, and if it corresponds to the jackpot gaming state in which the difficult V winning round is executed, the pattern pattern No. 9 is relatively high. It may be defined. Further, the lottery rate of the rock-paper-scissors pattern may be defined to be different depending on whether or not the information indicating the winning of the big hit is included in the suspension information of the second special symbol.

<Table for the 3rd Challenge Lottery>
FIG. 21 is a view showing a three-time challenge lottery table. The 3-time challenge lottery table is a table to be referred to in the 3-time challenge lottery process (S470 in FIG. 122) in the 3-time challenge effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The table for the 3rd challenge lottery is no. Displayed along with the challenge content of 1 to 29 times, the challenge success or failure pattern “1: failure → failure”, “2: failure → success”, and “3: success” reference items, and the content of the three challenge patterns The display mode of the effect button to be displayed and the lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the challenge pattern three times by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. In the three-time challenge lottery table, when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "01H", the lottery value information corresponding to "1: failure → failure" is referred to, and when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "02H" The lottery value information corresponding to "2: failure → success" is referred to, and when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the lottery value information corresponding to "3: success" is referred to.

  According to such a table for 3 times for challenge lottery, based on the challenge success / failure pattern, for example, the battle contents with the cow is a motif basically corresponding to the fourth R, the sixth R and the eighth R of the big hit gaming state as a motif 3rd challenge pattern No. which shows the success or failure of the 3rd time. 1 to 29 are determined by lottery. For example, three challenge pattern no. If 29 (Failure-Failure-Failure) is determined, an effect that urges the operation of a relatively large effect button together with the effect contents that fail (loss) in each of the 4R, 6R, and 8R eyes in the big hit gaming state The image is displayed.

  In addition, as a table for three times for challenge lottery, after displaying success (win), by displaying success or failure, the hold information stored in work RAM 73 as information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game is a big hit An effect pattern may be defined that suggests that information indicating winning is included. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol includes information indicating winning of a big hit and the information corresponds to a big hit gaming state in which a V-capable round can be executed, success (win The effect image with the content is displayed, and if it corresponds to the jackpot gaming state in which the round in which the V prize is difficult is executed, the effect image with the content as failure (loss) is displayed. It is also good. Further, depending on whether or not the information indicating the big hit is included in the hold information of the second special symbol, the effect image corresponding to either “success” or “failure” may be displayed.

<Table for success notification round lottery>
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a success notification round lottery table. The success notification round lottery table is a table to be referred to in the success notification round lottery process (S480 in FIG. 123) in the surprise effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The success notification round lottery table has a challenge success / failure pattern no. 1 to 3 (No.1: Failure → Failure, No. 2: Failure → Success, and No. 3: Success), and a round for notifying success as a decision item (hereinafter referred to as “success notification round”) ( “None”, “3R to 8R”), and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a success notification round by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. In the success notification round lottery table, when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "01H", the lottery value information corresponding to "No. 1: Failure → failure" is referred to, and the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "02H" In the case, the lottery value information corresponding to "No. 2: failure → success" is referred to, and when the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the lottery value information corresponding to "No. 3: success" is referred to . When the success notification round is determined to any one of 3R to 8R by the success notification round lottery table, success notification round flags “03H” to “08H” are set as internal flags corresponding to the success notification round. However, if the success notification round is determined as "none", the success notification round flag "02H" is set as an internal flag corresponding thereto, and 3R to 8R become the non-success notification round. Each of the 3R to 8R up to the success notification round is also treated as a non-success notification round.

  According to such a success notification round lottery table, on the basis of the challenge success / failure pattern, the "succeeded" execution of the round capable of winning a V prize and the notification of that effect are determined by lottery as a success notification round. . For example, if the challenge success / failure pattern is "No. 3: Success", any round of 3R to 8R in the jackpot gaming state is determined as the success notification round, and in the determined success notification round, V An effect image is displayed to give notice of the execution of the possible rounds for winning. However, if the challenge success or failure pattern is "No. 1: Failure → Failure" or "No. 2: Failure → Success", the success notification round is uniformly "none" and the non-success notification round is determined. In such a case, the execution of the round capable of winning a V can not be predicted in any round of the third to eighth rounds of the big hit gaming state. In addition, in the third to eighth rounds, the rounds up to the success notification round are not also foretolded to be executed as rounds in which the V prize can be won as the non-success notification round.

  The success notification round lottery table may be defined so that the success notification round may be determined as "none" even if the challenge success / failure pattern is "success". In addition, the lottery rate (lottery value information) when the challenge success / failure pattern is “successful” is not limited to that shown in FIG. 22 and, for example, highly defines the lottery rate corresponding to the first half of the third to eighth rounds. Alternatively, the lottery rates for all the third to eighth rounds may be defined to be the same.

<Surprise pattern lottery table>
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a surprise pattern lottery table (non-successful notification round) and a surprise pattern lottery table (successful notification round). The surprise pattern lottery table (non-successful notification round) and the surprise pattern lottery table (successful notification round) are tables referred to in the surprise pattern lottery process (S483 in FIG. 123) in the surprise effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. is there. The surprise pattern lottery table (non-successful notification round) is referred to, for example, in order to first determine the surprise pattern for each of the third to eighth non-successful notification rounds. The surprise pattern drawing table (success notification round) is referred to in advance to determine the surprise pattern corresponding to the success notification round. The surprise pattern lottery table (non-successful notification round) is a surprise pattern No. It defines 1 to 15, non-successful notification rounds (3R to 8R) as reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a surprise pattern by random number lottery according to the reference items. . The surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round) is a surprise pattern No. 1 to 15, success notification rounds (3R to 8R) as reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a surprise pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference items are defined. In the surprise pattern lottery table (non-success notification round) and the surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round), corresponding lottery value information is referred to according to 3R to 8R of the non-success notification round and the success notification round.

  According to the surprise pattern lottery table (non-successful notification round), for each of 3R to 8R which is the non-successful notification round, the corresponding No. 1 of the surprise pattern is received. 1 to 6 are determined by lottery. For example, the surprise pattern corresponding to the third R of the non-successful notification round is No. If it is 2, a relatively small effect button operation is prompted in the 3R's of the big hit gaming state, and as a result of the operation, an effect image is displayed that impresses a "failed" of the round execution possible for V prize winning. On the other hand, according to the surprise pattern lottery table (success notification round), based on any of 3R to 8R, which is a success notification round, the surprise pattern No. 1 is selected. 7 to 15 are determined by lottery. For example, the success notification round is 3R eyes and the surprise pattern is no. In the case of 12, while promoting the operation of a relatively small effect button in the 3R's of the big hit gaming state, an effect image which impresses the "success" of the round execution that can be awarded V can be displayed as the operation result. For example, when the success notification round is 7R, the surprise pattern corresponding to the third to sixth eyes of the non-success notification round is determined, and the surprise pattern corresponding to the 7R eye of the success notification round is determined. The corresponding surprise pattern is not determined for the 8th R, which is the round after the success notification round.

  In addition, after displaying the effect image which impresses "success" as a surprise pattern lottery table, the start memory of the special symbol game is displayed by displaying the effect image which impresses "success" or "failure". It is also possible to define content that suggests that the information indicating the winning of the big hit is included in the suspension information stored in the work RAM 73 as the information corresponding to. For example, if the hold information of the first special symbol includes information indicating winning of a big hit, and the information corresponds to a big hit gaming state in which a V-capable round can be executed, "Success" You may display an effect image that impresses a “V”, and if it corresponds to a big hit gaming state in which a round that is difficult to win a V-winning is executed, an effect image that impresses “failure” may be displayed. . In addition, depending on whether or not the information indicating the big hit is included in the hold information of the second special symbol, after displaying the effect image that impresses "success", "success" or "failure" An effect image that gives an impression may be displayed.

<Table for icon pattern lottery>
FIG. 24 shows an icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R). The icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) are tables referred to in the icon pattern lottery process (S491 in FIG. 124) in the icon determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) are referred to determine final display colors of icons corresponding to the 4R to 8R rounds. Here, the “final display color” means the display color that the icon indicating each round of 4R to 8R presents at the time of the round, and does not change the display color after the change at the time of the round The display color when maintained is applicable. The icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) have icon pattern No. 1 to 4 (white icon, blue icon, green icon, red icon) and the surprise pattern No. 1 to 15 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining an icon pattern by random number lottery in accordance with a reference item are defined. The icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) corresponding to the rounds of 4R to 8R are prepared. In the icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R), lottery value information corresponding to the surprise pattern is referred to for each round of 4R to 8R.

  According to the icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R), the surprise pattern No. 4 is displayed. An icon pattern No. indicating the final display color of the icon displayed corresponding to each round of 4R to 8R based on 1 to 15 is displayed. 1 to 4 are determined by lottery. For example, the icon pattern lottery table (8R) is referred to in order to previously determine the final display color at the time of execution of the eighth round for the icon corresponding to the eighth eye. In this icon pattern lottery table (8R), the surprise pattern is no. When it is 15, the No. 1 icon pattern is selected with the probability that the lottery rate will be 1600/32768. 4 is determined. As a result, when the eighth round is executed, the display color of the icon indicating the eighth round is red. Similarly, with reference to the icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) also for the 4R to 7R eyes, in each round of the 4R to 7R eyes displayed at each round execution of the 4R to 7R eyes The display color of the corresponding icon is determined.

  In the icon pattern lottery tables (4R to 8R) according to the present embodiment, the same lottery rate is applied to all the tables corresponding to 4R to 8R, but different lottery rates are defined for each round of 4R to 8R. You may do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the icon pattern lottery table corresponding to 3R is not provided, but by providing the icon pattern lottery table corresponding to 3R, the display color of the icon corresponding to the third R is changed. May be Furthermore, as a display color of the icon, it is possible to display a special color other than the color mentioned above, for example, gold, and for a round where such a special gold icon is displayed, be sure to be a success notification round. It is also good.

<Table for icon change lottery>
25 to 29 show the icon change lottery table. The icon change lottery table is a table to be referred to in the icon change lottery process (S494 in FIG. 124) in the icon determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The icon change lottery table (4R white icon) of FIG. 25 is the fourth R eye for each of the 4R to 8R icons whose final display colors have been determined using the icon pattern lottery table (4R to 8R) described above. Reference is made to determine what color to change from white to white at the time of round execution. Similarly, the table for icon change lottery in FIG. 26 (5R white icon, 5R blue icon, 5R green icon, 5R red icon), the table for icon change lottery in FIG. 27 (6R white icon, 6R blue icon, 6R green icon, Table for icon change lottery in 6R red icon), FIG. 28 (7R white icon, 7R blue icon, 7R green icon, 7R red icon), table for icon change lottery in FIG. 29 (8R white icon, 8R blue icon, 8R green The icon (8R red icon) is referenced to determine what color is to be changed at each round of the 5Rth to 8Rth rounds for each of the 4R to 8R icons for which the final display color has been determined. . These icon change lottery tables have a changed icon pattern No. Final display colors of icons 1 to 4 (white icon, blue icon, green icon, red icon) and icons corresponding to each round of 4R to 8R as reference items, and after change according to the reference items It defines lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining an icon pattern by random number lottery. In the icon change lottery table, lottery value information corresponding to the display color at the time of execution of each of the fourth to eighth rounds is referred to for the icon for which the final display color is determined.

  For example, in the case where it is determined that the display color of the icon indicating the 8Rth finally turns red when the 8Rth round is executed, as an example, in this case, the icon indicating the 8Rth as follows: The change mode of the 4th to 8th eyes is determined for the display color of. In this case, in the table for icon change lottery in FIG. 25 (4R white icon), the item “8R: red” is referred to, and the icon pattern No. is selected with the probability that the lottery rate will be 8192/32768, respectively. 1 to 4 are determined. As a result, it is determined that the display color of the 8R-th icon, which eventually becomes red, is changed to white, blue, green, or red with a probability of 1/4 when the fourth R-th round is executed. . At this time, as an example, icon pattern No. It is assumed that 1 is determined, and it is determined that the display color does not change but becomes white when the fourth round of the fourth round is performed.

  Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of the execution of the fifth round following the fourth R is white, the icon change lottery table (5R white icon) in FIG. 26 is referred to. In the table for icon change lottery (5R white icon), the item “8R: red” is referred to, and the icon pattern No. is selected with the probability that the lottery rate will be 8192/32768, respectively. 1 to 4 are determined. As a result, it is determined that the display color of the 8R-th icon, which finally becomes red, is changed from white to white, white, blue, green, or red with a probability of 1⁄4 when the 5th-round is executed. Be done. At this time, as an example, icon pattern No. It is assumed that 2 is determined, and it is determined that the display color changes from white to blue when the 5th round is executed.

  Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of the round execution of the 6Rth becomes blue, the icon change lottery table (6R blue icon) in FIG. 27 is referred to. In the table for icon change lottery (6R blue icon), the item of “8R: red” is referred to, and the icon pattern No. is selected with the probability that the lottery rate will be 10922/32768. Icon pattern No. 1 at a probability that the lottery rate will be 0. 2, the icon pattern No. at a probability that the lottery rate will be 10922/32768. 3, the icon pattern No. at a probability that the lottery rate will be 10924/32768. 4 is determined. As a result, it is determined that the display color is changed from blue to white, green, or red at a predetermined probability when the sixth round is executed for the eighth round eye icon that finally becomes red. At this time, as an example, for example, icon pattern No. It is assumed that 3 is determined, and it is determined that the display color changes from blue to green when the sixth round is executed.

  Next, in this case, the display color at the start of execution of the seventh round is green, so the table for icon change lottery in FIG. 28 (7R green icon) is referred to. In the table for icon change lottery (7R green icon), the item “8R: red” is referred to, and the icon pattern No. is selected with the probability that the lottery rate will be 16384/32768 respectively. 1 or No. 4 is determined. As a result, it is determined that the display color is changed from green to white or red with a predetermined probability at the time of the seventh round execution for the eighth R eye icon that finally becomes red. At this time, as an example, for example, icon pattern No. It is assumed that 4 is determined, and it is determined that the display color changes from green to red when the seventh round is executed.

  Next, in this case, since the display color at the start of the round execution of the 8Rth becomes red, the table for icon change lottery (8R red icon) in FIG. 28 is referred to. In the table for icon change lottery (8R red icon), the item “8R: red” is referred to, and the icon pattern No. is selected with the probability that the lottery rate will be 32768/32768. One is determined. As a result, it is determined that the display color of the 8R-th icon, which is finally red, is maintained in red without changing when the eighth round is executed.

<Supply success character lottery table>
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a surprise success character string lottery table. The surprise success character strip lottery table is a table to be referred to in the surprise success character strip lottery process (S502 in FIG. 125) in the character strip effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The surprise success character string drawing table has character band pattern numbers to be determined. 1 to 31 and surprise pattern No. 7 to 15 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character band pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. In the surprise success character string drawing table, lottery value information corresponding to the surprise pattern is referred to in order to determine the character band pattern to be displayed in the success notification round.

  According to the table of surprise success character lottery, the surprise pattern No. A character band pattern No. indicating a character message displayed in the success notification round based on 7 to 15 1 to 31 are determined by lottery. For example, the surprise pattern is no. In the case of 15, the character band pattern No. at a predetermined lottery rate. One of 12, 13, 16 to 21 and 23 to 28 is determined. As a result, in the success notification round, a text message is displayed that is a sign of a round capable of winning a V prize.

  In the surprise success character strip lottery table of the present embodiment, it is assumed that the character band pattern No. 1 is displayed in the success notification round. Although 1 to 10 are not determined, these character band pattern numbers. It may be possible to determine 1 to 10.

<Supply Failure Character Table for Lottery>
FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a surprise failure character string lottery table (surprise pattern No. 2) and (surprise pattern No. 3). FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a surprise failure character string lottery table (surprise pattern No. 4) and (surprise pattern No. 5). FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a surprise failure character string lottery table (surprise pattern No. 6). These surprise failure character band lottery tables are tables referred to in the surprise failure character band lottery process (S504 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The surprise failure character string lottery table has character band pattern numbers to be determined. Specify 1-31 and non-success notification rounds (3R-8R) as reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining character band pattern by random number lottery according to the reference items There is. In the surprise failure character strip lottery table, lottery value information corresponding to 3R to 8R is provided for each of the surprise pattern Nos. 1 to 6 in order to determine the character pattern to be displayed in the non-successful notification round (3R to 8R). Referenced.

  According to the surprise failure character string drawing table (surprise pattern No. 2), the surprise pattern is no. In the case of No. 2, based on 3R to 8R of the non-success notification round, a character band pattern No. indicating a character message displayed in the non-success notification round. 12 to 21 are determined by lottery. For example, the surprise pattern is no. For the 3rd R non-succeeding notification round, which is 2, the character band pattern No. is generated with the probability that the lottery rate will be 10000/32768. Twelve "??" are decided. Similarly, surprise pattern no. Also in the case of 3 to 6, a character band pattern No. indicating a character message displayed in 3R to 8R which is a non-success notification round 12 to 21 are determined by lottery. As a result, in the non-successful notification round, a character message that causes the V-prize-capable round to be expected to be displayed is displayed.

  In the table of surprise failure character string lottery according to the present embodiment, the surprise pattern No. 1 is displayed. A character band pattern No. corresponding to a non-success notification round in which the table is divided every 2 to 6 and the character message is displayed for each table (surprise pattern). Although it is prescribed that 12 to 21 can be determined, the surprise failure character string drawing table is one table, and the character pattern can be determined based on the surprise pattern and the non-success notification round from this one table. You may do so.

<Suspense Gase Letter Drawing Table>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a surprise-Gase letter band lottery table (white icon) and (blue icon). FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a surprise-Gase letter band lottery table (green icon) and (red icon). These surprise gasse character band lottery tables are tables to be referred to in the surprise gasse character band lottery process (S505 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The surprise Gase letter band lottery table has a letter band pattern No. to be determined. Specify 1-31 and non-success notification rounds (3R-8R) as reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining character band pattern by random number lottery according to the reference items There is. In the surprise Gase letter band drawing table, the surprise pattern no. 3R for each display color (white icon, blue icon, green icon, red icon) of the icon to determine the character band pattern to be displayed in the non-successful notification round (3R to 8R) determined as "none" of 1. The lottery value information corresponding to 8R is referred to.

  According to the surprise Gase letter band drawing table (white icon), the surprise pattern No. In the case where the display color after the change of the icon displayed in the 1 non-success notification round (the display color which is maintained if not changing) is white, the non-success notification round 3R to 8R, the non-success Character band pattern No. indicating the character message displayed in the notification round. 1 to 14 are determined by lottery. For example, for the 3Rth non-successful notification round in which the corresponding icon is a white icon, the character band pattern No. is generated with the probability that the lottery rate will be 1200/32768. Twelve "??" are decided. Similarly, for non-successful notification rounds (3R to 8R) in which corresponding icons are blue icons, green icons, and red icons, a character band pattern No. indicating a character message to be displayed. 1 to 14 are determined by lottery. As a result, in the non-successful notification round in which the execution of the V-prize-capable round is not notified in advance, a character message that may be garbled may be displayed.

  In addition, in the table for surprise gasse character band lottery according to the present embodiment, the table can be divided for each icon color after change, and the character band pattern of the character message to be a character set can be determined for each table (icon color after change). The Surprise Gasse character band lottery table is defined as one table, and the character band pattern can be determined based on the icon color after change corresponding to the non-success notification round from this one table. It is also good. Also, the character band pattern may be determined based on the icon color before the change.

<Supply gasse subsequent character string lottery table>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a surprise gasse subsequent character string lottery table. This surprise gasse subsequent character band lottery table is a table to be referred to in the subsequent character band lottery process (S508 in FIG. 125) in the character band effect determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The surprise gasse subsequent character string lottery process table has character band pattern numbers to be determined. Specify 1-31 and non-success notification rounds (3R-8R) as reference items, and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining character band pattern by random number lottery according to the reference items There is. In the surprise gasse subsequent character string lottery table, when a predetermined character band pattern (No. 1 to 10) to be displayed in the non-successful notification round is determined, a subsequent character to be displayed subsequently In order to determine band patterns up to a predetermined number, lottery value information corresponding to each of 3R to 8R is referred to.

  According to the surprise gasse subsequent character band lottery table, the gasse in the non-successful notification round is performed based on 3R to 8R of the non-successful notification round in which the predetermined character band pattern (Nos. 1 to 10) that becomes the gasse is determined. A character band pattern No. indicating a subsequent character message to be displayed following. The predetermined number of 1 to 10 is determined by lottery. For example, for the non-successful notification round of the third R, the character band pattern No. 3 is generated with the probability that the lottery rate will be 3276/32768. “Don't miss the surprise chance!” Is decided. As a result, in the non-success notification round in which the execution of the V-winning possible round is not notified, a subsequent character message may be displayed following a character message that becomes a gusset.

  In addition, the surprise gasse subsequent character string lottery table of the present embodiment has, for example, character band pattern numbers representing no. 6 subsequent character messages. Although it can be repeatedly referred to determine 1 to 10, it can be similarly used in determining 5 or less or 7 or more subsequent character band patterns.

<Table for bonus bonus holding consecutive lottery>
FIG. 37 is a view showing a table for bonus bonus holding continuous drawing. This addition bonus holding combination drawing table is a table to be referred to in the addition bonus holding combination drawing process (S533 in FIG. 127) in the addition bonus holding combination determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. In the table for bonus bonus holding series drawing, when the predetermined big hit symbol or small hit symbol is included in the hold information related to the second special symbol, a different BGM is played during the big hit gaming state. Etc. is a table used to determine whether or not to execute a special effect such as, etc. The table for bonus bonus holding series drawing is the decision item with the hit symbols ("probable variation 1" to "probable variation 10" for big hit symbols, "small hits" for small hit symbols) pertaining to the second special symbol that is the reference item Information of winning / non-winning (No. 1: non-winning, No. 2: winning) and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining winning / non-winning by random number lottery according to the reference item It specifies. In the bonus bonus holding series drawing table, the holding information pertaining to the second special symbol stored in the work RAM 73 as information corresponding to the start memory of the special symbol game includes information indicating the winning of a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol When it is determined, the lottery value information is referred to in accordance with the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol.

  According to the bonus bonus holding series drawing table, the bonus bonus holding series is based on "certain variation 1" to "fixed variation 10" of the big hit symbol included in the hold information together with information indicating a hit or the "small hit" of the small hit symbol. As a result of the lottery process, non-winning (No. 1) or winning (No. 2) is determined by lottery. For example, when the jackpot symbol of “certain variation 1” is included in the hold information pertaining to the second special symbol, in the bonus bonus hold-up consecutive lottery process, the non-winning (No. 1) The winning selection (No. 2) is determined with the probability that the lottery rate will be 26214/32768. As a result, when the winning (No. 2) is determined, a special effect different from the effect relating to the normal bonus during the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol "probable change 1" of the second special symbol. Is executed.

  In the table of the bonus bonus holding couple lottery of the present embodiment, the winning (No. 2) is more easily determined as the jackpot gaming state relating to the second special symbol advantageous to the player is achieved, You may be made to win even in a hit gaming state. If there is no on-hold information related to the second special symbol, a lottery may be performed based on the on-hold information related to the first special symbol. Moreover, you may make it draw based on all the pending | holding information, without distinguishing the pending | holding information of a 2nd special symbol and a 1st special symbol. In addition, BGM may be made to differ according to the kind of hit symbol, and when a plurality of hit symbols are included in the holding information, BGM different from other BGM may flow. In addition, as a special effect, the display mode of an image or the light emission mode of a light emitting member such as a decoration lamp may be made different, as well as the BGM.

<Scenario group lottery table>
FIG. 38 shows a scenario group lottery table. The scenario group drawing table is a table to be referred to in the scenario group drawing process (S540 in FIG. 128) in the additional bonus scenario type determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The scenario group drawing table is a table used to determine scenario groups A to D obtained by dividing the scenario of the effect in the additional bonus effect mode into major classifications. The scenario group drawing table includes lottery values information (random number range for determining a scenario group by random number drawing according to reference items, hit patterns 4 to 11 as reference items, scenario groups A to D as determination items, and reference items. : 32768). In the scenario group drawing table, the drawing value information is referred to in accordance with the hitting patterns 4 to 11 corresponding to the additional bonus.

  In the scenario group drawing table, scenario groups A to D are determined by drawing based on the hit patterns 4 to 11. According to this scenario group drawing table, for example, in the case of hitting pattern 4, scenario group A (without combo) is determined with the probability that the drawing rate will be 7816/32768, and the scenario with the probability that the drawing rate will be 18400/32768. Group B (with combo) is determined, scenario group C (SP character based on [A]) is determined with a probability that the lottery rate will be 1952/32768, and scenario group D (with a probability that the lottery rate will be 4600/32768) [B] Base SP character is determined. Thereby, in the additional bonus, the rendering is executed in a mode according to the determined large classification scenario groups A to D.

  In the scenario group drawing table of the present embodiment, all of the scenario groups A to D can be determined only for the hit pattern 4, but all of the scenario groups A to D can be determined for the hit patterns 5 to 11 as well. Alternatively, a part may be determined.

<Scenario type lottery table>
39 and 40 show scenario type lottery tables (hit patterns 4 to 11). These scenario type lottery tables are tables referred to in the scenario type lottery process (S 541 in FIG. 128) in the additional bonus scenario type determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The scenario type lottery table is a scenario type No. where the scenario of the effect in the additional bonus effect mode is divided into middle classes. It is a table used to determine 1-9. The scenario type lottery table is prepared for each of the hit patterns 4 to 11, and scenario groups A to D as reference items and a scenario type No. 1 to 9 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the scenario type by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. In the scenario type lottery table, lottery value information is referred to for each of the hit patterns 4 to 11 in accordance with the scenario groups A to D.

  In the scenario type lottery table (hit patterns 4 to 11), scenario type No. 3 is selected based on scenario groups A to D for each hit pattern 4 to 11. 1 to 9 are determined by lottery. For example, in the case of hit pattern 4, a scenario type lottery table (hit pattern 4) is referred to. According to the scenario type lottery table (hit pattern 4), in the case of scenario group A (without combo), the scenario type No. 2 has a probability that the lottery rate will be 22938/32768. No. 1 (Aa: no combo / no revival) is determined, and the scenario type No. 1 has a probability that the lottery rate will be 9830/32768. 2 (Ab: no combo / failure ⇒ revival) is determined. In the case of scenario group B (with combo), the scenario type No. 2 has a probability that the lottery rate will be 22938/32768. No. 4 (Ba: with combo / without revival) is determined, and the scenario type No. 4 has a probability that the lottery rate will be 9830/32768. 5 (Bb: combo presence / failure 復活 resurrection) is determined. In the case of scenario group C ([A] -based SP character), scenario type No. 2 has a probability that the lottery rate will be 22938/32768. Scenario type No. 7 (Ca: [Aa] -based SP character) is determined, and the lottery rate is 9830/32768. 8 (Cb: [Ab] -based SP character) is determined. In the case of scenario group D ([B] -based SP character), scenario type No. 2 has a probability that the lottery rate will be 32768/32768. 9 (Da: [Ba] -based SP character) is determined. Similarly, for the other hit patterns 5 to 11, the corresponding scenario type lottery table is selected, and the scenario type No. One of 1 to 9 is determined. Thus, in the bonus bonus, scenario classification No. An effect is performed in the aspect according to either of 1-9.

  In the scenario type lottery table of the present embodiment, in the case of the hit pattern 4, the scenario type No. 3 (Ac: no combo / end 復活 revival) and No. 6 (Bc: combo present / end 復活 resurrection) is not determined. For example, in the case of hit patterns 5 to 11, scenario type No. All or part of 1 to 9 may be determined.

<Scenario number lottery table>
41 to 49 are diagrams showing scenario number lottery tables (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). The scenario number lottery table is a table to be referred to in the scenario number lottery process (S 542 in FIG. 128) in the additional bonus scenario type determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The scenario number drawing table has a scenario type No. of scenario for the effect in the additional bonus effect mode. It is a table used to determine a scenario number subdivided for each of 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). The scenario number lottery table has scenario type No. 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), which are reference items, and hit patterns 4 to 11 serving as reference items, and determination items determined for each scenario type And the lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the scenario number by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item. In the scenario number lottery table, scenario type No. The lottery value information is referred to according to the hit patterns 4 to 11 for each of 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da).

  In the scenario number drawing table (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), the scenario type No. A scenario number is randomly determined based on the hit patterns 4 to 11 for each of 1 to 9 (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). For example, scenario type No. In the case of 1 (Aa), the scenario number lottery table (Aa) is referred to. According to the scenario number drawing table (Aa), in the case of the hitting pattern 4, the scenario number No. 1 is generated with the probability that the drawing rate will be 32768/32768. 65 is determined. In the case of hit patterns 5 and 6, scenario type No. Since 1 (Aa) can not be determined, the scenario number can not be determined either. In the case of hit pattern 4, the scenario number No. is obtained with the probability that the lottery rate will be 32768/32768. 65 is determined. In the case of hit pattern 7, the scenario number No. is obtained with the probability that the lottery rate will be 32768/32768. 64 are determined. In the case of hit pattern 8, scenario number No. is made with a predetermined probability. In the case of hit pattern 9, one of scenario numbers 51 to 63 is determined, and scenario number no. In the case of hit pattern 10, one of scenario numbers 24 to 50 is determined, and scenario number No. Scenario number No. 6 is determined with a predetermined probability in the case of hit pattern 11 in which one of 6 to 23 is determined. One of 1 to 5 is determined. Other scenario type No. Similarly, a scenario number drawing table corresponding to 2 to 9 (Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da) is selected, and a scenario number is determined according to the scenario type. Thereby, in the additional bonus, the effect is executed based on the scenario number corresponding to the scenario type for each hit pattern.

<Additional bonus scenario table>
50 to 76 show the bonus bonus scenario tables (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da). The bonus bonus scenario table includes a push operation button operation determination process (FIG. 113) of the sub CPU 71 described later, a combo RUSH lottery process (S544 in FIG. 128) in the bonus bonus scenario type determination process, and a bonus bonus roulette lottery process in the bonus bonus initial process. (S550 in FIG. 129) This table is referred to in the effect lottery determination process (FIG. 131) and the additional bonus round effect process (FIG. 142). The additional bonus scenario table is a table used to determine the specific effect contents of the additional bonus. The bonus bonus scenario table is prepared for each scenario type (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), and the scenario number and the actual round are executed according to the scenario type to be the reference item. The number of rounds to be played and the effect category A to N indicating the contents of the decision, the number of extras such as "character", "combo" and "RUSH", the number of remaining balls (remaining balls), the total balls The total number of balls (total number of balls) and the total number (total number) are specified. In the bonus bonus scenario table, for each scenario type (Aa, Ab, Ac, Ba, Bb, Bc, Ca, Cb, Da), based on the scenario number and the number of actual rounds, effect types A to N, the number of additional games, The number of remaining prize balls, the total number of prize balls, and the total number are determined.

  The effect types A to N are obtained by classifying effect contents such as effect images. In the present embodiment, the effect type A corresponds to the effect content "wait for character return", the effect type B corresponds to the effect content "determination of initial value", and the effect type C is "character appearance failure" The effect type D corresponds to the effect content "character appearance success-no combo", the effect type E corresponds to the effect content "character appearance success-combo available", and the effect type F is , "Character appearance success-combo existence-RUSH rush" corresponds to the effect content, effect type G corresponds to effect content "combo RUSH", effect type H corresponds to effect content "SP character appearance" The effect type I corresponds to the effect content "character revival", the effect type J corresponds to the effect content "flour flower revival-no combo", and the effect type K is " It corresponds to the effect content "resurrection-combo existence", the effect type L corresponds to the effect content "凛 −-combo existence-RUSH rush", and the effect type M corresponds to the effect content "end screen-reverse" The effect type N corresponds to the effect content "no effect" (see FIG. 181).

  Further, the additional number of "character" is the number for effect display added when the main character appears, and the additional number of "combo" is added when the character appears continuously for two or more rounds It is a number for display, and the number of additions of "RUSH" is a number for effect display added by performing a predetermined button operation when the effect button is displayed. The total number is a number for operation reference calculated by accumulating the upper limit number of balls per round (100 in the present embodiment) for all the actual round numbers. The upper limit prize ball number corresponds to the number for effect display that is additionally displayed as the upper limit per round on the display screen, and the number of prize balls according to the actual upper limit prize number per round is It does not mean. However, as the numerical value, the number of winning balls according to the actual upper limit winning number per round (10 in the present embodiment) is equal to the upper limit winning number. The total award ball number is a number for effect display calculated by accumulating the number of additions for each actual round. The remaining prize ball number takes as a parameter the upper limit payout ball number obtained by accumulating the upper limit prize ball number per round for each actual round up to the actual round at the start of the actual round execution, and this upper limit It corresponds to the number for operation reference calculated by subtracting the number of paid out balls from the total number of balls. The number of remaining prize balls is counted by a remaining prize ball counter described later.

  By referring to such an additional bonus scenario table, in the additional bonus, effect images corresponding to the effect types A to N are displayed for each actual round based on the scenario number according to the scenario type, and further, the schedule The total number of prize balls for effect display and the total number of payouts (the number of payout balls) are displayed until the total number (scheduled given number) is reached. In the present embodiment, even when the actual total number of payouts does not reach the upper limit payout number of balls or the actual number of prizes exceeds the upper limit number of prizes (the actual number of balls is the upper limit number of prize balls) Even if the number is exceeded, the payout prize ball number corresponding to the upper limit payout prize ball number is displayed as the total payout number for effect display. The difference between the total number of prize balls for effect display and the total number of payouts (the number of payout balls) corresponds to the number of remaining balls.

<Table for combo RUSH lottery>
FIG. 77 shows a combo RUSH lottery table. The combo RUSH lottery table is a table to be referred to in the combo RUSH lottery process (S 544 in FIG. 128) in the additional bonus scenario type determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. In the combo RUSH lottery table, when the number of additions corresponding to “combo RUSH” of the effect type G is determined, an operation that defines the timing of partially adding or displaying the number of additions according to button operation. Number pattern No. It is a table used to determine 1 to 44. The combo RUSH lottery table includes the number of additions corresponding to the reference item “combo RUSH” and the operation number pattern No. for the determination item. 1 to 44 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the operation number pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. In the combo RUSH lottery table, lottery value information is referred to in accordance with the number of additions corresponding to “combo RUSH”.

  In the combo RUSH lottery table, the operation number pattern No. is based on the number of additions corresponding to “combo RUSH” determined using the addition bonus scenario table. 1 to 44 are determined by lottery. For example, when the number of additions corresponding to “combo RUSH” is “+200”, the lottery rate has a predetermined probability and the operation frequency pattern No. One of 10 to 14 is determined. Operation number pattern No. 10-14, the number of additions to be finally added and displayed is “+200”, and addition display is performed when the number of additions is 4 and “+50” is reached for each predetermined operation. It is specified. More specifically, for example, the operation number pattern No. In 14 (5 → 3 → 5 → 5), when the number of times of the button operation (pressing operation on the pressing operation button 9A) first reaches five, the additional number is added and displayed as “+50”, and then the button operation When the number of times of operation reaches 3 times, the number of additions is added and displayed as "+100", and then when the number of operations of button operations reaches 5 times, the number of additions is added and displayed as "+150" and finally the button When the number of operation operations reaches five, the number of additions is finally added and displayed as "+200".

  In the present embodiment, the number of additions is increased by “+50”. For example, if the number of additions to be finally displayed is “+400”, the number of additions is eight, and “+300”. Although the number of additions is uniquely determined according to the number of additions so that the number of additions is six, the number of additions and the number of additions may be determined in multiple ways according to the number of additions. Good. For example, if the number of additions is "+400", the number of additions is 4 and "+100" is added and displayed, or if the number of additions is "+300", the number of additions is 30 and "+10" added and displayed. May be Further, the number to be added may be changed for each addition display. For example, when the number of additions is "+400", "+100", "+50", and "+250" may be sequentially added.

<Table for roulette lottery>
FIG. 78 shows a roulette lottery table. The roulette lottery table is a table to be referred to in an additional bonus roulette lottery process (S550 in FIG. 129) in an additional bonus initial process of a sub CPU 71 described later. The roulette lottery table has a display image imitating a roulette and an initial value pattern No. indicating the number of additions as an initial value when the number of additions corresponding to the “initial value determination” of the effect type B is determined. It is a table used to determine 1 to 6. The roulette lottery table has an initial value of the number of additions as a reference item and an initial value pattern No. And 1 to 6 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining an initial value pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item. In the roulette lottery table, lottery value information is referred to in accordance with the initial value of the additional number.

  In the roulette lottery table, the initial value pattern No. is selected based on the number of initial additions (initial value) corresponding to the “initial value determination” of effect type B determined using the additional bonus scenario table. 1 to 6 (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) are determined by lottery. The initial value (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) corresponds to the additional number to be displayed by being added to the first R of the substantial round. In the roulette lottery table of the present embodiment, lottery value information is defined such that one corresponding initial value pattern is uniquely determined according to the initial value of the additional number.

<Table for roulette pattern lottery>
FIG. 79 shows a roulette pattern drawing table. The roulette pattern lottery table is a table to be referred to in an additional bonus roulette pattern lottery process (S 551 in FIG. 129) in an additional bonus initial process of a sub CPU 71 described later. The roulette pattern drawing table has a roulette pattern No. indicating a mode of a roulette or a stop button to be displayed according to the initial value pattern when the initial value pattern is determined using the roulette drawing table. It is a table used to determine 1 to 5. The roulette pattern drawing table has initial value patterns (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) as reference items and roulette pattern No. 1 as determination items. The values 1 to 5 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the roulette pattern by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. In the roulette pattern lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the initial value pattern.

  In the roulette pattern lottery table, roulette pattern No. 1 is selected based on the initial value patterns (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 1500) determined using the roulette lottery table. One of 1 to 5 is determined by lottery. In the roulette pattern lottery table, for example, when the initial value pattern is 200, the roulette pattern No. 1 has a probability that the lottery rate will be 27768/32768. No. 1 is determined, and the roulette pattern No. 1 is determined with the probability that the lottery rate will be 5000/32768. 2 is determined. Roulette pattern No. In 2, the roulette in which 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, and 1500 are arranged is displayed, and the effect button is displayed with the display size as the middle button. For example, in the case where the initial value pattern is 1500, a roulette in which the points of 700 to 1400 which can not be determined as the initial value may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to notify the player from the display mode of the roulette different from the normal one that the initial value is determined as 1500.

<Table for the title determination lottery>
FIG. 80 shows a title determination lottery table. The title determination lottery table is a table to be referred to in the additional bonus title determination processing (S 552 in FIG. 129) in the additional bonus initial processing of the sub CPU 71 described later. The title determination lottery table has a title pattern No. indicating a change in display color of a title displayed upon the bonus bonus. It is a table used to determine 1-14 based on the hit patterns 4-11. The title determination lottery table includes hit patterns 4 to 11 serving as reference items, and title pattern nos. 1 to 14 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the title pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item. In the title determination lottery table, lottery value information is referred to in accordance with the hit patterns 4 to 11.

  In the table for title determination lottery, title pattern No. is made based on the hit patterns 4-11. One of 1 to 14 is determined by lottery. When the roulette display image is displayed, the pressing operation button 9A is operated to stop the fluctuation display of the roulette. In the title determination lottery table, the title pattern No. 1 is used to change the display color of the title before and after the pressing operation button 9A for stopping the fluctuation display of the roulette. 1 to 14 are determined. For example, title pattern No. In 2 (blue to yellow), the display color of the title is blue before the pressing operation button 9A is operated, and the display color of the title is yellow after the pressing operation button 9A is operated. Note that the display color of the title may not be changed at all before or after the button operation, or it may be set to change two or more times, and sequentially changed to the set color each time the button operation is performed. May be

<Table for chance increase lottery>
FIG. 81 shows a chance-up lottery table. The chance-up lottery table is a table to be referred to in the chance-up lottery process (S562 in FIG. 130) in the sub CPU 71 added bonus effect determination process described later. The chance-up drawing number table indicates the display size of the effect button displayed before the aura color and the number-of-additions displayed on the background of the character as the effect of the addition bonus. 1 to 6 are character effect pattern No. of the character type lottery table described later. It is a table used to determine based on 1 to 30. The chance-up lottery table has a character presentation pattern No. as a reference item. 1 to 30 and chance increase pattern No. The reference numeral 1 to 6 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the chance-up pattern by random number lottery according to the reference item are defined. In the chance-up lottery table, character effect pattern No. The lottery value information is referred to according to 1 to 30.

  In the chance-up lottery table, the character effect pattern No. The chance increase pattern No. 1 based on 1 to 30. One of 1 to 6 is determined by lottery. For example, chance up pattern No. In 2 (blue effect large button), a character in which blue is arranged as the aura color is displayed, and the effect button is displayed with the display size as the large button before displaying the number of superimposed images. In the present embodiment, the chance increase pattern No. The number of additions is different according to 1 to 6. Also, the probability that the aura color is determined in the order of blue <green <red becomes higher as the number of additions relatively increases. When the large button is determined, the number of additions is always added.

<Character type lottery table>
82 to 86 are diagrams showing character type lottery tables. The character type lottery table is a table to be referred to in the effect lottery determination process (FIG. 131) of the sub CPU 71 described later. The character type lottery table has a character effect pattern No. indicating the appearance mode of the character or the object and the additional number (hereinafter referred to as “addition value”) accompanying the appearance. It is a table used to determine 1 to 30 based on the effect type and the addition value. In particular, FIG. 82 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to effect type C or H. FIG. 83 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to the case of the effect type D or J and the total number of prize balls reaching the upper limit value (total number 1500). FIG. 84 shows a table for character type lottery corresponding to the case of effect type D or J and effect type F being determined in the next round, and effect type D or J in effect for the next round The table for character type lottery corresponding to the case where a type other than type F is determined is shown. FIG. 85 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to the effect type E, F, K, or L and the addition value by character appearance being determined as “+50”, and the effect type E, F, K, Or a table for character type lottery corresponding to the case where the addition value due to the appearance of the character is "+100". FIG. 86 shows a character type lottery table corresponding to the effect types E, F, K, or L and the addition value by character appearance being determined as “+150”, and effect types E, F, K, Or a character type lottery table corresponding to the case where the addition value due to the appearance of the character is “+200”, which is L.

  The character type lottery table (effect type C or H) shown in FIG. 82 includes effect types C and H as reference items, and character effect pattern No. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character effect pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. In the character type lottery table (effect type C or H), lottery value information is referred to according to the effect types C and H. In the character type lottery table (effect type C or H), in the case of effect type C, a character effect pattern No. If 1 (character appearance failure) is determined and the effect type is H, the character effect pattern No. 2 (SP character appearance addition value "MAX") is to be determined. An additional value “MAX” is, for example, as shown in the 5th R in the bonus scenario table (Ca) of FIG. 74, an effect of performing addition display so that the total award ball number becomes “1500” by the appearance of the SP character. It corresponds to In the present embodiment, the character effect pattern No. 1 is referred to with reference to the character type lottery table (effect type C or H). Although 1 and 2 are to be determined, the character effect pattern is uniquely decided for the effect types C and H. Therefore, the character effect pattern is to be determined without using a table or a random process using random numbers. It may be

  The character type lottery table (render type D or J + upper limit reached) shown in FIG. 83 has an additional value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character as a reference item and a character effect pattern No. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character effect pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. The character type lottery table (render type D or J + upper limit reached) is generated, for example, in the bonus bonus table (Bb) of FIG. As shown in the 13th R of the table 21, the table is referred to when the total number of prize balls reaches "1500" by the added value "150" by the "character". In the character type lottery table (render type D or J + upper limit reached), lottery value information is referred to according to the added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character. In the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit value attainment), in the case of the additional value “+50”, the character effect pattern No. 11 (cow character lower x 2 appearance addition value + 50 (1500 arrival)) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+100", the character effect pattern No. 12 (cow character lower x 2 appearance addition value + 100 (1500 arrival)) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+150", the character effect pattern No. 13 (Boolean character lower x 2 appearance addition value + 150 (1500 arrival)) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+200", the character effect pattern No. 14 (cow character lower x 2 occurrence addition value + 200 (1500 arrivals)) is to be determined. In the present embodiment, the character effect pattern No. is made with reference to the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached). Although 11 to 14 are to be determined, the determination item (character effect pattern) is uniquely determined for the reference item, so the character effect pattern is determined without using the table or random process using random numbers. You may do so. Also, a plurality of character presentation patterns may be associated with each of the addition values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

  The character type lottery table (render type D or J + next round effect type F) and the character type lottery table (except effect type D or J + next round effect type F) shown in FIG. And the addition value (+50, +100, +150, +200) and the character effect pattern No. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character effect pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. In these character type lottery tables (effect type D or J + effect type F for the next round) and tables for character type lottery (other than effect type D or J + effect type F for the next round), an additional value by character appearance (+50) , +100, +150, +200), the lottery value information is referred to. In the character type lottery table (render type D or J + render type F for the next round) in the upper side of FIG. 84, in the case of the additional value “+50”, the character effect pattern No. 3 (cow character appearing additional value + 50) or No. 7 (cow character upper x 2 appearance addition value + 50) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+100", character effect pattern No. 4 (cow character lower appearance addition value + 100) or No. A character effect pattern No. 8 (cow character upper x 2 appearance addition value + 100) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+150". 5 (cow character right appearance addition value + 150) or No. 9 (cow character upper × 2 occurrence addition value + 150) is determined, and in the case of the addition value “+200”, the character effect pattern No. 6 (cow character left appearance addition value + 200) or No. 10 (cow character upper × 2 occurrence addition value + 200) is to be determined. In the character type lottery table on the lower side of FIG. 84 (except the effect type D or J + the effect type F for the next round), the character effect pattern No. is generated for the addition value “+50”. 3 (cow character upper appearance addition value + 50) is determined, and in the case of addition value "+100", character effect pattern No. 4 (cow character lower appearing addition value + 100) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+150", the character effect pattern No. 5 (cow character right appearance addition value + 150) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+200", the character effect pattern No. 6 (cow character left appearance addition value + 200) is uniquely determined. Also in the character type lottery table on the lower side of FIG. 84 (other than effect type D or J + effect type F for the next round), character effect pattern No. Although 3 to 6 are uniquely determined, a character presentation pattern may be determined without using a table or a lottery process using random numbers. Also, a plurality of character presentation patterns may be associated with each of the addition values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

  The table for character type lottery shown in FIG. 85 (effect type E or F or K or L + additional value by character appearance + 50) and the character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + additional value by character appearance) are , The addition value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character as the reference item, and the character effect pattern No. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character effect pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. In these character type lottery tables (effect type E or F or K or L + addition value by character appearance + 50) and character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + addition value by character appearance + 100), The lottery value information is referred to according to the added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) by the combo. In the character type lottery table in the upper side of FIG. 85 (effect type E or F or K or L + added value by character appearance +50), the character effect pattern No. is generated in the case of the added value “+50”. The character effect pattern No. 15 (cow character + sun appearance addition value + 50 combo addition value + 50) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+100". The character effect pattern No. 16 (cow character + sun appearance addition value + 50 combo addition value + 100) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+ 150". The character effect pattern No. 17 (cow character upper + sun × 2 appearance addition value + 50 combo addition value + 150) is determined, and in the case of the addition value “+200”. 18 (cow character + sun × 2 occurrence addition value + 50 combo addition value + 200) is uniquely determined. In the character type lottery table on the lower side of FIG. 85 (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to the appearance of the character + 100), the character effect pattern No. is displayed for the added value “+50”. The character effect pattern No. 19 (cow character upper + month appearance added value + 100 combo added value + 50) is determined, and in the case of the added value "+ 100". A character effect pattern No. 20 (cow character upper + month appearance addition value + 100 combo addition value + 100) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+ 150". 21 (bull character upper + month x 2 appearance addition value + 100 combo addition value + 150) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+200", the character effect pattern No. 22 (cow character upper + month x 2 appearance addition value + 100 combo addition value + 200) is uniquely determined. Also in these character type lottery tables, the character effect pattern is uniquely determined. However, the character effect pattern may be determined without using a table or a lottery process using random numbers. Also, a plurality of character presentation patterns may be associated with each of the addition values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

  The table for character type lottery shown in FIG. 86 (effect type E or F or K or L + additional value by character appearance + 150) and the character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + additional value due to character appearance + 200) , The addition value (+50, +100, +150, +200) due to the appearance of the character as the reference item, and the character effect pattern No. 1 to 30 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the character effect pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. Also in these character type lottery tables (effect type E or F or K or L + addition value by character appearance +150) and character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + addition value by character appearance + 200), The lottery value information is referred to according to the added value (+50, +100, +150, +200) by the combo. In the character type lottery table in the upper side of FIG. 86 (effect type E or F or K or L + additional value due to the appearance of the character + 150), the character effect pattern No. No. 23 (bull character + youth character appearance addition value + 150 combo addition value + 50) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+100", the character effect pattern No. 24 (Boolean character + youth character appearance addition value + 150 combo addition value + 100) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+150", character effect pattern No. 25 (Boolean character + youth character appearance addition value + 150 combo addition value + 150) is determined, and in the case of addition value "+200", the character effect pattern No. 26 (cow character + youth character appearance addition value + 150 combo addition value + 200) is uniquely determined. In the character type lottery table on the lower side of FIG. 86 (effect type E or F or K or L + added value due to the appearance of the character + 200), the character effect pattern No. is displayed for the added value “+50”. 27 (Boolean character + middle-aged character appearance addition value + 200 combo addition value + 50) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+ 100", the character effect pattern No. 28 (Boolean character + middle age character appearance addition value + 200 combo addition value + 100) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+ 150", the character effect pattern No. 29 (Boolean character + middle-aged character appearance addition value + 200 combo addition value + 150) is determined, and in the case of the addition value "+200", a character effect pattern No. 30 (cow character + middle age character appearance addition value + 200 combo addition value + 200) is uniquely determined. Also in these character type lottery tables, the character effect pattern is uniquely determined. However, the character effect pattern may be determined without using a table or a lottery process using random numbers. Also, a plurality of character presentation patterns may be associated with each of the addition values (+50, +100, +150, +200).

<Table for cattle character revival lottery>
FIG. 87 is a view showing a cow character resurrection lottery table. The cow character revival lottery table is a table referred to in the process (S581 in FIG. 131) included in the effect lottery determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The bull character revival lottery table has an aura color arranged on the background of the render button, a display size of the render button, and a bull character revival pattern No. indicating a failure or revival as a result according to the button operation as a render effect in the bonus. It is a table used to determine 1 to 7 based on the effect types A and I. The table for bull character revival lottery includes effect types A and I as reference items, and a bull character revival pattern No. 1 as decision items. 1 to 7 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining a bull character resurrection pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. In the cow character revival lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the effect types A and I.

  In the cow character revival lottery table, the cow character revival pattern No. 1 is based on the effect types A and I. One of 1 to 7 is determined by lottery. For example, in the effect type A, the cow character revival pattern No. One of 1 to 4 is determined. In the effect type I, the cow character revival pattern No. 1 is selected. One of 5 to 7 is determined.

<Additional bonus end screen lottery table>
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a table for lottery of bonus bonus end screens. The addition bonus end screen drawing table is a table to be referred to in the addition bonus end screen drawing process (S590 in FIG. 132) in the addition bonus end screen determination process of the sub CPU 71 described later. The addition bonus end screen drawing table has an end display pattern No. indicating a display message after the end of the last substantial round of the addition bonus. It is a table used to determine 1 to 3 based on the hit patterns 4 to 11. The bonus bonus end screen lottery table includes hit patterns 4 to 11 serving as reference items and an end display pattern No. serving as a determination item. The values 1 to 3 and lottery value information (random number range: 32768) for determining the end display pattern by random number lottery in accordance with the reference item are defined. In the bonus bonus end screen lottery table, lottery value information is referred to according to the hit patterns 4 to 11.

  In the additional bonus end screen lottery table, the end display pattern No. is made based on the hit patterns 4 to 11. One of 1 to 3 is determined by lottery. In the present embodiment, according to the hit patterns 4 to 11, the end display pattern No. 1 is displayed. Any one of 1 to 3 is to be uniquely determined. In the addition bonus end screen lottery table, the end display pattern is uniquely determined according to the hit pattern, but the end display pattern is determined without using the table or the lottery process using random numbers. May be Also, a plurality of end display patterns may be associated with one hit pattern. Furthermore, depending on the hit pattern, the end display pattern may not be determined. For example, in the case of the hit patterns 9 to 11, the end display pattern may not be determined.

<Table for title determination lottery>
FIG. 89 shows a title determination lottery table. The title determination lottery table is a table to be referred to in the additional bonus title determination processing (S591 in FIG. 132) in the processing for determining the upper bonus of the sub CPU 71 described later (S591 in FIG. 132). The title determination lottery table has a title pattern No. indicating a title displayed at the end of the additional bonus (after the display of the additional bonus end screen). It is a table used to determine 1 to 5 based on the value of the accumulated payout ball counter described later. The title determination lottery table includes the value of the accumulated payout ball counter as a reference item and the title pattern No. as a determination item. 1 to 5 are defined. In the title determination lottery table, according to the value of the accumulated payout ball counter, title pattern No. One of 1 to 5 is determined. The cumulative payout prize ball counter is the number of prize balls according to the substantial round in the big hit gaming state (including the case of the chained villa described later) in the period from the start of the big hit gaming state to the transition to the non probability changing non time saving gaming state. (The actual number of rounds x upper limit number of balls per round 100) is counted.

  In the title determination lottery table, for example, when the value of the accumulated payout balls counter is 4999 or less, the title pattern No. No. 1 (beginner) is determined, and this title pattern No. 1 is determined. According to 1, the title "Beginner" is displayed at the end of the bonus. In the title determination lottery table, according to the value of the cumulative payout prize ball counter, title pattern No. 1 uniquely. Although 1 to 5 are to be determined, different title patterns may be determined even if, for example, they are the same value of the cumulative payout balls counter.

[Control by main CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

[Main processing by main CPU]
90 and 91 are flowcharts showing main processing executed by the main CPU 61. This main processing is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 90, at S10, the main CPU 61 performs disable setting processing of the watchdog timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S11.

  At S11, the main CPU 61 performs input / output port setting processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S12.

  At S12, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the power failure is detected. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the power failure detection signal is HIGH (high level). If the power failure detection signal is not HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is detected, and the process proceeds to S12. If the power failure detection signal is HIGH, it is determined that the power failure is not detected and the processing is performed at S13. Move.

  In S13, the main CPU 61 performs sub control reception acceptance wait processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of waiting until the sub control circuit 70 receives a signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S14.

  At S14, the main CPU 61 performs processing for permitting writing to the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S15.

  At S15, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the backup clear switch 81 (see FIG. 6) is ON. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the backup clear switch 81 is ON, it transfers the process to S30 (see FIG. 91), and if it determines that the backup clear switch 81 is not ON, the process proceeds to S16. Transfer the process.

  At S16, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not there is a power failure detection flag. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the power failure detection flag is present, the process proceeds to S17. If the main CPU 61 determines that the power failure detection flag is not present, the process proceeds to S30 (see FIG. 91). .

  In S17, the main CPU 61 performs damage check of the work area and performs processing of calculating a work damage check value. When this process ends, the process moves to S18.

  In S18, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the work damage check value is a normal value. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the work damage check value is a normal value, it transfers the process to S19, and if it determines that the work damage check value is not a normal value, it transfers the process to S30. .

  At S19, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set 7FFEH to the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S20.

  In S20, the main CPU 61 performs an initial setting process of the work area at the time of power recovery. When this process ends, the process moves to S21.

  At S21, the main CPU 61 carries out a process of setting and displaying a probability change state display notification at power recovery. Specifically, in the case of the probability variation gaming state, the main CPU 61 causes a display to be displayed to notify that the winning probability of the big hit is the high probability state. When this process ends, the process moves to S22. Note that the display to be notified may be configured to end at the first start of fluctuation after power-on or at the end of fluctuation.

  At S22, the main CPU 61 performs processing for transmitting a command at the time of power recovery. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits to the sub control circuit 70 a command for returning to the gaming state at the time of power interruption. When this process ends, the process moves to S23.

  In S23, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S24, and returns to the address before power interruption, that is, the program address indicated by the program counter restored from the stack area.

  As shown in FIG. 91, at S30, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set 8000H to the stack pointer. When this process ends, the process moves to S31.

  In S31, the main CPU 61 performs processing for acquiring an initial value of random numbers related to hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S32.

  At S32, the main CPU 61 performs all work area clear processing. When this process ends, the process moves to S33.

  In S33, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an initial value of random numbers related to hit determination. When this process ends, the process moves to S34.

  In S34, the main CPU 61 performs an initialization process of the work area at the time of initialization of the RAM. When this process ends, the process moves to S35.

  In S35, the main CPU 61 performs processing to transmit a command at the time of initialization of the main RAM 63 to the sub control circuit 70. Further, in the sub control circuit 70, the main CPU 61 executes initialization based on the received command. When this process ends, the process moves to S36.

  In S36, the main CPU 61 performs initial setting of devices around the main CPU 61. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  At S37, the main CPU 61 performs interrupt disable processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of inhibiting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S38.

  At S38, the main CPU 61 performs initial value random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the initial random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S39.

  At S39, the main CPU 61 performs interrupt permission processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of permitting the interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S40.

  In S40, the main CPU 61 performs processing for updating the effect condition selection random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the effect random number counter value. When this process ends, the process moves to S41.

  At S41, the main CPU 61 determines whether the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 refers to the system timer monitoring timer value stored in the main RAM 63. If the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 or more, the process proceeds to S42 and the system timer monitoring timer value is 3 If not, the process moves to S37.

  In S42, the main CPU 61 performs processing of subtracting 3 from the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S43.

  At S43, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 is a waiting time timer for synchronizing the main control circuit 60 and the sub control circuit 70, and for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening to be opened when a big hit or a small hit occurs. A special winning opening opening time timer, a security signal output timer for measuring the minimum output period of the security signal output from the main CPU 61 to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 when it is detected that there is an illegal activity, etc. Execute processing to update various timers. If this process ends, the process moves to S44.

  At S44, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol control processing. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol control processing. Main CPU 61 extracts a random number for collision determination and a random number for symbol determination in accordance with detection signals from first start winning opening switch 320 and second starting winning opening switch 330, and is stored in main ROM 62. Whether or not the special symbol lottery (big hit and small hit lottery) is won is determined with reference to the big hit determination table (not shown), and processing of storing the result of the determination in the main RAM 63 is performed. In addition, about the special symbol control processing of S44, it mentions later using FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S45.

  At S45, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol control processing. In this process, main CPU 61 extracts the random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for ordinary symbol determination in accordance with the detection signal from pass gate switch 350, and stores the extracted random number for ordinary symbol determination and main ROM 62 Whether or not the normal symbol lottery is won is determined based on the selected normal symbol winning table (not shown), and the result of this determination, the normal symbol determination random value and the normal symbol determination table stored in the main ROM 62 Based on (not shown), it is determined which of the lost symbol and the hit symbol is to be used, and processing of storing the result of the determination is performed. When the normal symbol lottery is won, the result of the determination indicating the winning symbol is stored, and when the non-winning is selected, the result of the determination indicating the lost symbol is stored. When the result of the determination indicating the hit symbol is stored, the blade member 34 opens, for example, three times in 1.3 seconds, or opens four times in 1.4 seconds, or opens six times in 1.8 seconds. . That is, when the normal symbol lottery is won, the wing members 34 are opened, and when the wing members 34 are in the open state, the game ball easily wins the second starting opening 33. When this process ends, the process moves to S46.

  At S46, the main CPU 61 performs symbol display device control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 controls the control signal for driving the liquid crystal display device 4 according to the result of the special symbol control process stored in the main RAM 63 in S44 and S45 and the result of the ordinary symbol control process. Perform processing to store in The main CPU 61 transmits a control signal to the LED unit 5. The LED unit 5 changes and displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the received control signal. Further, the normal symbol display unit 51 of the LED unit 5 variably displays and stops the normal symbol based on the received control signal. When this process ends, the process moves to S47.

  At S47, the main CPU 61 performs game information data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 generates data relating to a game information signal to be transmitted to the table computer or the hall computer 100, and stores the data in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S48.

  At S48, the main CPU 61 performs symbol holding number data generation processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks the special symbol related switch check process and the normal symbol related switch check process (S91 and S92 in FIG. 94) in the timer interrupt process to be described later (S91, S92 in FIG. 94). First based on the detection signal from the start opening switch 330 and the passage gate switch 350, and the update result of the number-of-holds data stored in the main RAM 63 updated according to the execution of the variation display of the special symbol and the normal symbol. A control signal for driving the special symbol hold display unit 55, the second special symbol hold display unit 56, and the normal symbol hold display unit 52 is stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S49.

  At S49, the main CPU 61 performs port output processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of outputting control signals stored in the main RAM 63 in the above-described steps from each port. Specifically, the main CPU 61 outputs a security signal to the hall computer 100 via the external terminal board 80 and an LED power supply (common signal) for lighting the LED, the first big winning opening shutter 36A and the second big winning A solenoid power supply for solenoid drive is performed to open and close the mouth shutter 37A and open and close the blade member 34. When this process ends, the process moves to S50.

  At S50, the main CPU 61 performs a winning opening related command control process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of controlling a winning opening related command. When this process ends, the process moves to S37.

  In the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the processing in S38 to S50 of the main processing by the main CPU 61 constitutes the game processing.

[Timer interrupt processing by main CPU 61]
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps. Even when the main CPU 61 is executing the main processing, the main processing may be interrupted to execute timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is a process performed in response to a clock pulse generated every predetermined cycle (for example, 2 ms) from a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown). In the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the timer interrupt process by the main CPU 61 constitutes an interrupt process.

  As shown in FIG. 92, at S60, the main CPU 61 performs register save processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of saving the register. When this process ends, the process moves to S61.

  At S61, the main CPU 61 performs timer update processing. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing of incrementing the value of the system timer monitoring timer stored in the main RAM 63. The system timer monitoring timer is a monitoring timer for executing predetermined processing (special symbol control processing, etc.) on condition that activation of timer interruption processing is performed a predetermined number of times (three times). The timer update process of S61 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S62.

  At S62, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set clear data in the watchdog output data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets clear data in the watchdog output data, and transmits a control signal based on the watchdog output data to the initial reset circuit 64. The initial reset circuit 64 releases the voltage of the capacitor based on the received control signal. When a predetermined time (for example, 3100 ms) determined by the capacitance of the capacitor connected to the initial reset circuit 64 elapses after the watchdog timer provided in the initial reset circuit 64 is cleared, the main CPU 61 A system reset signal is output. When the system reset signal is input from the initial reset circuit 64, the main CPU 61 enters a system reset state. When this process ends, the process moves to S63.

  At S63, the main CPU 61 performs random number update processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of updating the random number. For example, the main CPU 61 updates a random number such as a random number counter for hit determination, a random number counter for hit symbol determination, a random number counter for normal symbol determination, and a random number counter for presentation condition determination. In addition, since the random number counter for hit determination and the random number counter for hit symbol determination loses fairness when the update timing of the counter value is indeterminate, the timing determined every 2 ms in order to secure this. To make updates on When this process ends, the process moves to S64.

  At S64, the main CPU 61 performs switch input processing. Although the details will be described later, in this processing, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not each switch corresponding to each winning area or the like has detected a winning. For example, when a winning is detected, the main CPU 61 sets a bit corresponding to the winning area determined to have a winning to “1 (ON)”. The switch input process of S64 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S65.

  At S65, the main CPU 61 performs payout control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 checks whether the game ball has won in the first large winning opening 36, the second large winning opening 37, the first starting opening 32, the second starting opening 33, and the general winning opening 40. If there is a winning, the payout request command corresponding to each is sent to the payout / fire control circuit 82. That is, the main CPU 61 sets a command for paying out from the payout device 83 a winning ball corresponding to a winning area in which the bit is “1 (ON)” along with the winning of the gaming ball, and the set command Is sent to the payout / emission control circuit 82. When this command is set, the bit corresponding to the winning area triggered by the command set is controlled to "0 (OFF)". When this process ends, the process moves to S66.

  At S66, the main CPU 61 performs command transmission control processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 transmits each set command to the command input port 74 of the sub control circuit 70 through the command output port 66. When this process ends, the process moves to S67.

  At S67, the main CPU 61 performs register recovery processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of restoring the register to the address before the interrupt process. When this process ends, this timer interrupt processing routine ends.

[Timer update processing]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing timer update processing executed by the main CPU 61. This timer update process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 93, at S70, the main CPU 61 adds one to the value of the system timer monitoring timer. The system timer monitoring timer is a timer for counting the number of times of execution (activation) of timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, when the number of times of execution (activation) of the timer interrupt processing reaches a predetermined condition (three times), the predetermined processing (special symbol control processing or the like) is executed. When this process ends, the process moves to S71.

  At S71, the main CPU 61 subtracts one from the value of the waiting time timer. The waiting time timer is a timer for measuring various execution waiting times. When this process ends, the process moves to S72.

  At S72, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0". The residual ball monitoring timer includes a ball passage from the first large winning opening 36 to the first large winning opening count switch 360 and a ball passage from the second large winning opening 37 to the second large winning opening count switch 370. It is a timer for measuring the residual ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the residual ball which remains in. In this process, if the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0", the process proceeds to S77, and if the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0". , Shift the processing to S73. When the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0” and the round game is not in progress, an error may be notified when the big winning hole count switch detects a game ball.

  At S73, the main CPU 61 subtracts one from the value of the residual ball monitoring timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S74.

  At S74, the main CPU 61 carries out processing to determine again whether the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S77, and when the main ball 61 determines that the value of the residual ball monitoring timer is "0". , Shift the processing to S75.

  At S75, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the specific area 38A is open. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the specific area 38A is not open, the process proceeds to S77, and when it is determined that the specific area 38A is open, the process proceeds to S76.

  At S76, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting specific area closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data for closing the specific area 38A, and drives the displacement member solenoid 390 based on a control signal based on this data. Thus, the displacement member 39 is driven to close the specific area 38A. When this process ends, the process moves to S77.

  In S77, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is a timer for counting the discharge ball monitoring processing time for monitoring the discharge balls discharged in the second large winning opening 37. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S80, and when the value of the discharge monitoring timer is determined not to be “0”, S78. Transfer the process to In the present embodiment, a smaller value (shorter time) is set to the residual ball monitoring timer than the discharge monitoring timer, but it may be the same or a large value (long time).

  At S78, the main CPU 61 subtracts one from the value of the discharge monitoring timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S79.

  In S79, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine again whether the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is “0”. The process moves to S80.

  In S80, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is “1” or “11”. The special winning opening open frequency counter is a counter used to identify the 1Rth or 11R eyes opened and closed by the second large winning opening 37. Therefore, the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter does not count the number of times the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are actually in the open state, and one is added for each round. is there. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is neither “1” nor “11”, the process proceeds to S 82 and the value of the special winning opening opening frequency counter is If it is determined that the value is "1" or "11", the process proceeds to S81.

  In S81, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not a control status flag described later is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening open process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the timer update processing routine is ended, and the control status flag indicates the special winning opening opening processing. If it is determined that the value is not (04H), the process proceeds to S82.

  In S82, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter. The second large winning opening winning combination counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings to the second large winning opening 37 detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370. The discharge ball counter is a counter for counting the number of discharge balls of the game ball detected by the specific area switch 380A and the non-specific area switch 380B. Basically, the value of the second big winning opening winning combination counter and the value of the discharge ball counter are the same. In this process, when the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is not larger than the value of the discharging ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends this timer update processing routine, and the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is If the value is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S83. The value set in the discharge monitoring timer is longer than the time required from the detection of the game ball by the second large winning opening count switch 370 to the detection by the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. It corresponds to time. Therefore, if it is determined in this process that the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is larger than the value of the discharge ball counter, the second large winning by the ball clogging inside the second winning opening 37 or so-called goto action It is assumed that only the winning opening count switch 370 is detected.

  At S83, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command corresponds to a command for notifying that the ejection has not been normally performed. The ejection error command is transmitted in the command transmission control process in the timer interrupt process. When this process ends, the process moves to S84.

  In S84, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the second large winning opening winning combination counter to the discharged ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process ends, the timer update processing routine ends. Note that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S84.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. This switch input process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 94, in S90, the main CPU 61 performs a fraud detection switch check process. In this process, the main CPU 61 confirms the detection state of a radio wave sensor (not shown) capable of detecting radio waves, a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetism, a vibration sensor capable of detecting vibration, etc. If this process ends, the process moves to S91. In addition, when it is in the state which one of the above-mentioned sensors detected, error notification may be performed, and even if, for example, the big winning opening count switch detects a winning of the gaming ball, the winning is invalidated. You may do it.

  At S91, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol related switch check processing. The special symbol related switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S92.

  At S92, the main CPU 61 performs normal symbol related switch check processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not there is an input of the passage gate switch 350, in other words, whether or not a game ball has been detected, and when it is determined that there is an input, the number of reservations is an upper limit (for example, If it is determined that the upper limit is set, the process ends. When it is determined that it is not the upper limit, a random number value for hit determination is extracted from the random number counter for hit determination of the normal symbol game, and a random value for hit symbol determination is extracted from the random number counter for hit symbol determination. Perform processing to store in the symbol storage area. If this process ends, the process moves to S93.

  At S93, the main CPU 61 performs prize ball related switch check processing. In this processing, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not there is an input of the general winning opening left switch 400A, the general winning opening right switch 400B, the first start winning opening switch 320, and the second starting winning opening switch 330. If it is determined that there is an input of the general winning opening left switch 400A or the general winning opening right switch 400B, processing is performed to add 1 to the value of the general winning opening prize ball counter, and the first start winning opening switch 320 or second When it is determined that there is an input of the start winning opening switch 330, processing is performed to add 1 to the value of the starting opening winning counter corresponding to each. When this process ends, the switch input processing routine ends.

[Special symbol related switch check process]
FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a special symbol related switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol related switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 95, in S100, the main CPU 61 performs a first start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S101.

  In S101, the main CPU 61 performs a second start port switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S102.

  In S102, the main CPU 61 performs a first big winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S103.

  In S103, the main CPU 61 performs a second big winning opening switch check process. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the special symbol related switch check processing routine ends.

[First start port switch check process]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing a first start port switch check process performed by the main CPU 61. The first start port switch check process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 96, in S110, the main CPU 61 determines the processing based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320 to determine whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to the first starting opening 32 has been detected. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 320 is “1 (ON)”, and the first starting opening If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S111, and if the bit of the first starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the first starting opening End the switch check processing routine.

  In S111, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol is four or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the first special symbol, that is, the number of reservations is four or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the first start port switch check processing routine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S112.

  At S112, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of holdings of the first special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S113.

  At S113, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value for the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter A process of extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing the same in the first special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the first special symbol start storage area is from the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the first special symbol start storage area (0) Judgment result based on the hit random number for judgment is derived and displayed by the first special symbol, and various kinds acquired by the game ball winning in the first starting opening 32 during fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol The random number value is sequentially stored in the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process ends, the process moves to S114.

  At S114, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the first special symbol variation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the first special symbol fluctuation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S115.

  At S115, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to perform a winning effect based on random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S116.

  In S116, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command includes information indicating a hit determination random number and information indicating a hit symbol determination random number. The start winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 recognizes that the game ball has been won or the result of the hit lottery result. It will be. The data of the start winning command includes data for executing a winning effect, for example, changing the display mode of the holding ball to be displayed, when it is determined that the effect is a winning effect in the process of S115. This enables so-called "pre-reading effect" in which the effect is executed based on the start memory before the change execution. When this process ends, the first start port switch check process routine ends.

[Second start port switch check process]
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a second start port switch check process performed by the main CPU 61. The second start port switch check process is performed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 97, in S120, the main CPU 61 determines the processing based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 to determine whether or not the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 33 has been detected. Do. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter corresponding to the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 330 is “1 (ON)”, and the second starting opening If the bit of the winning detection counter is "1 (ON)", the process proceeds to S121, and if the bit of the second starting opening winning detection counter is not "1 (ON)", the second starting opening End the switch check processing routine.

  In S121, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol is four or more. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the number of start memories of the second special symbol, that is, the number of reservations is four or more. If it is determined that the number of reservations is 4 or more, the second start port switch check processing routine is ended, and if it is determined that the number of reservations is not 4 or more, the process proceeds to S122.

  At S122, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the number of start memories of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the value of the number of pending of the second special symbol stored in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S123.

  At S123, the main CPU 61 performs various random number value acquisition processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 extracts the hit determination random number value for the special symbol game from the hit determination random number counter by so-called special symbol lottery, and further extracts the hit symbol determination random number value from the hit symbol determination random number counter A process of extracting the effect condition determination random number value from the effect condition determination random number counter and storing the same in the second special symbol start storage area of the main RAM 63 is performed.

  In this embodiment, the second special symbol start storage area is from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), and is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) Judgment result based on the hit random number for judgment is derived and displayed by the second special symbol, and various kinds acquired by the game ball winning in the second starting opening 33 during the fluctuation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol The random number value is sequentially stored in the second special symbol start storage area (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) as start storage. When this process ends, the process moves to S124.

  At S124, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting second special symbol fluctuation state data. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting second special symbol fluctuation state data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S125.

  In S125, the main CPU 61 performs a winning effect determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether to perform a winning effect based on random number lottery. When this process ends, the process moves to S126.

  In S126, the main CPU 61 sets a start winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The start winning command is as described above. When this process ends, the second start port switch check process routine ends.

[First big winning opening switch check process]
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing a first big winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The first big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 98, in S130, main CPU 61 determines whether or not winning of the game ball to first large winning opening 36 has been detected based on a detection signal from first large winning opening count switch 360. Do the process. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the first big winning opening 36 has been detected, the process proceeds to S131, and the winning of the gaming ball to the first big winning opening 36 is detected. If it is determined that the process is not performed, the first big winning opening switch check processing routine is ended.

  In S131, the main CPU 61 performs processing for adding one to the value of the first large winning opening winning combination counter. The first large winning opening winning combination counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit winning number per round has been reached. When this process ends, the process moves to S132.

  In S132, the main CPU 61 sets a first big winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The first big winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the first big winning opening 36. Become aware. As a result, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout balls) displayed during the additional bonus is additionally displayed. When this process is ended, the first winning opening switch check processing routine is ended.

[Second big winning opening switch check process]
FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing a second big winning opening switch check process executed by the main CPU 61. The second big winning opening switch check process is executed in the following steps. As shown in FIG. 99, in S140, main CPU 61 determines whether or not winning of the game ball to second large winning opening 37 has been detected based on a detection signal from second large winning opening count switch 370. Do the process. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the winning of the gaming ball to the second big winning opening 37 has been detected, the process proceeds to S141, and the winning of the gaming ball to the second big winning opening 37 is detected. If it is determined that the process is not performed, the process proceeds to S143.

  In S141, the main CPU 61 performs processing of adding one to the value of the second large winning opening winning combination counter. The second large winning opening winning combination counter is a counter for determining whether or not the upper limit winning number per round has been reached. If this process ends, the process moves to S142.

  In S142, the main CPU 61 sets a second large winning opening winning command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The second large winning opening winning command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70, whereby the sub control circuit 70 wins the game ball to the second large winning opening 37. Become aware. Also in this case, for example, the total number of payouts (the number of payout balls) displayed during the bonus on bonus is additionally displayed. When this process ends, the process moves to S143.

  In S143, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the V winning of the gaming ball in the specific area 38A has been detected based on the detection signal from the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the V winning of the gaming ball in the specific area 38A is detected, the process proceeds to S144, and it is determined that the V winning of the gaming ball in the specific area 38A is not detected. In the case, the process moves to S152.

  At S144, the main CPU 61 performs processing of adding one to the value of the discharge ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S145.

  In S145, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is "1" or "11". The special winning opening open frequency counter is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is neither “1” nor “11”, the process proceeds to S152, and the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is If it is determined that the value is "1" or "11", the process proceeds to S146.

  In S146, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not a control status flag described later is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening open process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the process proceeds to S149, and the control status flag is the value indicating the special winning opening opening processing (04H If it is not determined, the process proceeds to S147.

  In S147, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control status flag described later is a value (05H) indicating the big winning opening reopening release waiting time management process or a value indicating the hit end interval management process (06H). I do. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is "05H" or "06H", it transfers the process to S148 and determines that the control status flag is neither "05H" nor "06H". The process moves to S152.

  In S148, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than “0”. The discharge monitoring timer is as described above. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is larger than “0”, the process proceeds to S149, and the value of the discharge monitoring timer is determined not to be larger than “0”. The process moves to S152. In this process, when it is determined that the value of the discharge monitoring timer is not larger than "0", it is determined that an incorrect prize has occurred, and an error is notified by transmitting an error command to the sub control circuit 70. You may do it.

  In S149, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the specific area passage flag is “01H”. The specific area passing flag is an internal flag that is set to “01H” when the V winning of the gaming ball is detected by the specific area switch 380A. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the specific area passing flag is “01H”, the process proceeds to S152, and when the value of the specific area passing flag is not “01H”. , Shift the process to S150.

At S150, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set "01H" to the value of the specific area passage flag. The value "01H" of the specific area passage flag is also used as internal information indicating that the transition to the probability variation gaming state is determined after the end of the jackpot gaming state.
If this process ends, the process moves to S151.

  In S151, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a specific area passage command. The specific area passing command is a command indicating that the gaming ball has passed (V winning) with respect to the specific area 38A. The specific area passing command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the auxiliary control circuit 70, whereby the auxiliary control circuit 70 recognizes the V winning in the specific area 38A. If this process ends, the process moves to S152.

  In S152, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether passage of the gaming ball to the non-specific area 38B has been detected based on a detection signal from the non-specific area switch 380B. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that passage of the gaming ball to the nonspecific area 38B is detected, the process proceeds to S153 and it is determined that passage of the gaming ball to the nonspecific area 38B is not detected. In the case, the process moves to S154.

  At S153, the main CPU 61 performs processing of adding one to the value of the discharge ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S154.

  In S154, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter. That is, the game ball is not detected by the second large winning opening count switch 370, and the main CPU 61 determines whether the game ball is detected only in the specific area switch 380A or the non-specific area switch 380B. judge. In this process, when the value of the second big winning opening winning counter is not smaller than the value of the discharging ball counter, the main CPU 61 ends the second big winning opening switch check processing routine, and the second big winning opening If the value of the winning counter is smaller than the value of the discharge ball counter, the process proceeds to S155.

  At S155, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a discharge error command. The ejection error command is as described above. When this process ends, the process moves to S156.

  In S156, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the value of the second big winning opening winning counter to the discharged ball counter. This prevents the discharge error command from being repeatedly transmitted. When this process is ended, the second winning opening switch check processing routine is ended. Note that the discharge error command may be repeatedly transmitted without performing the process of S156.

[Special symbol control process]
FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the special symbol control process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol control process is executed in the following steps. In FIG. 100, numerical values shown laterally from S161 to S168 indicate control state flags corresponding to those steps, and are stored in the storage area of the control state flags in the main RAM 63. The main CPU 61 executes one step corresponding to the numerical value according to the numerical value of the control state flag stored in the main RAM 63. As a result, the special symbol game is advanced.

  As shown in FIG. 100, in the first S160, the main CPU 61 executes a process of loading a control state flag. In this process, the main CPU 61 reads a control state flag from the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S161.

  In addition, in S161 to S168 described later, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to execute various processing in each step based on the value of the control state flag. The control state flag indicates the game state of the special symbol game, and enables one of the processes in S161 to S168 to be performed. In addition to that, the main CPU 61 executes the processing in each step at a predetermined timing determined according to the waiting time timer set for each step. Note that before the predetermined timing is reached, the main CPU 61 ends without executing the processing in each step, and executes another subroutine. The main CPU 61 also executes timer interrupt processing at a predetermined cycle.

  At S161, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol storage check processing. The details of S161 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S162.

  At S162, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag to the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management when the control status flag is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management and the variation time has elapsed. Set and set waiting time (for example, 600 ms) in the waiting time timer. That is, after the waiting time after determination has elapsed, the process of S163 is set to be performed. The details of this S162 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S163.

  At S163, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol display time management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines whether the control status flag is a value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management, and if the wait time after confirmation has passed, whether it is a big hit or a small hit. In the case of a big hit or a small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management in the control state flag, and sets a time corresponding to the hit start interval in the waiting time timer. That is, after the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed, the process of S164 is set to be performed. On the other hand, when it is not a big hit or a small hit, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S168. The details of this S163 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S164.

  At S164, the main CPU 61 executes hit start interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management, and the second big win is read from the main ROM 62 when the time corresponding to the hit start interval has elapsed. Data for opening the mouth shutter 37A and data for opening the displacement member 39 are stored in the main RAM 63. Then, in the processing of S49 of FIG. 91, the main CPU 61 reads the data for opening the second big winning opening shutter 37A stored in the main RAM 63 and the data for opening the displacement member 39, A signal to open the second large winning opening shutter 37A and a signal to open the displacement member 39 are supplied to the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A and the displacement member solenoid 390. Thus, the main CPU 61 controls the opening and closing of the second large winning opening 37. In other words, a predetermined advantageous gaming state (a period in which one round starts and an interval is reached, the second large winning opening 37 changes a predetermined number of times between an open state where it is easy to receive gaming balls and a closed state where it is hard to accept The game state is executed by repeatedly performing one round game in which the state is provided a predetermined number of times. In this case, a small hit gaming state in which only the second large winning opening 37 is opened and closed may be executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the second big winning opening 37 is always opened and closed at first, but the first winning opening 36 may be opened and closed first, or the first The large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 may be arbitrarily selected and opened and closed.

  Furthermore, the main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open to the control state flag, and the opening upper limit time (for example, 27.834s of the opening and closing pattern E per round) to the special winning opening opening time Set to timer. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S166. Note that details of this S164 will be described later using FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S165.

  At S165, the main CPU 61 executes waiting time management processing before the special winning opening reopening. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines that the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating waiting time management before big winning opening reopening, and the time corresponding to the inter-round interval (interval pattern a, b) has elapsed, The special winning opening open frequency counter is updated and stored so as to increase by “1”. The main CPU 61 sets a value (04H) indicating that the special winning opening is open in the control state flag. The main CPU 61 sets the open upper limit time (for example, 27.834s of the open / close pattern E per round) to the special winning opening open time timer. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S166. In this process, the main CPU 61 also performs a process for controlling the opening and closing of the displacement member 39. Note that details of this S165 will be described later using FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S166.

  At S166, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening open process. In this process, when the control status flag is the value (04H) indicating that the big winning opening is open, the main CPU 61 has passed the open upper limit time under the condition that the big winning opening winning counter is "10 or more" ( It is determined whether any of the conditions of the special winning opening open time timer is “0” is satisfied. The main CPU 61 updates the variable located in the main RAM 63 in order to close the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 when any of the conditions is satisfied. Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening open frequency counter satisfies the condition that the special winning opening opening frequency is equal to or greater than the maximum value (which is the final round). The main CPU 61 sets the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval in the control state flag in the final round, while the value (05H) indicates the waiting time management before the big winning opening reopening while it is not the final round. Is set in the control status flag. Note that details of this S166 will be described later using FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S167.

  At S167, the main CPU 61 executes hit end interval management processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 controls the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end when the control state flag is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval and the time corresponding to the hit end interval has elapsed. Set to the flag. That is, setting is made to execute the process of S168. Note that details of this S167 will be described later using FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S168.

  At S168, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol game end processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check, when the control status flag is a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game. That is, it is set to execute the process of S161. Details of this S168 will be described later with reference to FIG. When this processing is ended, the special symbol control processing routine is ended.

  As described above, the special symbol game is executed by setting the control state flag. Specifically, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 controls the control status flags (00H), (01 H), (02 H) when the result of the hit determination is loss. By sequentially setting () and (07H), the processing of S161, S162, S163, and S168 shown in FIG. 100 is executed at a predetermined timing. Further, when the main CPU 61 is not in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, the main CPU 61 controls the control state flag (00H), (01 H), (02 H) when the result of the hit determination is the big hit or the small hit. By setting in order and, processing of S161, S162, and S163 which are shown in Figure 100 is executed with specified timing, control to big hit game state or small hit game state will be executed. Furthermore, when control to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is executed, the main CPU 61 sets the control status flag in order of (03H), (04H), (05H), as shown in FIG. The processing of S164, S166, and S165 shown is executed at a predetermined timing to execute the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state ending condition is established, the processing of S165 and S167 to S168 shown in FIG. 100 is performed by setting (04H), (06H), and (07H) in order. The game is executed at a predetermined timing, and the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is ended.

[Special symbol memory check process]
FIG. 101 is a flow chart showing the special symbol storage check process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol storage check process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 101, in S170, the main CPU 61 determines whether the control state flag is a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is a value indicating a special symbol storage check, the process proceeds to S171. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (00H) indicating the special symbol storage check, it ends the special symbol storage check processing routine.

  In S171, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine the presence or absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is no start memory for the special symbol game, that is, the first special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (4) or the second special symbol start memory If no data is stored in the area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the process moves to S172. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that there is start storage, the process proceeds to S173.

  At S172, the main CPU 61 performs a demonstration display process. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demonstration display permission value in the main RAM 63. Furthermore, the state where the start memory of the special symbol game (the first special symbol start storage area or the second special symbol start storage area where the random value for hitting determination is stored) becomes "0" for a predetermined time (for example, 30s) If maintained, set a value to allow execution of the demo display as a demo display permission value. Then, when the demonstration display permission value is a predetermined value, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a demonstration display command. The demonstration display command stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a demonstration display command. Thus, the demonstration display is performed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process is ended, the special symbol memory check processing routine is ended.

  In S173, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not start storage corresponding to the second special symbol is "0". In this process, main CPU 61 determines the presence / absence of data of second special symbol start storage area (0) to second special symbol start storage area (4), and the start storage corresponding to second special symbol is "0". That is, when it is determined that data is not stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), the processing is shifted to S174. If the start memory corresponding to the second special symbol is not "0", that is, if it is determined that data is stored in the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (4), S175 Transfer the process to

  In S174, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (02H) indicating that the second special symbol changes as the change state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S175, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is fluctuated as a fluctuation state number in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S176.

  In S176, the main CPU 61 executes processing for setting a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management as a control state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S177.

  At S177, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol storage transfer processing. In this process, when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the first special symbol, the main CPU 61 executes the first special symbol start storage area (1) to the first special symbol start storage area (4), respectively. Execute processing to shift (store) from the special symbol start storage area (0) to the first special symbol start storage area (3), and when the special symbol to be variably displayed is the second special symbol, the second special symbol start storage area Execute processing to shift (store) each of the data from (1) to the second special symbol start storage area (4) from the second special symbol start storage area (0) to the second special symbol start storage area (3) Do. When this process ends, the process moves to S178.

  At S178, the main CPU 61 executes the jackpot determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects one big hit from a plurality of big hit determination tables (not shown) having different numbers of big hit determination values (big hit determination values) depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probable variation gaming state. Select a judgment table. That is, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating a probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination table for high probability with a large number of jackpot determination values is referred to, and the gaming status flag is not a value indicating a probability variation gaming state, the jackpot determination value The jackpot determination table for the non-probability changing gaming state with less is referred to. As described above, when the gaming state flag is a value indicating a probable variation gaming state, that is, when the gaming state is a probable variation gaming state as a special gaming state which is easily shifted to a specific gaming state (big hit gaming state), The probability of transition is improved as compared to the non-probable variation gaming state as a non-special gaming state which is less likely to shift to the specific gaming state than the probability variation gaming state as the special gaming state.

  In addition, the special game state is a definite change / time short game state, and the non special game state is basically a non definite change / non time short game state, but in the present embodiment, the non special game state is a non probability change game state and It also includes the time-saving game state.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted when winning of the game ball, and it is for the hit determination of the special symbol start storage area previously set in the first special symbol start storage area (0) and the second special symbol start storage area (0). Refer to the random number value and the selected big hit judgment table. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a big hit when the hit determination random number value and the big hit determination value match. That is, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not to make the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player.

  Note that the jackpot probability of winning in the first starting opening 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning in the second starting opening 33. The jackpot probability of winning in the first starting opening 32 in the normal gaming state may be larger or smaller than the jackpot probability of winning in the second starting opening 33.

  Thus, in the process of S178, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. If this process ends, the process moves to S179.

  In S179, when it is determined that the big hit is not won in the big hit determination process of S178, the main CPU 61 executes the small hit determination process. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a small hit determination table that defines a small hit determination value (small hit determination value) regardless of the game state flag.

  Then, the main CPU 61 is extracted when the game ball is winning, and the random determination value for the hit determination of the special symbol start storage area set in the second special symbol start storage area (0) and the selected small hit determination table refer. Then, the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit if the hit determination random number value and the small hit determination value match.

  In addition, small hit can be generated only with the second special symbol, so the small hit judgment processing is performed only based on the hit judgment random number value stored in the second special symbol start storage area, but the second The small hit determination processing may be performed based on the random number value for hit determination stored in 1 special symbol start storage area.

  Thus, in the process of S179, either a small hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game, and the special symbol is not selected when both of the big hit determination process of S178 and the small hit determination process of S179 are not won. A loss will be determined as the determination result of the game. When this process ends, the process moves to S180.

  At S180, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the big hit symbol if the result of the big hit determination is the big hit, and determines the small hit symbol if the result of the small hit determination is the small hit, for either the big hit or the small hit In the case of loss too, processing to determine the lost design is performed. The details of this S180 will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S181.

  At S181, the main CPU 61 executes special symbol variation pattern determination processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 differs based on the special symbol determined in the process of S180, the result of the big hit determination and the small hit determination determined in the processes of S178 and S179, and the value of the probability variation counter. The variation pattern determination table for determining the variation pattern is selected. Then, the main CPU 61 determines a variation pattern based on the effect condition determination random number value extracted from the effect condition determination random number counter and the selected variation pattern determination table, and stores it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. Here, in the ST gaming state and the normal gaming state, different variation pattern determination tables are provided. The main CPU 61 determines the variation display mode of the special symbol in the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 based on the data indicated by such a variation pattern. Note that this process is the same during the ST gaming state.

  Data indicating the variation pattern stored in this manner is supplied to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 of the LED unit 5. As a result, the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 is variably displayed in the variation pattern determined by the special symbol. Further, data indicating the fluctuation pattern stored in this manner is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a fluctuation pattern designation command. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 executes the effect display according to the received fluctuation pattern designation command. When this process ends, the process moves to S182.

  At S182, the main CPU 61 performs special symbol variation time setting processing. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern of the special symbol in the waiting time timer, and executes a process of clearing the storage area used for the present variation display. If this process ends, the process moves to S183.

  Then, in S183, the main CPU 61 executes processing to clear the value of the storage area (0) used for the fluctuation display of this time. When this process ends, the special symbol storage check processing routine ends.

[Special symbol determination process]
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the special symbol determination process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol determination process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 102, in S190, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not it is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the game is a big hit, it shifts the process to S191. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S196.

  In S191, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the fluctuation state number of the jackpot determined in S190 is a value (01H) indicating that it is the fluctuation of the first special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S192 when the fluctuation state number is a value (01H) indicating that the first special symbol is a fluctuation. On the other hand, when the fluctuation state number is not the value (01H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the first special symbol, that is, the main CPU 61 has a value (02H) indicating that the fluctuation state number is the fluctuation of the second special symbol In the case, the process moves to S194.

  In S192, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random value for determining the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects the big hit symbol of the first special symbol based on the random symbol value for determining the hit symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the big hit determination table (shown in the first special symbol big hit symbol distribution in FIG. A process is performed to determine whether the symbol is a symbol corresponding to any of the definite variation 1, the definite variation 2, the hour reduction 1, and the hour reduction 2. If this process ends, the process moves to S193.

  In S193, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the big hit symbol of the determined first special symbol and a command set of the big hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display unit 53. The first special symbol display unit 53 variably displays the first special symbol, and causes the first special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the data of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol command of the first special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  At S194, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine the jackpot symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects the big hit symbol of the second special symbol based on the random symbol value for determining the hit symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the big hit determination table (shown in the second special symbol big hit symbol distribution in FIG. A process is performed to determine which of the definite variation 1 to the definite variation 10 the symbol corresponds to). If this process ends, the process moves to S195.

  In S195, the main CPU 61 performs a data set of the jackpot symbol of the determined second special symbol and a command set of the jackpot symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets the data of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and causes the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the big hit symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the big hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S196, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the result determined in the small hit determination process (S179 in FIG. 101) is a small hit. In this process, the main CPU 61 shifts the process to S197 if it is a small hit. On the other hand, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S201 when it is not a small hit.

  In S197, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine a small hit symbol of the second special symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 is a small hit symbol of the second special symbol (a second special symbol small hit symbol of FIG. 8 based on the random number for determining the hit symbol extracted from the big hit symbol determination counter and the small hit determination table). Perform processing to determine if it is a small hit symbol shown in the distribution. If this process ends, the process moves to S198.

  In S198, the main CPU 61 performs the data set of the small hit symbols of the determined second special symbol and the command set of the small hit symbols. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets small hit symbol data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the second special symbol display unit 54. The second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the second special symbol, and causes the second special symbol to be stopped and displayed in a mode based on the data of the big hit symbol of the second special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets a small hit symbol command of the second special symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designation command. By the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the small hit stop display mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S199.

  In S199, the main CPU 61 performs hit start interval display time data set processing corresponding to the hit symbol. In this process, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting hit start interval display time data corresponding to the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S200.

  In S200, the main CPU 61 performs a special winning opening open frequency related data setting process. In this process, the main CPU 61 determines the number of times of opening of the special winning opening related data relating to the number of times of opening of the first special winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37, ie, definite variation 1, definite variation 2, hour reduction 1, time reduction due to the first special symbol. A process of setting data corresponding to 2 or 2 special symbols 1 to 10 or data corresponding to small hit symbols in the main RAM 63 is performed. When this processing is ended, this special symbol determination processing routine is ended.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines in S190 that neither a big hit nor a small hit is made in S196 in S190, that is, a lost symbol data set and a lost symbol command set are performed. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets data of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63 and supplies the data to the first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54. The first special symbol display unit 53 or the second special symbol display unit 54 variably displays the special symbol, and causes the special symbol to be stopped and displayed based on the data of the lost symbol of the special symbol. Further, the main CPU 61 sets the command of the lost symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and supplies it from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a special symbol designating command. Under the control of the sub control circuit 70, the identification symbol (decorative symbol) is derived and displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 in the stop-of-loss display mode. When this processing is ended, this special symbol determination processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol variation time management process]
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 103, in S210, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the control state flag is a value (01H) indicating special symbol fluctuation time management. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, the processing is shifted to S211. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value is not the value (01H) indicating the special symbol variation time management, it ends the special symbol variation time management processing routine.

  At S211, the main CPU 61 determines whether the waiting time timer is “0”. When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S212. If it is determined that the waiting time timer is not "0", the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

  In S212, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a value (02H) indicating special symbol display time management to the special symbol control state flag, and shifts the processing to S213.

  At S213, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a symbol stop command. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a symbol stop command in the main RAM 63. Then, the symbol stop command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a symbol stop command so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the symbol stop. If this process ends, the process moves to S214.

  In S214, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting the waiting time after determination in the area functioning as the waiting time timer in the main RAM 63. When this process is ended, the special symbol variation time management processing routine is ended.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol variation time management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 104, in S220, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control state flag is a value (02H) indicating a special symbol display time management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (02H) indicating the special symbol display time management process, the special symbol display time management process routine is ended.

  In S221, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer corresponding to the special symbol display management process is “0”. When the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S222. On the other hand, when the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the special symbol display time management processing routine.

  In S222, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that a big hit has occurred, the process proceeds to step S223. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S224.

  At S223, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time short) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S234.

  At S224, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter is “0”. The time saving number counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (number of symbol variations) in the time saving gaming state. When the value of the time saving number counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S225.

  At S225, the main CPU 61 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the time saving number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S226.

  At S226, the main CPU 61 determines again whether the value of the time reduction number counter is “0”. When the value of the time saving number counter is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S227. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S228.

  At S227, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a time saving end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a time saving end command indicating the end of the time saving game state in the main RAM 63. Then, the time saving end command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the gaming state so that the sub control circuit 70 recognizes the end of the time saving game state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  At S228, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. The probability variation counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining games (number of symbol variations) in the probability variation gaming state. The main CPU 61 shifts the processing to step S233 when the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S229.

  In S229, the main CPU 61 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the probability variation number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S230.

  In S230, the main CPU 61 determines again whether the value of the probability variation counter is “0”. The main CPU 61 shifts the processing to step S231 when the value of the probability variation number counter is “0”. On the other hand, when the value of the probability variation number counter is not “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S233.

  At S231, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a definite variation end command. In this process, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) in the main RAM 63 a definite variation end command indicating the end of the probable variation gaming state. Then, the definite variation end command is supplied as a command indicating the gaming state from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the subsidiary CPU 71 of the subsidiary control circuit 70, so that the subsidiary control circuit 70 recognizes the termination of the probable variation gaming state. Become. If this process ends, the process moves to S232.

  At S232, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the gaming state flag. That is, the main CPU 61 executes a process of setting a value (00H) indicating the normal gaming state (non-probability change / non-time short) in the gaming state flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S233.

  At S233, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the processing to S234. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the processing to S238.

  In S234, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the special symbol in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S235. In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the first special symbol is 15498 ms when the big hit symbol is “probable change 1”, and 11496 ms when the other big hit symbol is The hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol is 11496 ms when the big hit symbol is "probability 1", 996 ms when "positive variation 2" to "probability 10", small hit symbol It is 3996 ms. As another example, the hit start interval time corresponding to the second special symbol may be set to 3996 ms which is the same as the case of the small hit symbol even when the big hit symbol is “certain 10”.

  At S235, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a hit start display command corresponding to the special symbol. In this process, the hit start display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 so that the sub control circuit 70 starts the big hit gaming state or starts the small hit gaming state. Become aware. The hit start display command includes data indicating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit playing state, and data indicating a specific hit pattern. The sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state by the data indicating the hit pattern included in the hit start display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S236.

  At S236, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S237.

  In S237, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management processing in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol display time management processing routine is ended.

  In S238, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (07H) indicating the end processing of the special symbol game as the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this processing is ended, the special symbol display time management processing routine is ended.

[Perform start interval management process]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 105, in S240, the main CPU 61 performs a process of determining whether the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating a hit start interval management process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, the process proceeds to S241. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit start interval management process, it ends the hit start interval management process routine.

  At S241, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time is “0”. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S 242. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the hit start interval management processing routine is ended.

  In S242, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a big hit. If the main CPU 61 determines that a big hit has occurred, the process proceeds to step S243. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S245.

  In S243, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a special winning opening open frequency counter upper limit value in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63, and shifts the processing to S244.

  In S244, the main CPU 61 performs a process of adding “1” to the special winning opening open frequency counter, and shifts the process to S245.

  In S245, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) hit pattern data indicating a big winning opening / closing pattern according to the type of big hit symbol or small hit symbol in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the pattern (hit pattern) shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the big hit symbol or small hit symbol determined in S245. If this process ends, the process moves to S246.

  In S246, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the process moves to S247.

  In S247, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing in the control state flag in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S248.

  In S248, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S249.

  At S249, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the discharged ball counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S250.

  In S250, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. The value of the waiting time timer is set as 27.222 s, for example, if the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is “probable variation 1”, for example, according to the value (round number) of the special winning opening open frequency counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S251.

  In S251, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable located in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to open the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37. The variables stored in this way drive the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A to open the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37, Become. When this process ends, the hit start interval management process routine ends. In the present embodiment, the second large winning opening 37 always opens in the case of the 1R-th or small hitting gaming state in the big hit gaming state, so data for opening the second big winning opening 37 is set. Ru. Although data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here, data for opening and closing the specific area 38A may be set in another process.

[Wait time management process before the big winning opening reopening]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the waiting time question management process before the special winning opening reopening, which is executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time question management process before the special winning opening reopening is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 106, in S260, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the control status flag is a value (05H) indicating a waiting time management process before big winning opening reopening. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (05H) indicating the special winning opening before reopening waiting time management process, the process proceeds to S261. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (05H) indicating the waiting time management process before the big winning opening reopening, the main winning opening pre-opening question management process routine ends.

  In S261, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds is “0”. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to step S262. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the main CPU 61 ends the waiting time question management processing routine before the big winning opening reopening.

  In S262, the main CPU 61 performs processing for adding “1” to the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S263.

  In S263, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) the special winning opening open display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The special winning opening open display command in this case is data indicating the start of the round game. The special winning opening open display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the auxiliary control circuit 70 as a special winning opening open display command. If this process ends, the process moves to S264.

  In S264, the main CPU 61 performs a process of setting a value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open process in the control state flag in a predetermined area functioning as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S265.

  In S265, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the special winning opening winning counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S266.

  At S266, the main CPU 61 performs processing to clear the value of the discharged ball counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S267.

  In S267, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S268.

  In S268, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening open data in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. When this process is ended, the waiting time question management process routine before the big winning opening reopening is ended.

[A big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening open processing executed by the main CPU 61. The special winning opening open processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 107, in S270, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not the control status flag is a value (04H) indicating a special winning opening open process. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S271. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (04H) indicating the special winning opening open processing, the main winning opening opening processing routine is ended.

  At S271, the main CPU 61 determines whether the value of the special winning opening winning counter is "10" or more. In this processing, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is “10” or more, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening winning counter is not “10” or more, the process proceeds to S272.

  In S272, the main CPU 61 executes a special winning opening opening / closing process corresponding to the set opening / closing pattern for each round in the type of the big hit and the current round, and shifts the process to S273.

  In S273, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the waiting time timer as the special winning opening opening time is "0". When the main CPU 61 determines that the waiting time timer is “0”, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S274. On the other hand, when determining that the waiting time timer is not "0", the main CPU 61 ends the special winning opening open processing routine.

  In S274, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the special winning opening closing data. In this process, the main CPU 61 updates the variable positioned in the main RAM 63 based on the data read from the main ROM 62 in order to close the special winning opening. The variable stored in this manner is for closing the first large winning opening shutter solenoid 360A or the second large winning opening shutter solenoid 370A. If this process ends, the process moves to S275.

  At S275, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the residual ball monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 1098 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S276.

  In S276, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the closed special winning opening is the second large winning opening 37 or not. When the main CPU 61 determines that the closed special winning opening is the second large winning opening 37, the process proceeds to S277. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the closed special winning opening is not the second large winning opening 37, that is, the first special winning opening 36, the process proceeds to S278.

  At S277, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set a predetermined value in the discharge monitoring timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 1998 ms is set as the predetermined value. If this process ends, the process moves to S278.

  At S278, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not it is a small hit. When the main CPU 61 determines that it is a small hit, it shifts the processing to S283. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that it is not a small hit, it shifts the processing to S279.

  In S279, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening frequency (the number of rounds). In this process, the main CPU 61 compares the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter stored in the main RAM 63 with the upper limit of the special winning opening opening frequency (round number), and the value of the special winning opening frequency counter It is determined whether or not the upper limit value of the number of times of opening the special winning opening is equal to or more. Here, the upper limit value of the number of times of opening of the special winning opening is, for example, 16R in the case of "certain variation 1" to "certain variation 5" of the second special symbol. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or more than the upper limit of the winning opening opening frequency, the process proceeds to S283. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 does not determine that the value of the special winning opening open frequency counter is equal to or more than the upper limit value of the special winning opening opening frequency, the process proceeds to S280.

  In S280, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the value of the waiting time timer as the interval display time between rounds in the main RAM 63. In addition, although the time corresponding to interval pattern a, b is set, interval display time between rounds may be made to set time different from these. If this process ends, the process moves to S281.

  In S281, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a value (05H) indicating the waiting time pre-reopening wait management process in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S282.

  In S282, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting an inter-round display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The inter-round display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. When this process ends, the special winning opening open processing routine is ended.

  On the other hand, in S283, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S284. In the present embodiment, as an example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the first special symbol is 7500 ms when the big hit symbol is “positive variation 1” or “positive variation 2”, “time saving 1”, “ In the case of 2 hours time, it is 12312 ms, and the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 7500 ms, when the big hit symbol is “probability 1”, “probability 2” to “probability 4”, In the case of the "probability 6", it is 12312 ms, and for the "probability 5", "probability 7" to "probability 10", and in the case of a small hit design, it is 4500 ms. As another example, the hit end interval display time corresponding to the second special symbol is 4500 ms or less for all the big hit symbols, and the big hit gaming state concerning the second special symbol is more final than the first special symbol. The time from the end of the round to the end of the jackpot gaming state may be shortened.

  In S284, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value (06H) indicating the end-of-hit interval management processing in the control state flag in the predetermined area functioning as the control state flag in the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S285.

  In S285, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting a hit end display command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit end display command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 as a command indicating the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. When this process ends, the special winning opening open processing routine is ended.

[Percent End Interval Management Process]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a hit / end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. This hit end interval management process is executed in the following steps.

  At S290, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control status flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management processing. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, the process proceeds to S291. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (06H) indicating the hit end interval management process, it ends the hit end interval management process routine.

  At S291, the main CPU 61 determines whether or not the value of the waiting time timer as the hit end interval display time is “0”. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S292. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the waiting time timer is not “0”, the hit end interval management processing routine is ended.

  At S292, the main CPU 61 sets a value (07H) indicating the end of the special symbol game in the main RAM 63 to the special symbol control state flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S293.

  In S293, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63 is "01H". If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S294. If it is determined that the specific area passage flag is not "01H", the process proceeds to S297.

  At S294, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “02H” to the gaming state flag of the main RAM 63. The game state flag "02H" indicates the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state. When this process ends, the process moves to S295.

  At S295, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “190” as the number of times of ST to the value of the probability variation counter of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S296.

  In S296, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting “00H” to the specific area passage flag of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S299.

  In S297, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting "01H" in the gaming state flag of the main RAM 63. "01H" of the gaming state flag indicates the non-probability changing gaming state and the time saving gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S298.

  At S 298, the main CPU 61 executes processing to set “4” or “100” as the number of time reductions to the value of the time reduction counter of the main RAM 63. If this process ends, the process moves to S299. When "4" is set as the number of time saving, it is only when the jackpot symbol becomes "time saving 1" in the non probability variation gaming state and the non time saving gaming state, and when transitioning to the time saving gaming state in other situations Is set to "100" as the number of time saving times.

  In S299, the main CPU 61 sets a gaming state command, and ends the hit end interval management processing routine. The gaming state command is a command including information indicating the type of the gaming state ended (big hit, small hit) in addition to the gaming state controlled after the end of the big hit gaming state, and information indicating the remaining number of times as time reduction is there. The remaining number of shortings is also referred to as the remaining shorting, as described later, and means the number of shortings of “4” or “100” set in the process of S298. That is, the remaining number of time saving times (remaining time short number) does not mean the time saving number remaining at any time of the time saving mode, but only indicates the time saving number remaining at the start time of the time saving mode. A game state command including such information such as the number of remaining times is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. This special symbol game end process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 109, in S300, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control status flag of the main RAM 63 is a value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing. When the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end processing, the main CPU 61 shifts the processing to S301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (07H) indicating the special symbol game end process, the special symbol game end process routine is ended.

  In S301, the main CPU 61 performs processing of setting a value (00H) indicating a special symbol storage check as a control state flag in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the special symbol game end processing routine ends.

[Control by sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the sub CPU 71 will be described below with reference to FIGS. The sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70 receives various commands from the main control circuit 60 and performs various processing such as display control processing.

[Main processing by sub CPU]
FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This main processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 110, in S310, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for initialization in response to power on. If this process ends, the process moves to S311.

  In S311, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of updating the random number values (such as the effect determination random number counter value and the stop symbol determination random number counter value) stored in the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S312.

  In S312, the sub CPU 71 performs command analysis processing. Although the details of this process will be described later, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of analyzing a command received from the main control circuit 60 and stored in the reception buffer of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S313. The command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117.

  In S313, the sub CPU 71 performs display control processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 transmits data for performing display in the display area 4 A of the liquid crystal display device 4 to the display control circuit 76. The display control circuit 76 including a VDP (Video Display Processor), based on the data for displaying the effect image from the sub CPU 71, various image data such as identification symbol data, background image data, and effect image data. It is read from the image data ROM, superimposed, and displayed on the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. When this process ends, the process moves to S314.

  In S314, the sub CPU 71 performs voice control processing to control the sound generated from the speakers 10a, 10b, and 10c via the voice control circuit 77. When this process ends, the process moves to S315.

  In S315, the sub CPU 71 executes lamp control processing for controlling the light emission (lighting / flickering) of the lamp / LED 27 via the lamp control circuit 78. If this process ends, the process moves to S316.

  In S316, the sub CPU 71 performs the movable effect device control process via the movable effect device control circuit 79. In this process, the sub CPU 71 executes a control process of controlling the movable effect device 42 which drives the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B. When this process ends, the process moves to S311, and thereafter, the processes of S311 to S316 are repeated.

  On the other hand, even when the sub CPU 71 is executing the main processing, the sub CPU 71 may interrupt the main processing and execute the command reception interrupt processing or the timer interrupt processing. The command reception interrupt process will be described below with reference to FIG. 111, and the timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

[Command reception interrupt processing]
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a command reception interrupt process executed by the sub CPU 71. This command reception interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 111, in S320, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving a program under execution stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S321.

  In S321, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of storing the input command in the reception buffer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of storing the input command in the reception buffer area of the work RAM 73. For example, the sub CPU 71 receives various commands transmitted from the main control circuit 60. In this process, the stored command is analyzed in the command analysis process of FIGS. 116 and 117. When this process ends, the process moves to S322.

  In S322, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S320 to each register. When this process ends, the command reception interrupt processing routine ends.

[Timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer interrupt process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 112, in S330, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of saving the value used in the program being executed stored in each register (storage area). When this process ends, the process moves to S331.

  In S331, the sub CPU 71 performs various timer update processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S332. The timer update processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115.

  In S332, the sub CPU 71 performs a pressing operation button operation determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of detecting the presence or absence of the operation of the pressing operation button 9A. Although this processing is actually determination processing, it is described as one routine here because it is interrupt processing. If this process ends, the process moves to S333. The pressed operation button operation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In S333, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to restore the register. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of restoring the program saved in S330 to each register. When this process ends, the timer interrupt processing routine ends.

[Pressing operation button operation determination processing]
FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the pressing operation button operation determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The pressed operation button operation determination process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 113, in S340, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the valid period timer is “0”. The valid period timer is a timer for counting the valid period of button operation. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the valid period timer is “0”, the sub CPU 71 ends the pressing operation button operation determination processing routine. If it is determined that the valid period timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S341.

  In S341, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the pressing operation button 9A has been operated. If it is determined that the pressing operation button 9A has been operated, the process proceeds to S342. When it is determined that the pressing operation button 9A is not operated, the pressing operation button operation determination processing routine is ended.

  In S342, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the selected effect image is being displayed. The selected effect image is an image displayed when the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H” and the value of the round counter is “1” or “2”. The hit effect pattern flag is an internal flag indicating the hit patterns 1 to 13. The hit effect pattern flags “01H” to “0DH” are set corresponding to the hit patterns 1 to 13, respectively. “01H” corresponds to the super big bonus, “02H” and “03H” correspond to the challenge bonus, “04H” to “0BH” correspond to the additional bonus, and “0CH” and “0DH” , Corresponding to the V challenge. The round counter is a counter that is incremented by one each time one round game is executed (every time the big winning opening open indication command is received), and the number of rounds currently being executed (round games executed And the same value as that of the special winning opening open frequency counter used in the main CPU 61 is basically counted. Thus, the sub CPU 71 determines whether it is the first or second R of the challenge bonus. If it is determined that the selected effect image is being displayed and it is determined that it is the first or second R of the challenge bonus, the process proceeds to S343. If it is determined that the selection effect image is not being displayed and the challenge bonus is not the first and second R eyes, the process proceeds to S344.

  In S343, the sub CPU 71 executes challenge bonus type flag change processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of changing a challenge bonus type flag indicating the type of challenge bonus. The challenge bonus type flag is set to "01H" for one match bonus game, "02H" for three challenge bonus challenges, and "03H" for challenge bonus surprises, and in S343 The sub CPU 71 changes the value of the currently set challenge bonus type flag to another value. If this process ends, the process moves to S344.

  In S344, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the effect image of “combo RUSH” is being displayed. In this process, whether or not the sub CPU 71 is displaying the effect image of “combo RUSH” based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag, the value of the scenario number flag, the value of the round counter, and the added bonus scenario table. Determine The scenario number flag is an internal flag set corresponding to the scenario number. If it is determined that the effect image of “combo RUSH” is being displayed, the process proceeds to S345. On the other hand, when it is determined that the effect image of “combo RUSH” is not being displayed, the processing is shifted to S350.

  In S345, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting one from the value of the operation number counter. The operation number counter is a counter for counting the number of operations of the pressing operation button 9A. If this process ends, the process moves to S346.

  In S346, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the operation number counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the operation number counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S347. If it is determined that the value of the operation number counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S351.

  In S347, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for subtracting one from the value of the addition number counter. The addition number counter is a counter for counting the number of additions of the additional number in the combo RUSH until reaching the upper limit. If this process ends, the process moves to S348.

  In S348, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the addition number counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the addition number counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S350. If it is determined that the value of the addition number counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S349.

  In S349, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. During the additional bonus, a predetermined value may be repeatedly set in the operation number counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S351. Here, the “predetermined value” set in the operation number counter is a value determined with reference to the combo RUSH lottery table of FIG.

  In S350, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as the value of the validity period timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S351.

  In S351, the sub CPU 71 executes effect control processing for displaying an effect image after the button operation according to the effect data set in processing to be described later. In this process, the sub CPU 71 controls an effect corresponding to the operation of the pressing operation button 9A in an effect mode such as a challenge bonus and an additional bonus. When this process ends, the process moves to S352.

  In S352, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the addition effect has been performed. An addition effect is an effect that displays on the screen a value to be added as an additional number, and the effect executed in the previous process is an addition based on the effect types B, D, E, G, H, J, K If the effect is to display the addition value corresponding to the number, it means that the addition effect has been executed. When the effect is based on the effect type F, the addition effect is not executed. As a result, the number of additions indicated in the “character” and “combo” of the effect type F in the additional bonus scenario table is added by the execution of the effect based on the effect type G in the next round (the next actual round). The number of additions indicated in the “character” and “combo” of the effect type F may be additionally displayed by the processing of S352. If it is determined that the addition effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S353. If it is determined that the addition effect has not been executed, the depression operation button operation determination processing routine is ended.

  In S353, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. The total prize ball counter is a counter for counting the total number of prize balls. In this process, the sub CPU 71 adds the number of additions indicated by “character”, “combo” and “RUSH” based on the effect type specified in the addition bonus scenario table to the total prize ball counter. When this process ends, the push operation button operation determination processing routine ends. The number of additions indicated in the "character" and "combo" of the effect type F is collectively added at that time because the next round is the effect type G. In addition, the display content of a red meter display unit 910 (see FIG. 182 and the like, which will be described later) for displaying the total award ball number is updated based on the total award ball counter. As the timing of updating the display content of the display, it is not the timing at which the number of additions is added to the total prize ball counter, but the addition effect for the number of additions is executed. It will be

[Timer update processing]
FIGS. 114 and 115 are flowcharts showing timer update processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This timer update process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 114, in S360, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the warning notification timer is “0”. The warning notification timer is a timer for measuring a time for starting a warning display prompting the V winning in the specific area 38A. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S364. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S361.

  In S361, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting one from the value of the warning notification timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S362.

  In S362, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine again whether the value of the warning notification timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S363. If it is determined that the value of the warning notification timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S364.

  In S363, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "01H" as a warning flag. The warning flag is a flag indicating that a warning display for prompting a V winning in the specific area 38A is started, and in the case of "01H", this is indicated. If this process ends, the process moves to S364.

  In S364, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0". The discharge error notification timer is a timer for measuring a time for notifying a discharge error. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0", the process proceeds to S368. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S365.

  In S365, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the discharge error notification timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S366.

  In S366, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine again whether the value of the discharge error notification timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S367. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S368.

  In S367, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting "00H" to the discharge error notification flag. The discharge error notification flag is a flag indicating that a discharge error is to be notified. In the case of "00H", the notification of the discharge error is not performed (is ended), and in the case of "01H", the discharge error is It will notify. If this process ends, the process moves to S368.

  In S368, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the validity period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S372. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S369.

  In S369, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the valid period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S370.

  In S370, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine again whether the value of the validity period timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S371. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S372.

  In S371, the sub CPU 71 executes effect control processing for displaying an effect image after button operation according to the effect data set in processing to be described later. In this process, the sub CPU 71 controls an effect corresponding to the operation of the pressing operation button 9A in an effect mode such as a challenge bonus and an additional bonus. If this process ends, the process moves to S372.

  In S372, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the valid period preparation timer is “0”. The valid period preparation timer is a timer for measuring a time until the operation of the pressing operation button 9A becomes valid and input becomes possible. If it is determined that the value of the valid period preparation timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S376 in FIG. If it is determined that the value of the effective period preparation timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S373.

  In S373, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the valid period preparation timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S374.

  In S374, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine again whether the value of the valid period preparation timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period preparation timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S375 in FIG. If it is determined that the value of the valid period preparation timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S376 in FIG.

  In S375, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a predetermined value when the value of the valid period preparation timer set at the time of various effects becomes “0”. In the present embodiment, a value corresponding to 5 s, for example, is set in the valid period timer, but the value to be set may be made different according to the effect pattern. Incidentally, for the effective period preparation timer, for example, a value corresponding to 3s is set at the time of roulette effect, a value corresponding to 5s is set at the time of effect of character appearance, and a value corresponding to 6s is set at the time of effect During surprise production, a value corresponding to 4s is set.

  As shown in FIG. 115, in S376, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the addition effect has been performed. In this process, similarly to the process of S352 in FIG. 113, the determination is performed based on whether the effect performed in the previous process (S371) is the addition effect. If it is determined that the addition effect has been executed, the process proceeds to S377. If it is determined that the addition effect has not been executed, the process proceeds to S378.

  In S377, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 adds the number of additions indicated by “character”, “combo” and “RUSH” based on the effect type specified in the addition bonus scenario table to the total prize ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S378. Also in this process, the number of additions shown in the "character" and "combo" of the effect type F is not added, and the next round becomes the effect type G, so it is collectively added at that time It will be.

  In S378, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the addition effect execution timer is "0". The addition effect execution timer is a timer that is set when the effect corresponding to the effect type M is executed, and the value of the timer becomes “0” when the reverse effect based on the effect type M is executed. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S379. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S382.

  In S379, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of subtracting one from the value of the addition effect execution timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S380.

  In S380, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine again whether the value of the addition effect execution timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S381. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S382.

  In S381, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding so that the value of the total award ball counter becomes “1500” based on the effect type M. Thereby, according to the process of S 381, an effect control process for displaying an image of a reverse effect according to effect type M or performing an additive display so that the total prize ball number becomes “1500” by the additional number is executed. Ru. When this process ends, the process moves to S382. Although this process also updates the display content of the red meter display unit 910 (see FIG. 182 and the like) described later for displaying the total number of award balls based on the total award ball counter. As the update timing of the display content of the red meter display unit 910, it is not the timing at which the number of additions is added to the total award ball counter, but the addition effect for the number of additions is executed. Is actually added.

  In S382, the sub CPU 71 performs update processing of the other timers. When this process ends, the timer update processing routine ends.

Command analysis processing
FIGS. 116 and 117 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 116, in S390, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, the process proceeds to S391. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing routine.

  In S391, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command, and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. The sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S392 when the reading of the data of the received command is completed.

  In S392, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command is received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S393. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S394.

  In S393, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. If the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S394, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S395. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S396.

  In S395, the sub CPU 71 performs stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when the stop decoration symbol is determined. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  The decorative symbols to be displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4 include, for example, numerals “1” to “7”, and a predetermined number (for example, three (3 When the digits) are aligned with the same decorative symbol (number), the game basically shifts to the jackpot gaming state. Specifically, the "special variation 1" as the big hit symbol of the first special symbol, "the positive variation 2", the "time reduction 1", the "time reduction 2", the "positive variation 1" as the big hit design of the second special symbol With regard to 10 ", and small hit symbols, the decorative symbols corresponding to" probability 1 "are the alignment of numbers" 3 "or" 7 "," probability 2 "to" probability 9 "," time 1 "," time 1 The decorative symbol corresponding to 2 "is a combination of the numbers" 1 "," 2 "," 4 "to" 6 ", the" certainty 10 "and the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol are combinations of specific symbols. The decorative pattern corresponding to the specific appearance and the loss, which is "135" in the number, is a discrete appearance other than the specific appearance.

  In S396, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S397. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S 399.

  In S397, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed. If this process ends, the process moves to S398.

  In S398, the sub CPU 71 executes special mode processing. The special mode process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  At S399, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command has been received as the command read at S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S400. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S402.

  In S400, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern determination process. The hit effect pattern determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S400.

  In S401, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit start effect process. The hit start effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S402, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening winning command has been received as the command read out in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening winning command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S403. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the special winning opening winning command is not received as the read command, the process proceeds to S404.

  In S403, the sub CPU 71 executes a winning ball counter addition process. The prize ball counter addition process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S404, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a specific area passage command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command is received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S405. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passing command is not received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S406.

  In S405, the sub CPU 71 executes V winning notification processing. The V prize notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S406, the sub CPU 71 determines whether an inter-round display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S407. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the inter-round display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S408.

  In S407, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-round effect process. The inter-round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S408, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open display command has been received as the command read in S391. If it is determined that the special winning opening open display command is received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S409. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special winning opening open display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S410 in FIG.

  In S409, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during a round. The in-round presentation processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S410 of FIG. 117, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S411. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S412.

  In S411, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. The hit end effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S412, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a game state command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command is received as the read command, the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S414.

  In S413, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode change processing. The effect mode change process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S414, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a time saving end command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S415. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the time saving end command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S416.

  In S415, the sub CPU 71 executes time saving mode end processing. The short time mode end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S416, the sub CPU 71 determines whether a definite variation end command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the definite variation end command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S417. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the definite variation end command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S418.

  In S417, the sub CPU 71 executes ST mode end processing. The ST mode end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S418, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the discharge error command has been received as the command read in S391. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S419. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the discharge error command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S420.

  In S419, the sub CPU 71 executes a discharge error notification process. The discharge error notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S420, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

Special mode processing
FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the special mode process performed by the sub CPU 71. The special mode process is a process for ending the special mode as the effect mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 118, in S430, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "01H". The effect mode flag is an internal flag that indicates the type of effect mode. In the present embodiment, as for the effect mode flag, the value corresponding to the normal mode is “00H”, the value corresponding to the special mode is “01H”, the value corresponding to the short mode is “02H”, the value corresponding to the long mode is The value corresponding to "03H" and ST mode is "04H". The background image and the contents of the effect are different according to the value of such effect mode flag. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S431. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "01H", this special mode processing routine is ended.

  In S431, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of subtracting one from the value of the special mode counter. The special mode counter is a counter for counting the number of games (number of symbol variations) in the special mode up to a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). When this process ends, the process moves to S432.

  In S432, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the special mode counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the special mode counter is "0", the process proceeds to S433. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special mode counter is not "0", this special mode processing routine is ended.

  In S433, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting "00H" to the effect mode flag, and ends the special mode processing routine. That is, the effect mode shifts from the special mode to the normal mode by the process of S433.

[Perform production pattern determination processing]
FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a hit effect pattern determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit effect pattern determination process is a process for determining a challenge bonus or an additional bonus as an effect mode in the big hit gaming state, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 119, in S440, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit effect pattern type determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets one of “01H” to “0DH” in the hit effect pattern flag according to the stop symbol designation information of the special symbol included in the received hit start display command. When this process ends, the process moves to S441.

  In S441, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a challenge bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H", the process proceeds to S442. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is neither "02H" nor "03H", the process proceeds to S443.

  In S442, the sub CPU 71 executes a challenge bonus determination process. The challenge bonus determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

  In S443, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "04H" to "0BH". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an additional bonus based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is any one of "04H" to "0BH", the process proceeds to S444. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not any of “04H” to “0BH”, the hit effect pattern determination processing routine is ended.

  In S444, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus determination process. This additional bonus determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is completed, the hit effect pattern determination process routine is ended.

[Challenge bonus decision processing]
FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a challenge bonus determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The challenge bonus determination process is a process for determining the contents of the challenge bonus, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 120, in S450, the sub CPU 71 executes a challenge success / failure lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the challenge success / failure lottery table, and based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag and the extracted random number, the challenge success / failure pattern No. Determine one of 1 to 3. When this process ends, the process moves to S451.

  In S451, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value according to the lottery result (challenge success / failure pattern No. 1 to 3) of S450 as the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. That is, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 1 to 3 are determined, challenge success / failure pattern flags “01H” to “03H” are set as internal flags corresponding to each. When this process ends, the process moves to S452.

  In S452, the sub CPU 71 executes a single game effect determination process. This single game effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S453.

  In S453, the sub CPU 71 executes the challenge effect determination process three times. The three-time challenge effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S454.

  In S454, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise effect determination process. The surprise presentation determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the challenge bonus determination process routine ends.

[One match game production decision processing]
FIG. 121 is a flow chart showing the single game effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The one game match effect determination process is a process for determining the content of the one game match game as the effect mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 121, in S460, the sub CPU 71 executes a single game combination lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the single match combination lottery table and determines a single match combination pattern as a production pattern based on the challenge success / failure pattern (value of challenge success / failure pattern flag) and the extracted random number. Do. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined single game combination pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S461.

  In S461, the sub CPU 71 executes rock-paper-scissors pattern lottery processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the rocking pattern selection table and determines the rocking pattern as the effect pattern on the basis of the number of the stored single match combination pattern stored in S460 and the extracted random number. . The sub CPU 71 stores the determined number of rock patterns in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is ended, the one-shot game effect determination processing routine is ended.

[3 times challenge production decision processing]
FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the three-time challenge effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The three-time challenge effect determination process is a process for determining the effect content of the three-time challenge as the effect mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 122, in S470, the sub CPU 71 executes the challenge lottery process three times. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the three-time challenge lottery table, and determines the three-time challenge pattern as the effect pattern based on the challenge success / failure pattern (value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag) and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined three-time challenge pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the three-time challenge effect determination process routine ends.

[Suprise production decision processing]
FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the surprise effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The surprise presentation determination process is a process for determining the presentation content of the surprise as the presentation mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 123, in S480, the sub CPU 71 executes a success notification round lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the success notification round lottery table and determines a success notification round based on the determined challenge success / failure pattern (value of challenge success / failure pattern flag) and the extracted random number. When this process ends, the process moves to S481.

  In S481, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting a value according to the lottery result of S480 as the success notification round flag. The success notification round flag is an internal flag indicating the determined challenge success round. In the success notification round flag, the values corresponding to the 3R to 8R eyes corresponding to the success notification round are “03H” to “08H”. When there is no success notification round, the value of the corresponding success notification round flag is “02H”. Set as If this process ends, the process moves to S482.

  In S482, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "3" as the value of the surprise effect counter. The surprise effect counter is a counter for counting the number corresponding to the third to eighth eyes in determining the third to eighth rendition patterns in the surprise as the effect mode. In the present embodiment, "3" is set as the initial value of the surprise effect counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S483.

  In S483, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise pattern lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 selects the surprise pattern lottery depending on whether the number of rounds corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter falls under the success notification round (whether or not it matches the value of the success notification round flag). One of the surprise patterns is determined as the effect pattern based on the round for executing the surprise pattern and the extracted random number with reference to any of the tables for the table. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined surprise pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round to be executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S484.

  In S484, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the surprise pattern of the success notification round has been determined. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the value of the surprise presentation counter matches the value of the success round flag. In the present embodiment, when the surprise pattern corresponding to the success notification round is determined, the lottery of the surprise pattern corresponding to the round after the success notification round is not performed, but the success notification round or later You may make it draw a surprise pattern corresponding to a round. If it is determined that the surprise pattern of the success notification round has been determined, the process proceeds to S487. On the other hand, when it is determined that the surprise pattern of the success notification round is not determined, the processing is shifted to S485.

  In S485, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the surprise effect counter is "8". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the surprise pattern has been determined for all the third to eighth rounds. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is "8", the process proceeds to S487. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is not "8", the process proceeds to S486.

  In S486, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of adding one to the value of the surprise effect counter. Thus, by repeating the process of S483, the surprise pattern in the third to eighth rounds is determined. Note that the surprise patterns may be determined collectively for the third to eighth rounds according to the hit pattern, without determining the surprise patterns for each 1R. When this process ends, the process moves to S483.

  In S487, the sub CPU 71 executes icon determination processing. This icon determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S488.

  In S488, the sub CPU 71 executes character band effect determination processing. The character band effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the surprise effect determination process routine ends.

[Icon decision processing]
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing icon determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This icon determination process is a process for determining the effect content using the icon displayed on the screen, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 124, in S490, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “8” to the value of the surprise effect counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets “8” to the value of the surprise presentation counter in order to draw a lottery whether to change the icon pattern from the icon indicating the eighth R. When this process ends, the process moves to S491.

  In S491, the sub CPU 71 executes an icon pattern lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the icon pattern lottery table corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter, and stores the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored based on the process of S483 in FIG. 123 and the extracted random number. And determine the finally changing icon pattern. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined icon pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S492.

  In S492, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the icon color to be displayed finally in the process of S491 is determined other than the white icon. If it is determined that any icon other than the white icon has been determined as the icon color to be displayed finally, the process proceeds to S493. On the other hand, if it is determined that the icon color other than the white icon is not determined as the icon color to be displayed finally, that is, it is determined that the white icon has been determined, the process proceeds to S497.

  In S493, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "4" to the value of the icon counter. The icon counter is a counter for counting the number corresponding to the 4R-th to the xR-th in determining the icon pattern from the 4R-th to the xR-th determined to finally display other than the white icon. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 executes an icon pattern (icon display color from the 4R-th to the xR-th eyes determined to finally display other than the white icon with respect to the icon finally changing other than the white icon according to the lottery result of S491. In order to determine the change aspect of), "4" is set as the initial value to the value of the icon counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S494.

  In S494, the sub CPU 71 executes an icon change lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the icon change lottery table corresponding to the round corresponding to the value of the icon counter, and based on the icon pattern (for example, “red icon”) which finally changes and the extracted random number. To determine the icon pattern after change. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined icon pattern number after change in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the changing round. If this process ends, the process moves to S495.

  In S495, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the icon counter matches the value of the surprise effect counter. If it is determined that the value of the icon counter matches the value of the surprise presentation counter, the process proceeds to S497. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the icon counter does not match the value of the surprise presentation counter, the process proceeds to S496.

  In S 496, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of adding one to the value of the icon counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S494. Thereby, it is possible to determine the change mode (icon pattern) of the icon display color until the corresponding icon disappears according to the execution of the round.

  In S497, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the surprise effect counter is "4". In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the icon pattern corresponding to the fourth R is determined. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the change pattern of the icon pattern has been determined for all the rounds in which the icon pattern may change. In this process, when it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is “4”, the icon determination process routine is ended. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is not "4", the process proceeds to S498.

  In S498, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for subtracting one from the value of the surprise effect counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S491.

[Character strip effect determination processing]
FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing character band effect determination processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The character band effect determination process is a process for determining the contents of the effect using the character band displayed on the screen, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 125, in S500, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "3" to the value of the surprise effect counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets “3” to the value of the surprise effect counter in order to display a character band (character message) from the third R. If this process ends, the process moves to S501.

  In S501, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether a round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter corresponds to a success notification round. If it is determined that the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter corresponds to the success notification round, the process proceeds to S502. If it is determined that the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter does not correspond to the success notification round, the process proceeds to S503.

  In S502, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise success character string lottery process. In this processing, the sub CPU 71 refers to the surprise success character string lottery table, and based on the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored in the surprise pattern lottery processing of S483, and the extracted random number, as a presentation pattern Determine the letter band pattern of The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character band pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round for displaying. When this process ends, the process moves to S503.

  In S503, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the target round this time is the surprise pattern "none", that is, the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored in the surprise pattern lottery process in S483 is "none" (see FIG. A process is performed to determine whether or not it corresponds to No. 1) of the surprise pattern defined in the table for twenty-three surprise patterns. If it is determined that the surprise pattern is "none", the process moves to S505. If it is determined that the surprise pattern is not "none", the process moves to S504.

  In S504, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise failure character string lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 corresponds to the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter, and the surprise failure character band lottery table corresponding to the determination result (surprise pattern number) stored in the surprise pattern lottery process of S483. The character band pattern as the effect pattern is determined based on the value (round) of the surprise effect counter and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character band pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round for displaying. When this process ends, the process moves to S512.

  In S505, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise gasse character band lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 associates the determination result (number of icon pattern) stored in the icon change lottery process of S494 with the icon display color in association with the next round of the round corresponding to the value of the surprise effect counter. If it indicates a change, the table for the surprise gasse character band lottery corresponding to the changed icon color is referenced, and if it does not change, the table for the surprise gasse character band lottery related to the white icon is referred to. When the character band of the eighth R is determined, 9R is regarded as a white icon and the character band is determined. The character string pattern as the effect pattern is determined based on the value (round) of the surprise effect counter and the extracted random number with reference to the corresponding surprise gas character band lottery table. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character band pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round for displaying. If this process ends, the process moves to S506.

  In S506, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the Gasse character band has been won. If the number of the character band pattern determined in the surprise Gase character band lottery process of S505 is "No. 1 to 10", it will be won for the Gase character band. If it is determined that the gasse character band has been won, the process proceeds to S507. If it is determined that the character has not been won, the process proceeds to S512.

  In S507, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set “1” to the value of the subsequent character band counter. The subsequent character band counter is a counter for counting the number corresponding to the display frequency of the character band to be displayed after the display of the character string. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets “1” to the value of the subsequent character band counter in order to determine the first character band after displaying the character string. When this process ends, the process moves to S508.

  In S508, the sub CPU 71 executes a subsequent character band lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the surprise gasse subsequent character string lottery table, and determines a character pattern as the effect pattern based on the value (round) of the surprise effect counter and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined character band pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the round for displaying. When this process ends, the process moves to S509.

  In S509, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the previous and current character bands are the same. That is, the sub CPU 71 has the same determination result (character band pattern number) stored for the current round, and the same determination result (character band pattern number) stored for the previous round. If there is, it is determined that the previous and current character bands are the same. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the previous and current character bands are the same, the sub CPU 71 discards the determination result stored corresponding to the current round, and determines the character band pattern again. , S508, and executes the subsequent character band lottery process again. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the previous and current character bands are not the same, the process proceeds to S510. In addition, even if the previous and current character bands are the same, the subsequent character band lottery process may not be executed again.

  In S510, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the subsequent character band counter is "6". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether six subsequent character bands have been determined. If it is determined that the value of the subsequent character band counter is "6", the process proceeds to S512. If it is determined that the value of the subsequent character band counter is not "6", the process proceeds to S511. In addition, about a following character band, you may make it determine 5 or less or 7 or more.

  In S511, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of adding 1 to the value of the subsequent character band counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S508.

  In S512, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the surprise effect counter is "8". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the third to eighth character band patterns have been determined. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is "8", the character band effect determining process routine is ended. If it is determined that the value of the surprise effect counter is not "8", the process proceeds to S513.

  In S513, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding one to the value of the surprise effect counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S501. The character band pattern corresponding to the round after the success notification round is not determined by such a series of processes, but may be determined. For example, if the hold information includes information indicating a big hit, the rounds after the success notification round are also determined in association with the character band pattern, and the hold information includes information indicating a big hit. If not, the character band pattern may not be determined for the rounds after the success notification round.

[Add bonus setting process]
FIG. 126 is a flow chart showing an additional bonus determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The additional bonus determining process is a process for determining the content of the additional bonus as the effect mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 126, in S520, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus holding sequence determination process. This additional bonus hold combination determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S521.

  In S521, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus scenario type determination process. This additional bonus scenario type determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S522.

  In S522, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus initial process. This additional bonus initial process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S523.

  In S523, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus effect determination process. This additional bonus effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S524.

  In S524, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus end screen determination process. The additional bonus end screen determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the additional bonus determining process routine ends.

[Add bonus hold pending decision processing]
FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the additional bonus holding sequence determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The additional bonus holding sequence determination process is for determining whether or not to provide an indication indicating whether the information indicating the big hit is included in the holding information relating to the second special symbol during the additional bonus. It is a process, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 127, in S530, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding one to the value of the hold information counter. The hold information counter is a counter for indicating an area number corresponding to the storage area of the work RAM 73 in which the hold information of the second special symbol is stored. When this process ends, the process moves to S531. The hold information corresponds to the start storage stored in the main RAM 63, and up to four pieces are stored, and the value (area number) of the hold information counter increases in accordance with the storage order of the hold information. Further, each time a start winning command is received, information indicating a hit determination random number included in the start win command and information indicating a hit symbol determination random number are stored as hold information. The hold information corresponding to the first special symbol and the hold information corresponding to the second special symbol are individually stored in predetermined areas respectively prepared in the work RAM 73. Such hold information is erased from the storage area according to the type of the special symbol included in the fluctuation pattern designation command each time the fluctuation pattern designation command is received, but the hold information is erased based on other commands. It may be done.

  In S531, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether there is hold information in the storage area corresponding to the value of the hold information counter. In this process, when it is determined that there is hold information, the process proceeds to S532. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hold information, the process proceeds to S535. In this process, when the value of the hold information counter is "5", it is determined that there is no hold information.

  In S532, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the hold information includes information indicating winning (big hit or small hit). Specifically, in this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the information indicating the hit determination random number included in the hold information is information indicating a win in the probability variation gaming state. If it is determined that the information indicating the winning is included, the process proceeds to S532. If it is determined that the information indicating the winning is not included, the process proceeds to S530. In this process, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the information indicating the winning is included, the sub CPU 71 determines the type of the winning symbol based on the information indicating the random number for determining the winning symbol.

  In S533, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus on-hold consecutive lottery process. In this process, the sub-CPU 71 refers to the additional bonus on-hold consecutive lottery table and determines either non-winning or winning based on the winning symbol and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the number corresponding to the determined non-winning or winning in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S534.

  In S534, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the result of the additional bonus on-hold lottery process of S533 is a winning. If it is determined that the result of the bonus bonus holding continuous lottery process is winning, the process proceeds to S535. If it is determined that the result of the bonus bonus holding continuous lottery process is not winning, the process proceeds to S530. In this process, if it is determined that the bonus is won, the sub CPU 71 sets data corresponding to the special BGM in order to make the BGM outputted at the bonus on bonus different from the normal bonus on bonus. The timing at which this special BGM is output may be any timing during the additional bonus. In addition, even after it is determined in the process of S534 that the winning is performed, the processes after S532 may be performed on the remaining suspension information. At this time, when winning in the processing of S534, data for outputting BGM different from the special BGM may be set.

  In S535, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set “0” to the value of the hold information counter. When this process is ended, the additional bonus hold combination decision processing routine is ended.

[Add bonus scenario type determination process]
FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus scenario type determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The additional bonus scenario type determination process is a process for determining an additional bonus scenario, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 128, in S540, the sub CPU 71 executes a scenario group lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the scenario group lottery table and determines scenario groups A to D based on the hit pattern (the value of the hit effect pattern flag) and the extracted random number. When this process ends, the process moves to S541.

  In S541, the sub CPU 71 executes a scenario type lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the scenario type lottery table corresponding to the hit pattern (the value of the hit effect pattern flag), and based on the scenario group determined in S540 and the extracted random number, decide. When this process ends, the process moves to S542.

  In S542, the sub CPU 71 executes a scenario number lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the scenario number lottery table corresponding to the scenario type determined in S541, and determines the scenario number based on the scenario type and the extracted random number. If this process ends, the process moves to S543.

  In S543, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a value corresponding to the determined scenario number to the scenario number flag. Specifically, for example, when the determined scenario type and scenario number are “Aa” and “No. 1 to 65”, the sub CPU 71 sets “01H” to “41H” in the scenario number flag. Similarly, “42H” to “68H” are set for “Ab” and “No. 1 to 39”, and “69H” to “6FH” are set for “Ac” and “No. 1 to 7”. , "Ba" and "No. 1 to 64" set "70H" to "AFH", "Bb" and "No. 1 to 23" set "B0H" to "C7H", " Set "C8H" to "CBH" for Bc "and" No. 1 to 4 ", set" CCH "to" D6H "for" Ca "and" No. 1 to 11 ", and" Cb " And in "No. 1-4", "D7H"-"DAH" are set, and in "Da" and "No. 1-6", "DBH"-"E0H" are set. When this process ends, the process moves to S544.

  In S544, the sub CPU 71 executes combo RUSH lottery processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines that “Combo RUSH” (effect type G) is defined in the scenario corresponding to the value of the scenario number flag (content of effects in the substantial round of the addition bonus) in the additional bonus scenario table. The number of required operations is determined by drawing to request a button operation at the time of the production of the “combo RUSH”. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 refers to the combo RUSH lottery table and determines the operation count pattern based on the value (number of additions) to be added according to “combo RUSH” and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of operation number patterns in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73 as a determination result. When this process is ended, the bonus bonus scenario type determination processing routine is ended.

[Add bonus initial process]
FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus initial process executed by the sub CPU 71. This additional bonus initial process is a process for determining the initial effect contents of the additional bonus, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 129, in S550, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus roulette lottery process. The additional bonus roulette lottery process is a process for determining an initial value of the additional number to be given to the first R of the additional bonus. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the roulette lottery table, and extracts an initial value to be added as the number of additions in the first R of the scenario (content of effects in the substantial round of the bonus bonus) corresponding to the value of the scenario number flag The initial value pattern is determined based on the selected random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined initial value pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S551. The initial value pattern may be determined without using a table or random numbers.

  In S551, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus roulette pattern lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the roulette pattern lottery table, and based on the number of the initial value pattern stored in the S500 bonus roulette lottery process and the extracted random number, the roulette pattern as the effect pattern is referred to. decide. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined roulette pattern number in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. If this process ends, the process moves to S552.

  In S552, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus title determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the title determination lottery table and determines a title pattern as an effect pattern based on the hit pattern (the value of the hit effect pattern flag) and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined title pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process is completed, the additional bonus initial process routine is ended.

[Add bonus production decision processing]
FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus effect determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The additional bonus effect determining process is a process for determining the effect content of the additional bonus effect, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 130, in S560, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “1” to the value of the character type determination counter. The character type determination counter is a counter for counting up to a value corresponding to the upper limit number of the substantial round corresponding to the jackpot gaming state executed to determine the type of the character. When this process ends, the process moves to S561.

  In S561, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect lottery determination process. In this process, a character presentation pattern of each round is determined. The effect lottery determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S562.

  In S562, the sub CPU 71 executes a chance-up lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 refers to the chance-up lottery table, and based on the number of the character effect pattern determined in the effect lottery determination process of S561 and the extracted random number, the sub CPU 71 executes the chance-up pattern as the effect pattern. decide. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined chance increase pattern in the predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target actual round. If this process ends, the process moves to S563. In the process of S 562, for the character effect pattern corresponding to effect types A, B, G, I, M, N other than effect types C to F, H, J to L, a chance increase pattern is not determined. Although a character increase pattern may be determined in the processing of S 562 also for the character effect pattern corresponding to these effect types.

  In S563, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the character type determination counter is a value corresponding to a substantially upper limit round (a round corresponding to the substantially upper limit of the substantially round). That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect contents in all the substantial rounds in the bonus bonus have been determined. If it is determined that the value of the character type determination counter is a value corresponding to the substantially upper limit round, this additional bonus effect determination processing routine is ended. If it is determined that the value of the character type determination counter is not a value corresponding to the substantially upper limit round, the process proceeds to S564.

  In S564, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding one to the value of the character type determination counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S561.

[Production lottery determination process]
FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing an effect lottery determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect lottery determination process is a process for determining a character effect pattern according to the effect type, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 131, in S570, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the effect type of the substantial round to be targeted this time is "C" or "H". The effect type is determined based on the value of the scenario number flag (scenario number), the bonus bonus scenario table, and the value of the character type determination counter (substantial round targeted for the current time). The effect type is similarly determined in the following steps. If it is determined that the effect type of the target actual round this time is "C" or "H", the process proceeds to S571. If it is determined that the effect type of the target actual round this time is not "C" or "H", the process proceeds to S572.

  In S571, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (effect type C or H), and based on the effect type (C or H) and the extracted random number, the character effect corresponding to the current round of the target Determine the pattern. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined number of the character effect pattern in the predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target actual round. When this process ends, the effect lottery determination process routine ends.

  In S572, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the effect type of the substantial round to be targeted this time is "D" or "J". If it is determined that the effect type of the target actual round this time is "D" or "J", the process proceeds to S573. If it is determined that the effect type of the target actual round this time is not "D" and "J", the process proceeds to S578.

  In S573, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the upper limit (in the present embodiment, “1500” corresponding to the total number) of the total winning balls has been reached. This determination is defined in the current target real round based on the value of the scenario number flag (scenario number), the bonus bonus scenario table, and the value of the character type determination counter (actual target round this time). It is carried out by determining whether or not the total prize ball number is "1500". If it is determined that the upper limit value of the total number of winning balls has been reached, the process proceeds to S574. If it is determined that the upper limit value of the total number of winning balls has not been reached, the process proceeds to S575.

  In S574, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + upper limit reached), and targets this time based on the added number (addition value) corresponding to the “character” and the extracted random number. The character presentation pattern corresponding to the substantial round of is determined. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined number of the character effect pattern in the predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target actual round. When this process ends, the effect lottery determination process routine ends.

  In S575, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the effect type of the next actual round to be targeted is “F”. If it is determined that the effect type of the next actual round of the target is "F", the process proceeds to S576. If it is determined that the effect type of the target actual round this time is not "F", the process proceeds to S577.

  In S576, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (effect type D or J + effect type F for the next round), and based on the added number (addition value) corresponding to the “character” and the extracted random number. The character presentation pattern corresponding to the target actual round is determined. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined number of the character effect pattern in the predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target actual round. When this process ends, the effect lottery determination process routine ends.

  In S577, the sub CPU 71 refers to the character type lottery table (except for the effect type D or J + the effect type F for the next round), and based on the added number (addition value) corresponding to the "character" and the extracted random number. The character effect pattern corresponding to the target actual round is determined. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined number of the character effect pattern in the predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target actual round. When this process ends, the effect lottery determination process routine ends.

  In S578, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the effect type of the target actual round to be targeted this time is any of “E”, “F”, “K”, and “L”. If it is determined that the effect type of the target actual round is "E", "F", "K", or "L", the process proceeds to S579. If it is determined that the effect type of the target actual round is not "E", "F", "K", or "L", the process proceeds to S580.

  In S579, the sub CPU 71 selects a character type lottery table (effect type E or F or K or L + additional value due to the appearance of the character based on the added number (addition value) corresponding to the “character” in the actual target round this time. With reference to any one of (.about. + 200), the character presentation pattern of the current round target is determined based on the added number (addition value) corresponding to “combo” and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined number of the character effect pattern in the predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target actual round. When this process ends, the effect lottery determination process routine ends.

  In S 580, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the effect type of the substantial round to be targeted this time is “A” or “I”. If it is determined that the effect type of the target actual round this time is "A" or "I", the process proceeds to S581. If it is determined that the effect type of the target actual round of the current round is not "A" or "I", this effect lottery determination processing routine is ended.

  In S581, the sub CPU 71 refers to the cow character return lottery table and determines the cow character return pattern in the current round of the target based on the effect type (A or I) and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the determined number of the bull character resurrection pattern in the predetermined area of the work RAM 73 in association with the current target actual round.

[Add bonus end screen determination process]
FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus end screen determination process executed by the sub CPU 71. The additional bonus end screen determination process is a process for determining the content of the additional bonus end screen, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 132, in S590, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus end screen lottery process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an end display pattern to be displayed at the end of the last substantial round in the bonus. The sub CPU 71 refers to the additional bonus end screen lottery table and determines the end display pattern based on the hit pattern (the value of the hit effect pattern flag) and the extracted random number. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined end display pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S591. The end display pattern may be determined without using a table or random numbers. Further, in the present embodiment, the end display pattern is determined at the start of the big hit gaming state regardless of the number of winning balls in the big hit gaming state (the number of winning balls). The end display pattern may be determined according to the number of winning balls counted during the jackpot gaming state.

  In S591, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus title determination process. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a title pattern to be displayed in the hit end interval in the bonus bonus. The sub CPU 71 refers to the title determination lottery table, and based on a value obtained by adding a value corresponding to the total number specified in the bonus bonus scenario table to the current value of the accumulated payout balls counter, Determine the title pattern as a presentation pattern. The sub CPU 71 stores the number of the determined title pattern in a predetermined area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the additional bonus end screen determination process routine ends. In this embodiment, the title pattern is determined at the start of the big hit gaming state regardless of the number of winning balls (number of winning balls) in the big hit gaming state, but the big hit is determined at the end of the big hit gaming state. The title pattern may be determined in accordance with the number of winning balls counted during the gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, all the actual number of rounds executed in the big hit gaming state × the upper limit number of winnings per round (“10” in the present embodiment) × the number of winning balls per winning (in the present embodiment) Although the title pattern is determined based on “10”) and the contents defined in the title pattern are displayed only at the end of the bonus bonus, for example, the substance executed in the jackpot gaming state in the bonus bonus The title pattern may be determined based on the number of rounds × the upper limit number of winnings per round × the number of winning balls per winning, and the contents defined by the title pattern may be displayed when the bonus bonus ends. Also, the title pattern may be determined by adding the number of winnings in the small hit gaming state or the number of winnings in the round that does not correspond to the actual round.

[Perform start presentation processing]
FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit start effect processing is processing for determining the contents of effects in the start stage of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 133, in S600, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether it is the start time of the additional bonus. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH” and it is the start time of the additional bonus, the process proceeds to S601. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “04H” to “0BH” and it is not the start time of the additional bonus, the process proceeds to S607.

  In S601, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as the value of the payout prize ball counter. The payout prize ball counter is a counter for counting the number of payout prize balls displayed on a blue meter display unit 900 (see FIG. 182 and the like) described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S602.

  In S602, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "0" as the value of the total prize ball counter. The total award ball counter is as described above, and is a counter for counting the number of total award balls displayed on a red meter display unit 910 (see FIG. 182 and the like) described later. When this process ends, the process moves to S603.

  In S603, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for displaying a title pattern corresponding to the number stored in the bonus bonus title determination process (S552 in FIG. 129). Based on the effect data relating to this title pattern, at the start of the additional bonus, the contents defined by the title pattern of the table for lottery for determining a title are displayed. When the display is performed by the effect data relating to the title pattern, the effect is also performed by a sound, a lamp or the like. If this process ends, the process moves to S604.

  In S604, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 3 seconds is set. When this process ends, the process moves to S605. This value corresponds to a time shorter than the release waiting time (3996 ms) which is the sum of the time for the start bonus time (996 ms) of the additional bonus and the time (102 ms + 2898 ms) for the long open start in the additional bonus. The value set in the validity period timer may correspond to a time longer than the open waiting time.

  In S605, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether or not the player has won in the bonus bonus holding lottery process of S533 of FIG. Specifically, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a number corresponding to “winning” is stored in the information stored in the work RAM 73 as a result of the additional bonus on-hold lottery process. If it is determined that the bonus bonus holding combination lottery process is won, the process proceeds to S606. If it is determined that the bonus bonus holding combination lottery process has not been won, the hit start effect processing routine is ended.

  In S606, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting data corresponding to the special BGM. Thus, at the start of the extra bonus, a special BGM different from normal is output. When this process ends, the hit start effect processing routine ends. Note that the timing at which the special BGM is output is not limited to the start of the extra bonus, but may be any timing during the big hit gaming state.

  In S607, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting hit start effect data corresponding to the other hit start effects. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for executing an effect up to the opening of the first big winning opening in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In this process, different effect data is set according to the type of effect mode such as super big bonus, challenge bonus, and V challenge. When this process ends, the hit start effect processing routine ends.

[Prize ball counter addition processing]
FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing a prize ball counter addition process executed by the sub CPU 71. The prize ball counter addition process is a process for adding values of various kinds of prize ball counters, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 134, in S610, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0". The remaining prize ball counter is a counter for counting the number of remaining balls in each round. The number of remaining prize balls is basically the upper limit number of balls per round ("100" in the present embodiment), and the predetermined number of winning balls ("10" in the present embodiment) for each winning of the large winning opening. It is a number obtained by subtracting). If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0", this prize ball counter addition processing routine is ended. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S611.

  In S611, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of subtracting 10 from the value of the remaining prize ball counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S612.

  In S612, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 10 to the value of the accumulated payout ball counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S613.

  In S613, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the bonus bonus is being performed based on the value of the effect pattern flag. If it is determined that the bonus is being added, the process proceeds to S614. If it is determined that the additional bonus is not being performed, this winning ball counter addition processing routine is ended.

  In S614, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding 10 to the value of the payout prize ball counter. When this process is ended, the winning ball counter addition processing routine is ended.

[V prize notification process]
FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process performed by the sub CPU 71. The V winning notification process is a process for giving a notification of V winning, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 135, in S620, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting V winning notification data. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets V prize notification data for notifying that the game is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state when the V winning is detected by the game ball passing through the specific area 38A. Do. As a result, in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image according to the V winning is displayed, and predetermined sound generation and light emission are performed using the speakers 10a to 10c and the lamp / LED 27. . When this process ends, the process moves to S621. When the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "0CH", that is, in the big hit gaming state of the bump V, a special effect image, for example, an image showing a ball of "V" is displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4. Then, an effect image corresponding to the V winning is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect image corresponding to the V prize is continuously displayed until the start of the hit end interval, but the display may be ended at a predetermined timing in the big hit gaming state It may be displayed continuously even if the big hit gaming state is over.

  In S621, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the V prize notification flag. The V prize notification flag is an internal flag indicating whether or not notification of V prize has been made. When V prize notification is performed, "01H" is set as the value of V prize notification flag, and when V prize notification is not performed, "00H" is set as the value of V prize notification flag. Ru. If this process ends, the process moves to S 622.

  In S 622, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the warning notification timer. The warning notification timer is a timer for measuring the time to start the warning notification for prompting V winning. If this process ends, the process moves to S623.

  In S623, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the warning flag is "01H". The warning flag is an internal flag that indicates whether warning notification of V winning is in progress. When warning notification of V winning is being performed, the value of the warning flag is “01H”, and when warning notification of V winning is not being performed, the value of the warning flag is “00H”. If it is determined that the value of the warning flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S624. If it is determined that the value of the warning flag is not "01H", the V prize notification processing routine is ended.

  In S624, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the warning flag. Thereby, the warning notification of the V prize winning is ended. When this process is ended, the V winning notification process routine is ended.

[Inter-round production process]
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the inter-round effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The round-to-round effect process is a process for determining the effect contents between the target rounds, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 136, in S630, the sub CPU 71 executes super big bonus inter-round effect processing. This super big bonus round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S631.

  In S631, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-challenge bonus round presentation process. This challenge bonus round presentation process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S632.

  In S632, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus round effect process. The additional bonus round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S633.

  In S633, the sub CPU 71 executes an inter-round process. This inter-round process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the inter-round effect processing routine ends.

[Super big bonus round production process]
FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the inter-super big bonus round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The super big bonus inter-round effect process is a process for determining an inter-round effect content in the super big bonus, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 137, in S640, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the super big bonus is being executed. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "01H" and the super big bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S641. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "01H" and the super big bonus is not being executed, the inter-super big bonus round effect processing routine is ended.

  In S641, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting inter-round presentation data relating to the super big bonus according to the value of the round counter. When this process is ended, the inter-super big bonus round effect processing routine is ended.

[Challenge bonus round production process]
FIG. 138 is a flowchart of the challenge bonus inter-round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The challenge bonus inter-round effect process is a process for determining the contents of the inter-round effect in the challenge bonus, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in S650, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge bonus is being executed. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H" and the challenge bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S651. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "02H" or "03H" and that the challenge bonus is not being executed, the challenge bonus inter-round effect processing routine is ended.

  In S651, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "2". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the inter-round interval after the end of the second R is in progress. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “2”, the process proceeds to S652. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "2," the process proceeds to S653.

  In S652, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the valid period timer. Here, by setting the value of the validity period timer to "0", the value of the challenge bonus type flag is determined. When this process is ended, the challenge bonus round inter-interaction processing routine is ended.

  In S653, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "01H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a single game is under execution. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S654. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "01H", the process proceeds to S655.

  In S654, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process between single game rounds. This one game match round production process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is ended, the challenge bonus round inter-interaction processing routine is ended.

  In S655, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "02H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether three challenges are being executed. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "02H", the process proceeds to S656. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "02H", the process proceeds to S657.

  In S656, the sub CPU 71 executes effect processing for three times between challenge rounds. The three-time challenge round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is ended, the challenge bonus round inter-interaction processing routine is ended.

  In S657, the sub CPU 71 executes inter-surprise round effect processing. This surprise round presentation process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is ended, the challenge bonus round inter-interaction processing routine is ended.

[One-man match round production process]
FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing inter single match round rendering processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This single match round-to-round presentation process is a process for determining the contents of the round-to-round presentation in a single round match, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 139, in S660, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "9". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "9", the process proceeds to S662. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "9", the process proceeds to S661.

  In S661, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "10". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "10", the process proceeds to S662. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "10", the one-on-one round inter-round effect processing routine is ended.

  In S662, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the validity period timer is "0". If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S664. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S663.

  In S663, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control processing after the button operation according to the set effect data. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control for executing effects after the button operation included in the contents of the effect data, based on the effect data set to perform effects in round execution. This process is executed when the 9th R or 10R ends before the valid period of the button operation becomes 0.

  In S664, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "11" or more. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "11" or more, the process proceeds to S665. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is less than "11", the one-on-one round inter-round effect processing routine is ended.

  In S665, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets data for executing an effect indicating transition or non-transition to the ST mode. At the end of this process, the single match round-to-round effect processing routine is ended. In rounds other than the 11th and 12th eyes in one match, effects are performed based on the effect data set in the effect processing during the single match in FIG. 147 described later, but the 11th and 12th eyes Between rounds of one round, rounds may be performed based on the effect data set in the round during one round, and even between rounds other than the 11th and 12th rounds, one round between rounds The effect may be executed based on the effect data set in the effect process.

[Three round challenge round production process]
FIG. 140 is a flow chart showing effect processing between the three challenge rounds executed by the sub CPU 71. This three-challenge-round presentation process is a process for determining the presentation contents between the rounds in the three-challenge, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 140, in S670, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter corresponds to any of “4”, “6”, “8”, and “10”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to any of “4”, “6”, “8”, and “10”, the process proceeds to S671. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to "4", "6", "8", or "10", the process proceeds to S673.

  In S671, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the validity period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S672. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not “0”, the process proceeds to S673.

  In S672, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control processing after the button operation according to the set effect data. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control for executing effects after the button operation included in the contents of the effect data, based on the effect data set to perform effects in round execution. This process is executed when the fourth, sixth, eighth, or tenth R is finished before the effective period of the button operation becomes zero. When this process ends, the process moves to S673.

  In S673, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, for example, effect data for displaying speech is set during an interval started to the next round of the 3rd, 5th, and 7th eyes. In addition, in the 3rd challenge, the inter-round effect is executed based on the effect data set in this process during the interval from the 3rd R to the 12Rth next round, but the 3 times of FIG. 148 described later Inter-round presentation may be performed based on the presentation data set in the presentation process during the challenge round. When this process ends, the three-round challenge round effect processing routine ends.

[Surprise round production process]
FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing inter-surprise round effect processing that is executed by the sub CPU 71. This inter-surprise round presentation process is a process for determining the contents of the inter-round presentation in the surprise, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 141, in S680, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the valid period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S681. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not "0", the process moves to S672.

  In S681, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control processing after the button operation according to the set effect data. In this process, the sub CPU 71 performs effect control for executing effects after the button operation included in the contents of the effect data, based on the effect data set to perform effects in round execution. This process is executed when the third to eighth or tenth R ends before the valid period of the button operation becomes zero. If this process ends, the process moves to S682.

  In S682, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. When this process ends, the inter-surprise round effect processing routine ends.

[Interaction process between bonus bonus rounds]
FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing an additional bonus round effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The additional bonus inter-round presentation processing is processing for determining the contents of the inter-round presentation in the additional bonus, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 142, in S690, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the additional bonus is being executed. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH” and the additional bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S691. When it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “04H” to “0BH” and that the additional bonus is not being executed, the additional bonus round inter-effect processing routine is ended.

  In S691, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the validity period timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S694. If it is determined that the value of the valid period timer is not "0", the process moves to S692.

  In S692, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter corresponds to the round for executing the addition effect. If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to the round for executing the additive effect, the process proceeds to S693. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to the round for executing the additive effect, the process proceeds to S694.

  In S693, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the valid period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S696.

  In S694, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S698. If it is determined that the value of the addition effect execution timer is not "0", the process proceeds to S695.

  In S695, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "0" to the value of the addition effect execution timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S696.

  In S696, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding a predetermined value to the total prize ball counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 adds the number of additions indicated by "character", "combo" and "RUSH" based on the effect type specified in the scenario table to the total prize ball counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S697.

  In S697, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting addition effect data for adding a numerical value corresponding to the number of payout prize balls displayed on a blue meter display unit 900 (see FIG. 182 and the like) described later. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets addition effect data for adding and displaying the numerical value of the payout award ball number separately from the effect such as the character appearance. When this process ends, the process moves to SS 698. In this process, effect data may be set to execute effects relating to the appearance of the character scheduled to be executed.

  In S698, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S700. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S699.

  In S699, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding the value of the remaining ball counter to the payout ball counter. That is, at the end of one round (the actual round), even if the upper limit winning number per round is not reached without reaching the upper limit winning number in the one round, the payout winning ball number is the remaining winning number It is processed as the number which added If this process ends, the process moves to S700.

  In S700, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting inter-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the inter-addition bonus round effect processing routine is ended.

[Inter-round processing]
FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing inter-round processing performed by the sub CPU 71. This inter-round process is a process for determining the content of the effect between the other rounds, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 143, in S710, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0", this inter-round processing routine is ended. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S711.

  In S711, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the accumulated payout prize ball counter. That is, even when the upper limit winning number per round is not reached at the end of one round (actual round), the cumulative payout number is the remaining winning number, even if the upper limit winning number per round is not reached. It is processed as the number added number. If this process ends, the process moves to S712.

  In S712, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the remaining prize ball counter. When this process ends, the inter-round processing routine ends.

[In-round production process]
FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing in-round presentation processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The in-round presentation process is a process for determining presentation contents for each round, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 144, in S720, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of adding one to the value of the round counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S721.

  In S721, the sub CPU 71 executes effect processing during the super big bonus round. The super big bonus round internal effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S722.

  In S722, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during the challenge bonus round. This challenge bonus round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S723.

  In S723, the sub CPU 71 executes effect processing during the bonus bonus round. This additional bonus round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S724.

  In S724, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect processing during V challenge. The V-challenge in-progress process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S725.

  In S725, the sub CPU 71 executes a process during a round. The processing during this round will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the in-round effect processing routine ends.

[Super big bonus round production process]
FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing effect processing during the super big bonus round executed by the sub CPU 71. The super big bonus round internal effect process is a process for determining the effect content during the round in the super big bonus, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 145, in S730, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the super big bonus is being executed. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H” and the super big bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S731. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "01H" and the super big bonus is not being executed, the super big bonus in-round effect processing routine is ended.

  In S731, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "11." That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the 11th round having the possibility of the V winning is being executed by opening the second large winning opening 37. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "11", the process proceeds to S732. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "11", the process proceeds to S734. In the present embodiment, the warning display of the V winning is not performed in the 1R eye, and only in the 11R eye is possible. Therefore, in the process of S731, whether or not it is the 11R eye is determined. When the warning display of V winning is performed not only in the first R but also in the first R, it may be determined whether the value of the round counter is "1" or "11".

  In S732, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the V winning notification flag is "00H". If it is determined that the value of the V prize notification flag is "00H", the process proceeds to S733. If it is determined that the value of the V prize notification flag is not "00H" but "01H" and the notification of the V prize has already been made, the process proceeds to S734.

  In S733, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the warning notification timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 13000 ms is set as the predetermined value. The value set in the warning notification timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds after the start of the long opening (the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern) of the specific area 38A. If this process ends, the process moves to S734. In the present embodiment, the predetermined value is set in the warning notification timer with the opening of the specific area 38A as a start reference, but the predetermined value is a start with the opening of the second big winning opening 37 provided with the specific area 38A. May be set. For example, the warning notification of the V winning may be performed 10 seconds after the start of the opening of the second big winning opening 37.

  In S734, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting in-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. When this process is completed, the inter-addition bonus round effect processing routine is ended.

[Challenge bonus round production process]
FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing effect processing in a challenge bonus round executed by the sub CPU 71. The during-challenge bonus round presentation process is a process for determining presentation contents during the round in the challenge bonus, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 146, in S740, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “02H” or “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge bonus is being executed. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H" and the challenge bonus is being executed, the process proceeds to S741. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "02H" or "03H" and that the challenge bonus is not being executed, the challenge bonus round in-progress processing routine is ended.

  In S741, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "1". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "1", the process proceeds to S742. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "1", the process moves to S745.

  In S742, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting presentation data for selecting a challenge bonus. That is, in order to display a selection image for selecting the type of challenge bonus (one game, three times challenge, surprise) from the first R to the second R, effect data corresponding to the selected image is set. With this effect data, effects from the start of the first R eye to the end of the second R eye are executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S743.

  In S743, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “01H” as an initial value to the value of the challenge bonus type flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S744.

  In S744, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets, for example, a value corresponding to 30 s to the valid period timer. This value exceeds the duration of the 1st to 2nd eyes such as the opening time of the 1st eye (0.102s) plus the time between the round intervals after the 1st round (1.200s) + 2nd r the open time (27.222s) Since the value becomes a value, the value of the valid period timer does not become "0" from the start of the first R to the end of the second R. Therefore, selection by button operation is enabled between the 1st and 2nd eyes. When this process is completed, the in-challenge bonus round presentation process routine is ended. Note that the predetermined value set in the validity period timer may be a value corresponding to a time less than the duration time of the 1st to 2nd eyes. In addition, the type of challenge bonus may be automatically switched and displayed each time a predetermined time elapses, and the type of challenge bonus being displayed may be determined according to the button operation.

  In S745, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a single game match as the type of challenge bonus. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S746. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "01H", the process proceeds to S747.

  In S746, the sub CPU 71 executes an effect process during a single game match round. The one-on-one game round effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S751.

  In S747, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "02H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the challenge bonus is three times as a type of challenge bonus. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "02H", the process proceeds to S748. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "02H", the process proceeds to S749.

  In S748, the sub CPU 71 executes effect processing during the third challenge round. The three-time challenge round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S751.

  In S749, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the challenge bonus type flag is “03H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the type of challenge bonus is surprise or not. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "03H", the process proceeds to S750. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "03H", the process proceeds to S751.

  In S750, the sub CPU 71 executes a surprise round effect process. The surprise round effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S751.

  In S751, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H". If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H", the process proceeds to S752. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "02H", the challenge bonus round in-progress processing routine is ended.

  In S752, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is “11”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "11", the process proceeds to S753. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "11", the in-challenge bonus round effect processing routine is ended.

  In S753, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the warning notification timer. Also in this process, for example, a value corresponding to 13000 ms is set as a predetermined value. The value set in the warning notification timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds after the start of the long opening (the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern) of the specific area 38A. When this process is completed, the in-challenge bonus round presentation process routine is ended.

[One-man game round production process]
FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing an effect process during a single game round performed by the sub CPU 71. This single match match round effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the round in one match match, and is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 147, in S760, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is “3”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "3", the process proceeds to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not “3”, the process proceeds to S761.

  In S761, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is “7”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "7", the process proceeds to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "7", the process proceeds to S762.

  In S762, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "8". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "8", the process proceeds to S763. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "8", the process proceeds to S764.

  In S763, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 4 s to the valid period timer in order to set a button valid period for displaying the result of the search. If this process ends, the process moves to S764.

  In S764, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "10". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "10", the process proceeds to S765. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "10", the process proceeds to S768.

  In S765, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H". The challenge success / failure pattern flag has the challenge success / failure pattern No. as described above. It is an internal flag set according to 1 to 3. If the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", success notification has already been made, and if not "03H", success notification has not been made. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the process proceeds to S770. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is not "03H", the process proceeds to S766.

  In S766, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to 5 s, for example, in the valid period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S770.

  In S767, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 changes the value set in the operation number counter according to the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. For example, “10” is set in “02H”, and “300” is set in “01H”. In the case of failure, a value corresponding to the number of times that can not be achieved within the validity period is set. As a matter of course, the value set in the operation number counter may be uniform, or a value corresponding to failure may be a value corresponding to a smaller number. Further, when the value of the operation number counter becomes “0” in the one corresponding to failure, a result indicating failure may be displayed before the value of the valid period timer becomes “0”. If this process ends, the process moves to S770.

  In S768, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "11." If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "11", the process proceeds to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "11", the process proceeds to S769.

  In S769, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "12". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "12", the process proceeds to S770. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "12", the one-on-one-round round effect processing routine is ended.

  In S770, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting in-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data according to the determination result stored in the one-stroke game effect determination process of FIG. For example, when the value of the round counter is “3”, effect data from the start of the third R to the point immediately before the start of the seventh R is set. When the value of the round counter is "7", the effect data from the start of the 7R's eye to immediately before the start of the 8R's eye is set. When the value of the round counter is "8", the effect data from the start of the 8th R to the position immediately before the start of the 10th R are set. When the value of the round counter is "10", the effect data from the start of the 10R's eye to immediately before the start of the 11R's eye is set. When the value of the round counter is "11", the effect data in execution of the 11th R is set. When the value of the round counter is "12", the effect data in the 12th R is being set. When this process ends, the single match round in-round effect processing routine ends.

[Three rounds of challenge round production process]
FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing effect processing during the three challenge rounds executed by the sub CPU 71. This three-challenge round presentation process is a process for determining the presentation contents during the three round challenge, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 148, in S780, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter corresponds to any of “4”, “6”, and “8”. If it is determined that the value of the round counter corresponds to any of “4”, “6”, and “8”, the process proceeds to S781. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to "4", "6", or "8", the process proceeds to S783.

  In S781, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether success notification has been performed. That is, based on the determination result stored in the three-time challenge effect determination process of FIG. 122, the sub CPU 71 determines whether “success” is notified before the execution of the round corresponding to the value of the round counter. . If it is determined that the success notification has been issued, the process proceeds to S787. If it is determined that the success notification has not been issued, the process proceeds to S782.

  In S782, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to 5 s, for example, in the valid period timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S787.

  In S783, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "10". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "10", the process proceeds to S784. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "10", the process proceeds to S787.

  In S784, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H". If the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", success notification has already been made, and if not "03H", success notification has not been made. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the process proceeds to S787. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is not "03H", the process proceeds to S785.

  In S785, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to 5 s, for example, in the valid period timer. When this process ends, the process moves to S786.

  In S786, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the operation number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 changes the value set in the operation number counter according to the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. For example, “10” is set in “02H”, and “300” is set in “01H”. In the case of failure, a value corresponding to the number of times that can not be achieved within the validity period is set. When this process ends, the process moves to S787.

  In S787, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting in-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data according to the determination result stored in the three-time challenge effect determination process of FIG. When this process is ended, the three-time challenge round in-progress processing routine is ended.

[Surprising round production process]
FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the surprise round in-progress effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This surprise round in-progress process is a process for determining the contents of the effect in the round in the surprise, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 149, in S790, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter falls under any of “3” to “8”. That is, it is determined whether or not the effect pattern corresponds to the round in which the effect pattern is determined in the surprise effect determining process of FIG. If it is determined that the value of the round counter falls under any of “3” to “8”, the process proceeds to S791. If it is determined that the value of the round counter does not correspond to any of "3" to "8", the process proceeds to S793.

  In S791, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the button operation corresponds to a round. In this process, sub CPU 71 stores the numbers (Nos. 2 to 4 and 12 to 14) corresponding to the surprise pattern in which the effective period of the button operation is set, as the determination result of the surprise effect determination process of FIG. Determine if there is. If it is determined that the button operation corresponds to the round, the process moves to S792. If it is determined that the button operation does not correspond to the round, the process proceeds to S 797.

  In S792, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period preparation timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to, for example, 4 s to the valid period preparation timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S797.

  In S793, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is "10". If it is determined that the value of the round counter is "10", the process proceeds to S794. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "10", the process proceeds to S797.

  In S794, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H". If the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", success notification has already been made, and if not "03H", success notification has not been made. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is "03H", the process proceeds to S797. If it is determined that the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag is not "03H", the process proceeds to S795.

  In S795, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets a value corresponding to 5 s, for example, in the valid period timer. If this process ends, the process moves to S796.

  In S796, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set a predetermined value in the operation number counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 changes the value set in the operation number counter according to the value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. For example, “10” is set in “02H”, and “300” is set in “01H”. In the case of failure, a value corresponding to the number of times that can not be achieved within the validity period is set. As a matter of course, the value set in the operation number counter may be uniform, or a value corresponding to failure may be a value corresponding to a smaller number. Further, when the value of the operation number counter becomes “0” in the one corresponding to failure, a result indicating failure may be displayed before the value of the valid period timer becomes “0”. If this process ends, the process moves to S797.

  In S 797, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting in-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data according to the determination result stored in the surprise effect determination process of FIG. Specifically, as effect data to be executed in the round corresponding to the value of the round counter, (1) effect data relating to the surprise pattern determined in the surprise pattern lottery process of S483 in FIG. 123, (2) FIG. 124 The effect data relating to the display pattern of the icon determined in the icon determination process of (3) and the effect data relating to the character band pattern determined in the character band effect determination process of FIG. When this process is ended, the surprise round in-progress processing routine is ended.

[Additional bonus round production process]
FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing an effect processing during the additional bonus round executed by the sub CPU 71. The during-addition bonus round effect process is a process for determining the effect contents during the round in the additional bonus, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 150, in S800, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an additional bonus. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”, the process proceeds to S801. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "04H" to "0BH", the effect process routine during the additional bonus round is ended.

  In S801, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting in-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for executing an effect in a round based on the effect contents determined in the additional bonus determination process of FIG. For example, when the value of the round counter is “1”, effect data (initial value pattern, data corresponding to roulette pattern) corresponding to the determination result stored in the bonus initial process of FIG. 129 is set. When the value of the round counter corresponds to another value, if the determination result is stored in association with the substantial round, effect data according to the stored determination result is set. In addition, although the value of the round counter referred to in this process is a value corresponding to a substantial round from "1" to "10", the value of the round counter is substantially for "12" to "16". It corresponds to the 11th to 15th eyes of the round. For example, if the value of the round counter is “1” to “10”, the effect type or character corresponding to the first to tenth R of the substantial round specified in the bonus scenario table in FIG. However, if the value of the round counter is “11”, none of the additional bonus scenario table is referred to, and if the value of the round counter is “12” to “16”, the additional bonus scenario table is Reference is made to the effect type or character corresponding to the 11th to 15th eyes of the specified substantial round. In addition, when the determination result is not stored in association with the substantial round (when the effect type is G or M or N), the scenario number flag if the value of the round counter corresponds to the substantial round The effect type to be executed is specified based on the value of, the bonus bonus table, and the value of the round counter, and effect data corresponding to the specified effect type is set. In addition, when the value of the round counter does not correspond to the actual round, the current round is the 11th R (the value of the round counter is "11") and the next 12R (the value of the round counter is "12") is the actual round If there is, while the effect data for continuously performing the effect executed in the previous round (the round where the value of the round counter is "10") is set, otherwise it is not a real round, that is, the current If a substantial round is not to be executed from the round, effect data for displaying an end display pattern is set based on the determination result stored in the bonus bonus end screen drawing process of S 590 in FIG. 132. When this process ends, the process moves to S802.

  In S802, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether it corresponds to a round with combo RUSH. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the effect type of the current round is “G” corresponding to “combo RUSH”. If it is determined that it corresponds to the round with combo RUSH, the process proceeds to S803. If it is determined that it does not correspond to the round with combo RUSH, the process proceeds to S807.

  In S803, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting data corresponding to the operation number pattern corresponding to the determination result stored in the combo RUSH lottery process of S544 of FIG. For example, if the determination result stored in the combo RUSH lottery process corresponds to No. 14 of the operation count pattern, data corresponding to “5 → 3 → 5 → 5” is set as the operation count pattern. When this process ends, the process moves to S804.

  In S804, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting a value based on the data set in the processing of S803 in the addition number counter. For example, when data corresponding to “5 → 3 → 5 → 5” of the operation number pattern No. 14 is set, the number of additions is four, and “4” is set to the addition number counter. The number to be added is +50 per "1" of the value set in the addition number counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S805.

  In S805, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting a value based on the data set in the processing of S803 in the operation number counter. For example, when data corresponding to “5 → 3 → 5 → 5” of the operation number pattern No. 14 is set, since the first operation required number is 5 times, “5” is set in the operation number counter. Is set. When this process ends, the process moves to S806.

  In S806, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 8 seconds is set. When this processing is ended, the bonus bonus round in-progress processing routine is ended.

  In S807, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the button operation corresponds to a round. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the current round is an effect other than “combo RUSH” and requires button operation (roulette effect, character appearance effect, cow character resurrection effect). Determine if If it is determined that the button operation corresponds to a round, the process moves to S808. If it is determined that the button operation does not correspond to the round, the process proceeds to S809.

  In S808, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the valid period preparation timer. For example, a value corresponding to 3s at the time of roulette effect, a value corresponding to 5s at the time of character appearance effect, and a value corresponding to 6s at the time of cow character rebirth effect are set. Note that values corresponding to times other than these may be set. When this processing is ended, the bonus bonus round in-progress processing routine is ended.

  In S809, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of determining whether the effect corresponding to the effect type M, that is, whether it corresponds to a round for executing a reverse effect at the end of the additional bonus. If it is determined that the round corresponds to the round of executing the effect corresponding to the effect type M, the process proceeds to S810. If it is determined that it does not correspond to the round for executing the effect corresponding to the effect type M, the effect process routine during the additional bonus round is ended.

  In S810, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the addition effect execution timer. When this processing is ended, the bonus bonus round in-progress processing routine is ended. For example, a value corresponding to 7s is set in the addition effect execution timer. As a result, after the display of the end display pattern (6.814s), it is possible to cause the SP character to appear in a pseudo manner, and the number of additions can be added when it appears.

[V-Challenge production process]
FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing effect processing during V-challenge executed by the sub CPU 71. The V challenge in-progress process is a process for determining the contents of the effect in the V challenge, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 151, in S820, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “0 CH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a bump V. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "0CH", the process proceeds to S821. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "0 CH", the V during challenge effect processing routine is ended.

  In S821, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting in-round effect data according to the value of the round counter. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for executing effects in the bump V corresponding to the number of rounds. With this effect data, effects from the start of the 1R's eye to the end of the 11R's in the bump V are executed. If this process ends, the process moves to S822.

  In S822, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the round counter is “1”, that is, whether or not it corresponds to the opening round of the second large winning opening 37. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is “1”, the process proceeds to S823. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not "1", the V during challenge presentation processing routine is ended.

  In S823, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the warning notification timer. In the present embodiment, for example, a value corresponding to 13000 ms is set as the predetermined value. The value set in the warning notification timer is a value corresponding to 10 seconds after the start of the long opening (the longest operation period of the displacement member operation pattern) of the specific area 38A. When this process is completed, the V-challenge effect processing routine is ended. Also in this process, although the predetermined value is set in the warning notification timer with the opening of the specific area 38A as the start reference, the predetermined value is the opening reference of the second large winning opening 37 provided with the specific area 38A. May be set. For example, the warning notification of the V winning may be performed 10 seconds after the start of the opening of the second big winning opening 37.

  In S824, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "0DH". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a small hit. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "0DH", the process proceeds to S825. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "0DH", the effect processing routine during the additional V challenge is ended.

  In S825, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting small hit medium effect data. The effects during the small hit will be described later. When this process is completed, the V-challenge effect processing routine is ended.

[Process in round]
FIG. 152 is a flowchart of the in-round process performed by the sub CPU 71. The in-round process is a process for determining the contents of effects in other rounds, and is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 152, in S830, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the round counter is a value corresponding to a substantial round. In this process, the sub CPU 71 specifies the type of hit based on the value of the hit effect pattern flag, and determines whether the value of the round counter corresponds to a substantial round. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is a value corresponding to the actual round, the process proceeds to S831. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not a value corresponding to a substantial round, the in-round processing routine is ended. In addition, the round which performs open pattern A, B, D, E is determined as a substantial round.

  In S831, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting "100" as the value of the remaining prize ball counter. When this process ends, the mid-round processing routine ends.

[Per win end production processing]
FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the hit / termination effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit / termination effect process is a process for determining the effect contents in the hit / finish interval which is the end time of the big hit or the small hit, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 153, in S840, the sub CPU 71 executes super big bonus end effect processing. The super big bonus end effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the process moves to S841.

  In S841, the sub CPU 71 executes a challenge bonus end presentation process. The challenge bonus end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S842.

  In S842, the sub CPU 71 executes an additional bonus end effect process. This additional bonus end effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S843.

  In S843, the sub CPU 71 executes V challenge end effect processing. The V challenge end effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. If this process ends, the process moves to S844.

  In S844, the sub CPU 71 executes other hit end processing. The hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Super big bonus end effect processing]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the super big bonus end effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The super big bonus end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval of the super big bonus, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 154, in S850, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a super big bonus. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “01H” and it is a super big bonus, the process proceeds to S851. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "01H" and is not a super big bonus, the super big bonus end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S851, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data at the end of the super big bonus. When this process ends, the super big bonus end effect processing routine ends.

[Challenge bonus end effect processing]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the challenge bonus end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. This challenge bonus end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the hit end interval of the challenge bonus, and is executed in the following step units.

  As shown in FIG. 155, in S860, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is a challenge bonus. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "02H" or "03H" and it is a challenge bonus, the process proceeds to S861. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "02H" or "03H" and is not a challenge bonus, the challenge bonus end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S861, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data at the end of the challenge bonus according to the value of the challenge bonus type flag. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets different effect data according to the value of the challenge bonus type flag in order to execute end effect of different contents according to the type of the challenge bonus that has been executed. Note that the end effect may be all the same regardless of the value of the challenge bonus type flag, or the end effect may be the same with only two types of challenge bonus types. If this process ends, the process moves to S862.

  In S862, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "03H". That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the type of challenge bonus is surprise or not. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is "03H", the process proceeds to S863. If it is determined that the value of the challenge bonus type flag is not "03H", the process proceeds to S864.

  In S863, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "00H" as the initial value of the success notification round flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S864.

  In S864, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" as an initial value of the challenge bonus type flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S865.

  In S865, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "00H" as the initial value of the challenge success / failure pattern flag. When this process ends, the challenge bonus end effect processing routine ends.

[Add bonus end effect processing]
FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an additional bonus end effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The additional bonus end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the end interval of the additional bonus, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 156, in S870, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not it is an additional bonus. If the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “04H” to “0BH” and it is determined that the bonus is an additional bonus, the processing is shifted to S871. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not “04H” to “0BH” and is not an additional bonus, the additional bonus end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S871, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting effect data at the end of the bonus. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for displaying a title pattern, based on the determination result stored in the additional bonus title determination process of S591 of FIG. 132. When this process ends, the process moves to S872.

  In S872, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is “0”, the process proceeds to S873. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not “0”, the process proceeds to S874.

  In S873, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of adding the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the value of the payout ball counter. That is, even if the upper limit number of winnings per round is not reached in the last real round of the bonus bonus, even if the upper limit winning ball number per round is not reached, the payout winning ball number is added to the remaining winning number It is processed as the If this process ends, the process moves to S874.

  In S874, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" as an initial value of the scenario number flag. When this process is ended, the additional bonus end effect processing routine is ended.

[V Challenge end effect processing]
FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing V challenge end effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The V challenge end effect process is a process for determining the effect content in the V challenge hit end interval, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in S880, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the hit effect pattern flag is “0 CH”. That is, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not there is a bump V. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is "0CH", the process proceeds to S881. If it is determined that the value of the hit effect pattern flag is not "0 CH", the V challenge end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S881, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the V prize notification flag is "01H". If it is determined that the value of the V prize notification flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S882. If it is determined that the value of the V prize notification flag is not "01H" but "00H" and the notification of V prize is not performed, the V challenge end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S 882, the sub CPU 71 sets effect data for notifying continuation of the ST mode. When this process ends, the V challenge end effect processing routine ends.

[Per win end production processing]
FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the hit / termination effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit end effect processing is processing for determining the contents of effects in the other hit end intervals, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 158, in S890, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "00H" to the value of the hit effect pattern flag. When this process ends, the process moves to S891.

  In S891, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the round counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S892.

  In S892, the sub CPU 71 executes processing to determine whether the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0". If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is "0", the processing is shifted to S895. If it is determined that the value of the remaining prize ball counter is not "0", the process proceeds to S893.

  In S893, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to add the value of the remaining prize ball counter to the accumulated payout prize ball counter. That is, even when the upper limit prize number per round is not reached at the end of the last round (actual round) of the hit gaming state, the cumulative payout prize ball is not reached. The number is processed as the number obtained by adding the remaining prize ball number. If this process ends, the process moves to S894.

  In S894, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "0" to the value of the remaining prize ball counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S895.

  In S895, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the V prize notification flag is "01H". If it is determined that the value of the V prize notification flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S896. When it is determined that the value of the V prize notification flag is not "01H" but "00H" and the notification of V prize is not performed, the hit end effect processing routine is ended.

  In S896, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the V prize notification flag. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Demonstration mode change processing]
FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing effect mode change processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect mode change process is a process for changing the effect mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 159, in S900, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the type of hit game ended based on the received game state command is a small hit. The game state command may include information on the ended hit game state, and the sub CPU 71 can determine the type of hit game ended based on the information included in the game state command. If it is determined that the type of hit game ended is a small hit, the effect mode change processing routine is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the type of hit game that has been completed is not a small hit, the processing moves to S901.

  In S901, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the received gaming state command is a command indicating the probability variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state. If it is determined that the gaming state command is a command indicating the probable variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state, the processing is shifted to S902. If it is determined that the gaming state command is not a command indicating the probable variation gaming state and the time saving gaming state, the process proceeds to S903.

  In S902, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "04H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the ST mode. When this process ends, the effect mode change process routine ends.

  In S903, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the received gaming state command is a command indicating the probability variation gaming state and the non-temporal game state. If it is determined that the gaming state command is a command indicating the probable variation gaming state and the non-time-short playing state, the process proceeds to S904. If it is determined that the game state command is not a command indicating the probable variation gaming state and the non-short play state, that is, a command indicating the non-probability variation play state and the non-time short play state, this effect mode change processing routine is ended.

  In S904, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the number of remaining time reductions (hereinafter referred to as "remaining time reductions") included as information in the game state command is four. If it is determined that the remaining short number of times is four times, the process proceeds to S905. If it is determined that the remaining short number of times is not four times, the process proceeds to S906.

  In S905, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "02H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the short mode of the time saving mode. When this process ends, the effect mode change process routine ends.

  In S906, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "03H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the long mode with the time saving mode. When this process ends, the effect mode change process routine ends.

[Time saving mode end processing]
FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the time saving mode end process executed by the sub CPU 71. The short time mode end process is a process for ending the time short mode as the effect mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 160, in S910, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the special mode. If this process ends, the process moves to S911.

  At S911, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "10" to the value of the special mode counter. Thus, the special mode is executed up to 10 games. When this process ends, the process moves to S912.

  In S912, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the accumulated payout balls counter. That is, in this process, the value of the accumulated payout ball counter is cleared because of the end of so-called "long-running". In this "Renso", the transition from the non-probability gaming state and the non-short time status to the big hit gaming state, and then the big hit gaming state again while transitioning to the non-probability gaming state and the non-short time status again. It means to move. Note that the value of the accumulated payout ball counter may not be cleared according to the button operation or the like. Also, the value of the accumulated payout balls counter is stored until the special mode is ended, and when the special mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode, “0” is set to the value of the accumulated payout balls counter You may do so. When this process ends, the time saving mode end process routine ends.

[ST mode end processing]
FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing ST mode end processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The ST mode end process is a process for ending the ST mode as the effect mode, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 161, in S920, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the effect mode becomes the special mode. When this process ends, the process moves to S921.

  In S921, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting “10” to the value of the special mode counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S922.

  In S922, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the accumulated payout ball counter. In addition, the value of the accumulated payout balls counter is stored until the special mode ends, and the value of the accumulated payout balls counter is set to “0” when the special mode is ended and the mode is shifted to the normal mode. You may do so. When this process ends, the ST mode end process routine ends.

[Emission error notification process]
FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing a discharge error notification process performed by the sub CPU 71. The discharge error notification process is a process for notifying a discharge error, and is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 162, in S930, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting a predetermined value in the discharge error notification timer. In this process, the sub CPU 71 sets, for example, a value corresponding to 30 seconds. Note that other numbers of seconds may be used, or a discharge error may be notified until the power is turned off without applying the discharge error notification timer.

  In S 931, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is “0”, the process proceeds to S932. If it is determined that the value of the discharge error notification timer is not "0", the discharge error notification process is ended.

  In S932, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "01H" in the discharge error notification flag. Thereby, notification of the discharge error is performed. When this process ends, the discharge error notification process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 163 to 184, the contents of the effects in each of the effect modes will be described mainly using a screen display example.

[Example of screen display at normal time]
FIG. 163 is a diagram showing an example of screen display at normal time. The normal time here means the execution time of the effect mode such as the normal mode, the special mode, the time saving mode, or the ST mode. As shown in the figure, basically, on the screen of the display area 4A at the normal time, basically, a plurality of decorative symbols 700, the first reserved number information 701 corresponding to the start storage of the first special symbol, and the second special The second hold number information 702 corresponding to the start storage of the symbol is displayed.

  The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are, for example, three columns, and the numeral symbols of "1" to "7" are displayed in a variable display mode or a stop display mode in each column. The plurality of decorative symbols 700 are variably displayed and stopped in conjunction with the variation display and the stop display of the special symbol. When changing from the normal gaming state to the big hit gaming state, the plurality of decorative symbols 700 basically become the stop display mode in a state where they are all aligned with the same numeric symbol from the state of the variable display mode. However, when moving to the jackpot gaming state or the small hit gaming state where the plurality of decorative symbols 700 become a bump V, the stop display mode is set in the order of arranging the number symbols such as "135". The stop display mode of the decorative symbol 700 other than these is a loss.

  The first hold number information 701 and the second hold number information 702 are displayed by hold marks according to the hold number corresponding to the start storage of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. The pending marks indicating the first pending number information 701 and the second pending number information 702 are additionally displayed up to four in accordance with the winning of the game balls to the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33, respectively. The reserve mark indicating the first reserve number information 701 and the second reserve number information 702 is used when the decorative symbol starts fluctuating display with the special symbol based on the start storage of the corresponding first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. It disappears from the right end side and disappears. If both the first holding number information 701 and the second holding number information 702 are displayed, the starting memory of the second special symbol is prioritized over the starting memory of the first special symbol. 2 The pending mark of the pending number information 702 is erased prior to the pending mark of the first pending number information 701.

  Although not shown in the drawings, different display images, background images, and the like are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in various effect modes according to the contents of the effect. Of course, the same display image or background image may be displayed even in different effect modes.

[Example of screen display in time saving mode]
FIG. 164 is a diagram showing an example screen display of the time saving mode. First, as shown in FIG. 164A, immediately after the end of the big hit gaming state, when transitioning to the short mode in the time saving mode, on the screen of the display area 4A, the stop when moving to the big hit gaming state It is assumed that a plurality of decoration symbols 700 are stopped and displayed in the display mode, and a plurality of holding marks indicating the first holding number information 701 and the second holding number information 702 are displayed.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 164 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the variable display of the plurality of decorative symbols 700 is started, and accordingly, the holding mark of the second holding number information 702 is the first holding number information It is erased prior to the 701 reserved mark.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 164 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, the plurality of decorative symbols 700 in the variable display are displaced to the corners, and six symbol images 700A to 700F are left at the center. It is scrolled so as to move in the direction (in FIG. 164 (C), one symbol image 700F (see, eg, FIG. 164 (D) is not shown)).

  The symbol image 700A is displayed as "long" as an image for notifying of the transition from the short mode to the long mode. The symbol image 700B is displayed as "chance" as an image indicating that the "long" symbol image 700A may be stopped and displayed during the next variable display of the decorative symbol 700. The symbol image 700C is displayed as "Development" as an image showing development to an effect indicating whether or not to shift to the hit gaming state. The symbol image 700D is displayed as "sorry" as an image indicating that the mode does not shift to the long mode even if the short mode ends four times. The symbol image 700E is displayed as "big hit" on the condition that the decorative symbol 700 currently displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a big hit manner. The symbol image 700F is displayed as a blank as an image indicating that condition on the condition that the decorative symbol 700 currently being variably displayed is stopped and displayed in a lost manner (see, for example, FIG. 164 (D)).

  In these symbol images 700A to 700F, when the scroll display is stopped, the symbol image located at the left end indicates the transition of the game result or the effect mode. In the present embodiment, when the scroll display of the symbol images 700A to 700F is stopped, the plurality of decorative symbols 700 are then stopped and displayed. The scroll display of the symbol image may be stopped after the stop display of the decorative symbol. The scroll display and stop display of such symbol images 700A to 700F are changed only in the short mode, that is, after the start of the time reduction mode after the end of the big hit gaming state, the number of times of fluctuation of the decorative symbol 700 changes up to four times. It may be linked to the display.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (D), the symbol image 700C may be stopped and displayed at the left end on the screen of the display area 4A. In this case, the player can increase anticipation that the effect indicating whether or not to shift to the hit gaming state is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 164E, the symbol image 700A may be displayed stopped at the left end on the screen of the display area 4A. Such a state of stop display of the symbol image 700A can occur up to four times of variation of the special symbol (decorative symbol) after the end of the big hit gaming state. Similarly, for the other symbol images 700 </ b> B to 700 </ b> F, the variation count may be stopped and displayed at the leftmost end by four times. In this embodiment, regardless of whether the effect mode flag is "02H" or "03H", the mode always shifts to the short mode on the screen, and particularly when the effect mode flag is "03H", the number of times of variation of the decorative symbol 700 is The symbol image 700A of "long" is stopped and displayed at the leftmost end of the display area 4A by four times (four games). The timing at which the “long” symbol image 700A is stopped and displayed may be determined, for example, by lottery. When the effect mode flag is "02H", the mode may shift to the short mode on the screen, and when the effect mode flag is "03H", the mode may shift to the long mode without shifting to the short mode on the screen. In addition, although it is a winning symbol that can shift to the probability variation gaming state, if it does not win the V, it may shift to the long mode without shifting to the short mode. In addition, even when the time saving mode is ended without shifting to the long mode, the symbol image of “long” may be stopped and displayed at the left end. In addition, even in the case of shifting to the long mode, the symbol image of “Sorry” may be stopped and displayed on the left end. It is preferable that the rendition against the flow of such an actual short time mode is generated on the condition that the decorative symbol 700 currently displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in a big hit manner.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (F), for example, when transitioning to the long mode after digesting four times as the number of times of time reduction, effect display using the symbol images 700A to 700F is not performed on the screen of the display area 4A. , The decorative pattern 700 will be displayed at the center of the original. At this time, the background image is switched from the content corresponding to the short mode to the content corresponding to the long mode.

  In addition, immediately after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it may be a specification that can be shifted to either the short mode or the long mode. In such a specification, when the number of time reductions ends in four times, it is preferable to shift from the long mode to the short mode within four times of variation of the special symbol.

[Example of screen display on 1st R to 2R on challenge bonus]
FIG. 165 is a diagram showing an example of screen display in the 1st to 2nd eyes of the challenge bonus. As shown in FIGS. 165 (A) to 165 (C), in the first to second challenges of the challenge bonus, on the screen of the display area 4A, the player is asked the type of challenge bonus along with a plurality of icons 800 indicating the number of rounds. A selection effect image for selection is displayed. The plurality of icons 800 are displayed corresponding to the 1st to 10th eyes, and the icons corresponding to the 11th to 12th eyes are not displayed. The icon 800 corresponding to the current round blinks until the start of the next round or is highlighted by the degree of coloring, etc. When the next round starts, the one corresponding to the previous round is erased and not displayed. . In FIG. 165, for convenience, the deleted icon 800 is indicated by a broken line, and the highlighted icon 800 is indicated by a thick line.

  In the selected effect image, there are title images 810A to 810C showing "one game", "3 times challenge" and "surprises" which are types of challenge bonus, and character images showing characters corresponding to respective types of challenge bonus. 811A to 811C, including message images 812A to 812C indicating success conditions on presentation. The selected effect image is switched according to the operation of the effect button.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 165 (A), a title image 810A showing "one match", a character image 811A showing "Don-chan", and "Janken showdown victory!" A message image 812A indicating a "one-off game" success condition such as "success!" Is displayed. Then, when the effect button is operated, as shown in FIG. 165 (B), as the next selected effect image, a title image 810B showing “3 times challenge”, a character image 811B showing “cow character”, “play the other party” A message image 812 B indicating a success condition of the “3 times challenge”, such as “Fly! Further, when the effect button is operated, as shown in FIG. 165 (C), as the next selected effect image, a title image 810C showing “surprise”, a character image 811C showing “Shohana”, “don't miss a surprise chance” A message image 812 C indicating the success condition of “surprise” such as “success if the feature is completed” is displayed. After the display of these selected effect images, when the 2R's end and the effective period of the button operation becomes 0, the type of challenge bonus corresponding to the displayed selected effect image is determined.

[Example screen display of one match game]
FIGS. 166 to 171 are diagrams showing an example of screen display of one match. In a single match game, effects are performed in the flow described below.

  First, as shown in FIG. 166 (A), an icon 800 corresponding to the third R's eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A at the start of the third R's eye. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a character image 811A and a character image 811D showing an opponent are displayed, and a moving image 820A showing a state in which a draw is continued three times by a rock is displayed. This moving image 820 is based on the rock-paper-scissors pattern determined using the rock-paper-scissors pattern drawing table of FIG. 19 and FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (B), when the fourth R is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the fourth R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving picture 820B is displayed, which shows a state in which the draw is further continued by the rock-paper-scissors, and shows the number of continuous draw as a count of the aiko. The moving image 820B is based on the one-competition combination pattern determined using the one-competition combination lottery table of FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 166 (C), for example, when the sixth R is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the sixth R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 820C is displayed, which largely indicates the last number of the aiko count and the character image 811A. The moving image 820C is based on the one-competition combination pattern determined using the one-competition combination lottery table of FIG. Such a series of moving images 820A, 820B, and 820C are displayed for the third to sixth eyes.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (D), when the seventh R is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the seventh R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 820D is displayed, which largely indicates a line in which the last rocking sentence starts. The moving image 820D is based on the one-competition combination pattern determined using the one-competition combination lottery table of FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 167 (E), when the eighth R is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the eighth R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 820E indicating a message of “press!” Is displayed together with the effect button and the meter indicating the effective period. The moving image 820E is based on the one-competition combination pattern determined using the one-competition combination lottery table of FIG. After the display of such a moving image 820E, if the depression operation button 9A is operated within the effective period or the effective period elapses without any depression operation button 9A being operated, the screen of the display area 4A is as follows: Images are displayed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 168 (F), the character images 811A and 811D are displayed again on the screen of the display area 4A, and a moving image 820F showing a state of winning the rock is displayed. The moving image 820F is based on the one-competition combination pattern determined using the one-competition combination drawing table of FIG. 18, and the information of “result win” is included in the one-competition combination pattern. It is based on things.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 168 (G), when the 9R is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the 9R's eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, on the screen of the display area 4A, a message image 820G such as "ST mode CHANCE" is displayed together with the character image 811A. As a result, it is informed that the round game in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is to be performed. Such a message image 820G is continuously displayed also in the 10Rs.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 169 (H), when the 11R's start, on the screen of the display area 4A, a winning a prize to the second big winning opening 37 with a message image 820G such as "ST mode CHANCE". A notification image 820H is displayed to notify that a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is being executed by prompting the user.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (I), if the V winning to the specific area 38A continues to be detected even after a predetermined time (approximately 13s) elapses after the start of the 11Rth, the screen of the display area 4A is displayed. A warning image 820I is displayed showing a warning message such as "Aim for winning a V prize" in order to urge the V prize to the specific area 38A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 169 (J), when the V winning to the specific area 38A is actually detected in the 11Rth, “V showing that V winning is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. A message image 820J such as "winning" is displayed. That is, notification that transition to the probability variation gaming state has been determined is notified. A message image 820J of "V winning!" Indicating that the transition to such a probability change gaming state has been determined is continuously displayed until the big hit gaming state ends.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 170 (F ′), on the screen of the display area 4A, the character images 811A and 811D are re-displayed at the 8th R, and a moving image 820F ′ is displayed showing a state of losing the rock. In some cases. The moving image 820 F ′ in this case is based on the one-competition combination pattern determined using the one-competition combination lottery table in FIG. 18, and the information “loss as a result” is included in the one-competition combination pattern. It is based on being included. Such a moving image 820F 'is also displayed at the 9th to 10th eyes.

  In such a case, next, as shown in FIG. 170 (G ′), the icon 800 corresponding to the 10R's eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, and “continuous A video 820G 'of the last challenge showing the message "!" Is displayed. The video 820G 'of the last challenge is a challenge success / failure pattern No. 1 determined using the challenge success / failure lottery table of FIG. 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure) or challenge success or failure pattern No. It is based on 2 (challenge failure → last chance success).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (H ′), the screen of the display area 4A includes a message indicating “ST mode CHANCE continuous hit!” Along with effect buttons and a meter indicating the effective period, and further character images 811A and 811D. The last challenge video 820H 'is displayed, which shows that the closing of the door gradually makes it invisible and the result of rocking rock can not be known. The video 820H 'of the last challenge is also a challenge success / failure pattern No. 1 determined using the challenge success / failure lottery table of FIG. 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure) or challenge success or failure pattern No. It is based on 2 (challenge failure → last chance success). After such a moving image 820H 'is displayed, the pressing operation button 9A is continuously hit within the effective period to reach a predetermined number of operations, or the predetermined number of operations is not reached or the pressing operation button 9A is operated at all When the effective period elapses without, the following image is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 171 (I '), the character images 811A and 811D are displayed again on the screen of the display area 4A, and a moving image 820I' showing a state of losing by, for example, rocking is displayed. Be done. This moving image 820I 'is based on the one-competition game combination pattern determined using the one-competition game combination lottery table of FIG. This is based on the fact that the single match combination pattern includes information of “result lose” in response to 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure). Although not shown in particular, on the screen of the display area 4A, the challenge success / failure pattern No. 1 is displayed. A video based on 2 (challenge failure → last chance success) may be displayed. In this case, for example, the door is fully closed, and effects such that the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B appear in front of the screen of the display area 4A (see FIG. 176 (F) ).

  After the display of the moving image 820I ', as shown in FIG. 171 (J'), an image 820J 'such as "last challenge failed!" Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is informed that a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy is not performed. The image 820J 'of such "last challenge failure!" Is continuously displayed until the big hit gaming state ends. In addition, although not illustrated in particular, challenge success / failure pattern No. When a moving image based on 2 (challenge failure → last chance success) is displayed, an image such as “last challenge success!” May be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A (see FIG. 174 (H)). As a result, it is informed that a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy to be performed is performed.

[Screen display example of 3 times challenge]
172 to 174 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the three times challenge. In the 3rd challenge, effects are performed in the flow described below.

  First, as shown in FIG. 172A, an icon 800 corresponding to the third R's eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A at the start of the third R's eye. Then, when the interval between rounds after the end of the third R is reached, a message image 830A such as "READY CAMONE!" Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is predicted that an effect of requesting an operation to the next 4R is performed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 172 (B), the icon 800 corresponding to the fifth R's eye is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A at the start of the fifth R's eye. Then, when it becomes an inter-round interval after the end of the 5th R, a message image 830 B such as “READY still going!” Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is predicted that an effect of requesting an operation in the next 6R will be performed.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, the icon 800 corresponding to the 7R's eye is highlighted at the start of the 7R's eye. Then, when the interval between rounds comes to an end after the 7th R is finished, a message image 830C such as "READY Last determined!" Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. As a result, it is predicted that an effect requiring an operation in the next 8R is to be performed. In such advance notice effects, for example, by enabling the display of the contents and the order of the characters to be displayed together with “READY” in different patterns, it is suggested that a round in which the V winning in a specific area is easy is executed. May be

  After that, for example, in the case of the fourth R, as shown in FIG. 173 (D), the icon 800 corresponding to the fourth R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, and "Don-chan" and "Cow character" face each other. While showing the situation where it did, the animated picture 830D which shows the message of “press!” Is displayed with a meter which shows an effect button and an effective period. After the display of such a moving image 830D, if the depression operation button 9A is operated within the effective period or the effective period elapses without any depression operation button 9A being operated, the screen of the display area 4A is as follows: Images are displayed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 173 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, a movie 830E showing “Don-chan” being thrown away by the “cow character” and showing a rendering result such as “success!” May be displayed. Such a moving image 820E is based on the three-time challenge pattern determined using the three-time challenge lottery table of FIG. 21, and the information indicating “success” is included in the three-time challenge pattern. It is based. This “success!” Moving image 830E may be displayed on the 6th or 8th eye based on the determined three-time challenge pattern. After the display of the “success!” Moving image 830E, a moving image similar to that shown in FIG. 168 (G) and FIGS. 169 (H) to (J) is displayed. When the “successful!” Moving image 830E is displayed, an effect may be performed to make the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B appear.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 173 (E ′), on the screen of the display area 4A, a movie 830E showing “Don-chan” avoiding the “cow character” and showing a rendering result such as “Failure!” 'May be displayed. Such a moving image 820E ′ is based on the three-time challenge pattern determined using the three-time challenge lottery table of FIG. 21, and the information “failed” is included in the three-time challenge pattern. Based on This “failure!” Moving image 830E ′ may be displayed on the 6th or 8th eye based on the determined three-time challenge pattern.

  For example, when a moving image 830E ′ of “Failure!” Is displayed on the 8th R, “Don-chan” is “On” on the screen of the display area 4A in the next 9R, as shown in FIG. 174 (F ′). A moving image 830 F ′ indicating a rendering result such as “Failure!” Is displayed, as well as showing a state where the “cow character” is turned upside down while avoiding the “cow character”. Such a moving image 830F 'is based on the three-time challenge pattern determined using the three-time challenge lottery table of FIG. 21, and all the three-time challenge patterns have information of "failure-failure-failure". It is based on being included.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (G ′), the display area 4A screen includes a message indicating “ST mode CHANCE continuous hit!” Together with a presentation button and a meter indicating the effective period, and the character is closed by closing the door. A video 830G 'of the last challenge is displayed, which gradually disappears and shows that the results of the three challenges are unknown. The video 830 G 'of the last challenge is a challenge success / failure pattern No. 1 determined using the challenge success / failure lottery table of FIG. 1 (challenge failure → last chance failure) or challenge success or failure pattern No. It is based on 2 (challenge failure → last chance success). After such a moving image 830G 'is displayed, the pressing operation button 9A is continuously hit within the effective period to reach a predetermined number of operations, or the predetermined number of operations is not reached or the pressing operation button 9A is operated at all If the validity period passes without passing, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 2 is determined, an image 830H 'of "last challenge success!" Is displayed as shown in FIG. 174 (H'). In this case, although not particularly shown, before the image 830H 'of "last challenge success!" Is displayed, for example, the door is fully closed and the upper movable effect member 42A and the lower of the screen in the display area 4A are displayed. An effect is performed such that the side movable effect member 42B appears. On the other hand, although not particularly illustrated, the challenge success / failure pattern No. When 1 is determined, an image of “last challenge failure!” Is displayed as in the example of the screen shown in FIG. 171 (J ′) described above.

[Example of screen display of surprise]
FIGS. 175 to 177 are diagrams showing examples of screen displays of surprises. In the surprise, effects are performed according to the flow described below.

  First, as shown in FIG. 175 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, icons 800 corresponding to the first to tenth eyes are displayed as star marks. In the second R, the icon 800 corresponding to the second R is highlighted. Further, on the screen of the display area 4A, a title image 810C indicating "surprise" and a character image 811C are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (B), when the third R is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the third R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, while the third to eighth R eyes are displayed. The icon 800 corresponding to is switched to a round mark and displayed. At this time, the icons 800 corresponding to the third to eighth eyes are all displayed as white icons. Further, on the screen of the display area 4A, a presentation animation 840A dedicated to surprises is displayed, and a character band image 840B indicating a message dedicated to surprises is displayed. The character band image 840B is based on the character band pattern determined using the surprise character band drawing table of FIGS.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 175 (C), when the fourth R is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the fourth R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, while corresponding to the fifth R The icon 800 may be displayed as a green icon, and the icon 800 corresponding to the sixth R may be displayed as a blue icon. Such a change in the display color of the icon 800 is based on the icon pattern determined using the icon pattern lottery table of FIG. 24 and the icon change lottery table of FIGS. It may also occur at the start of the 5th to 8th eyes. Further, on the screen of the display area 4A, an effect moving image 840A and a character band image 840B different from those of the 3R-th are displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 176 (D), when the fifth R is started, the icon 800 corresponding to the fifth R is highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A, and the icon corresponding to the fifth R is displayed. 800 may be displayed as a red icon. That is, in the 4th to 8th eyes, the display color of the icon 800 changes so as to suggest that the round (11Rth) in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy to be performed is performed according to the color. Further, on the screen of the display area 4A, an effect moving image 840A and a character band image 840B different from those of the 3R-th are displayed. Such a change in the message shown in the character band image 840B also suggests that a round (11Rth) in which the V winning on the specific area 38A is easy is to be performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 176 (E), at the 5th R, on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 840C showing a meter showing an effect button and an effective period is displayed. Such a moving image 840C is based on the surprise pattern determined using the surprise pattern drawing table of FIG.

  Then, after the moving image 840C is displayed, when the depression operation button 9A is operated within the effective period or the effective period elapses without any depression operation button 9A being operated, as shown in FIG. 176 (F), the display area The upper movable effect member 42A and the lower movable effect member 42B appear in front of the screen 4A. That is, by appearance of such an effect member, it is informed that a round in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy to be performed is executed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 177 (G), a message image 840D such as “ST mode CHANCE” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A together with the character image 811C. As a result, it is informed that a round (11Rth) in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy to be performed is performed. Such a message image 840D is continuously displayed up to the 10th R. In addition, in 3rd R-8R of surprises, there may be cases where notification that a round that is easy to win a V winning will be performed may not be performed, and in such a case, the moving image of the last challenge as described above is displayed An image of “last challenge success!” Or “last challenge failure!” May be displayed based on the challenge success / failure pattern (see FIG. 171 (J ′), FIG. 174 (H ′)). Further, in the present embodiment, the display color of the icon may change even after notifying that the round in which the V winning is easy is to be performed, but the display color may not be changed after the notification. In addition, after such notification, the character band is not displayed, but may be displayed.

[Example screen display of V challenge]
178 to 180 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the V challenge. In the V challenge, effects are performed in the flow described below.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (A), for example, when the V challenge is started by transitioning from the ST mode, on the screen of the display area 4A, the condition of the continuation of the ST mode by the draw lottery machine and effect display is shown. A video 850A is displayed. In addition, if it is not a case where it shifts to ST challenge from V mode, you may make it show the conditions of rushing to ST mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, a moving image 850B showing a state in which the lottery machine starts to rotate is displayed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 178 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, after the opening of the second large winning opening 37 by the small hit is started, or in the second large winning opening 37 by the protrusion V. After the first short opening is started, a moving image 850C prompting to aim at the second large winning opening 37 by right-handing is displayed. At this time, in the case of a bump V, the moving image 350C continues to be displayed until the V winning in the specific area 38A is detected, but the V winning can not be detected for a predetermined time after the second large winning opening 37 is opened. In this case, a warning image indicating a warning message stating that “If you do not make a prize in the lower large prize winning opening immediately, you will not shift to the ST mode!” Is displayed in order to urge V winning in the specific area 38A. Then, when the V winning is detected in the bump V, the display as shown in FIG. 179 (D) and FIG. 179 (E) is performed. On the other hand, in the case of the small hit, the display as shown in FIG. 180 (D ′) and FIG. 180 (E ′) is performed at the timing after the opening of the second large winning opening 37 is finished. In addition, as a warning that the V winning is promoted in the sudden V, for example, the warning notification may be performed by only the voice. Further, the warning notification pattern is not limited to the one described above, and may be, for example, a pattern combining the output of voice and the operation of the movable effect member, and further, the opening time of the second big winning opening passes It is also possible to add means for giving a warning notification as the time goes by.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 179 (D), when the V winning is detected in the bump V, a moving image 850D is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, showing that the ball of V mark has come out from the lottery machine. Ru.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179E, on the screen of the display area 4A, an image 850E indicating that “ST mode continues!” Is displayed. As a result, it is informed that the ST mode is to be continued through the bump V. After such an image 850E is displayed, the screen of the display area 4A returns to the screen on which the effect display in the ST mode is performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 180 (D '), for example, in the case of a small hit, a moving image 850D' is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A showing a ball without a V mark coming out of the lottery machine. Ru. Such a moving image 850D 'is also displayed when all round games have ended without detection of a V winning on the specific area 38A in the bump V.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (E ′), the screen of the display area 4A returns to the screen on which the effect display of the ST mode is performed. That is, it returns to the display screen in the game state before shifting to the hit game state. It should be noted that if V winning is not detected in the bump V, regardless of the gaming state before shifting to the bump V, it will always shift to the time saving mode (short mode), and it will be an effect screen according to the time saving mode . Also, if the gaming state when the small hit is won is the final game in the short time mode (final game in the short time gaming state) or the final game in the ST mode (final game in the probability variation gaming state), the small hit gaming state After the end of, the transition to the special mode (non-probable variation gaming state and non-time-short playing state), and the effect screen according to the special mode. That is, when transitioning from the normal mode or the special mode to the V challenge by transitioning from the non-probability changing gaming state and the non-time saving gaming state to the big hit gaming state or small hitting gaming state of the bump V, for example If V winning in area 38A is detected, transition to ST mode is made after the big hit gaming state of the bump V concerned, but if V winning in specific area 38A is not detected at 1R of the bump V, time saving mode It will be migrated. On the other hand, in the case of the small hit gaming state, in principle, the effect mode at the time of the small hit winning is returned after the small hit gaming state is completed regardless of the presence or absence of the V prize.

[Effect pattern of additional bonus]
FIG. 181 is a diagram showing an effect pattern of the additional bonus. In the additional bonus, various effects are performed based on effect types A to N indicating the effect patterns determined using the additional bonus scenario table in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 181, in the effect type A, an effect moving image of “wait for character resurrection” is displayed, which shows a state where the cow character may appear in a partially seen state. In the effect type B, an effect moving image of “initial value determination” indicating how the initial value of the number of additions is determined using the roulette is displayed. In the effect type C, an effect animation of “character appearance failure” showing a state in which an opponent does not appear although an effect by tug of war is performed is displayed. In the effect type D, a "character appearance success-no combo" effect moving image is displayed, which shows a situation in which the opponent character appears but no other object appears. In the effect type E, a character of the opponent appears and, for example, a "character appearance success-combo present" animation showing the appearance of an object indicating the sun is displayed. In the effect type F, an opponent character appears and, for example, an object indicating the sun appears, and a character animation of "character appearance success-combo present-RUSH rush" including an image prompting continuous hitting of the effect button is displayed. Ru. In the effect type G, an effect moving image of “combo RUSH” which only urges continuous hitting of the effect button is displayed. In the effect type H, an effect moving image of “SP character appearance” showing how the SP character appears is displayed. In the effect type I, an effect moving image of "character resurrection" indicating how the cow character appears again is displayed. In the effect type J, prior to the effect moving image based on the effect type D being displayed, an effect moving image of “凛 凛 コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ 示 す 示 す showing the appearance of the character“ 凛 ”is displayed. In the effect type K, prior to the effect moving image based on the effect type E being displayed, an effect moving image of “凛 凛 コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ 有 有 示 す showing the appearance of the character“ 凛 ”is displayed. In the effect type L, prior to the effect moving image based on the effect type F being displayed, an effect moving image of “凛 凛 コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ コ ン ボ RUS RUS RUSH 突入” showing the appearance of the character “キ ャ ラ ク タ” is displayed . Although such effect types J to L have the same effect moving image based on each, the effect moving images after being displayed are different based on the effect types D to F, so different symbols and The name is attached. In the effect type M, after the end screen of the additional bonus is displayed, the effect moving image of “end screen-reversed” showing the character upside down is displayed. In the effect type N, an effect screen of “no effect” is displayed, in which the state of the effect is not shown. It should be noted that the opponent character is not limited to the one described above, and as shown in the character type lottery table of FIG. 82, a youth character or a middle age character may appear. In addition, the opponent character may appear in an attitude that is upside down or left over, or a plurality of characters may appear. Further, the objects are not limited to those described above. For example, an object indicating a month may appear or a plurality of objects may appear.

  The presentation rule of the additional bonus in the present embodiment is as follows. Basically, until the animated image of "character appearance failure" corresponding to the effect type C is displayed, an effect type D to F showing how the "Don-chan" character has won the battle by the tug of war with the bull character , J to L are displayed for each round, and the number of additions displayed at that time is added. A character or object relating to "combo" of effect types E, F, K, and L wins two or more consecutive battles in a tug of war, that is, an effect of "character appearance success" corresponding to effect types D and J. It may appear when the video is displayed continuously for two or more rounds. When the animation of "character appearance success" corresponding to the effect type D, J is displayed continuously for four or more rounds, the character or object related to the "combo" of the effect type E, F, K, L Will appear. When the effect animation of “character appearance success” corresponding to the effect types D and J is continuously displayed for three or more rounds, the number of additions greater than or equal to the number of additions displayed in the previous round is displayed. The effect animation of "凛 revived" corresponding to effect type J to L was displayed before the effect animation of "character appearance success" and was displayed immediately before "character appearance failure" corresponding to effect type C. It is displayed so as to continue the continuous number of "character appearance success". On the other hand, although the effect animation of "character resurrection" corresponding to effect type I is displayed after the effect animation display of "character appearance failure" corresponding to effect type C, "character appearance success" displayed immediately before that Is displayed after resetting the number of consecutive times. After the effect animations of "Blood Flower Resurrection" and "Character Resurrection" are displayed, the additional number equivalent to at least four rounds of the actual round (400 winning balls) is determined. In the effect movie of “combo RUSH” corresponding to the effect type G, the number of additions corresponding to “combo” is additionally displayed in accordance with the button operation.

[Example of screen display of bonus bonus]
FIGS. 182 to 185 are diagrams showing screen display examples of the additional bonus. In the additional bonus, effects are performed in the flow described below. FIGS. 182 to 184 are, for example, scenario number No. in the bonus scenario table (Bb) of FIG. 21 shows a screen display example according to 21. FIG. 185A shows, as an example, scenario number No. 1 in the bonus scenario table (Ab) of FIG. The example of a screen display according to 16 (the 4th R eye substantially) is shown. FIG. 185 (B) shows, as an example, the scenario number No. in the bonus scenario table (Ca) of FIG. The screen display example according to 1 (the 4th R eye substantially) is shown. 185 (C) to (F) show, as an example, scenario number No. 1 in the bonus scenario table (Ac) of FIG. The example of a screen display according to 1 (the substantially 4th R-the substantially 5th R) is shown. In the following description of the additional bonus, the number of rounds in which the actual round is executed is simply referred to as “1R-th,” “2R-th,” etc. unless otherwise specified.

  First, as shown in FIG. 182 (A), at the start of the first R, a title image 860 of “addition bonus” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. The title image 860 is displayed with a color based on the title pattern determined with reference to the title determination lottery table of FIG. 80 as a display color. The display color of such a title image 860 may be changed by operating the effect button. Although the number of actual rounds (the number of executions of the actual rounds) is shown at the upper left of the screen in the drawing for the sake of convenience, it is not actually displayed. Also in the drawings described below, the actual number of rounds is similarly shown at the upper left of the screen.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182 (B), when the first R is started, a presentation moving image 861 of “initial value determination” using a roulette is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. The effect moving image 861 shows that “200”, “300”, “400”, “500”, “600”, and “1500” change as the appearance of the roulette, and for stopping the operation of the roulette A meter indicating the effect button and the effective period is displayed as the effect. At this time, for example, the movement of the roulette is performed when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed during moving display of the position where the roulette comes out at "200" (during large highlighting in the figure) within the valid period. Is stopped, but not "200" as an outcome, but an outcome corresponding to the additional number (initial value) of effect type B specified in the bonus bonus scenario table is halted and displayed. In addition, when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated within the effective period, the operation of the roulette automatically stops after the effective period elapses, and the outcome corresponding to the additional number (initial value) of the effect type B is stopped and displayed. . Further, the blue meter display unit 900 and the red meter display unit 910 are displayed on the right end side on the screen of the display area 4A so as to be adjacent to the left and right together with the image prompting "right-handed". The blue meter display unit 900 is configured to display the number of paid-out balls counted using the paid-out ball counter as a vertical bar graph and display the number of paid-out balls in the lower column. The red meter display unit 910 is configured to display the total number of award balls counted using the total award ball counter as a vertical bar graph, and display the total number of award balls in the lower column. At this point in time, the red meter display unit 910 indicates that the total winning number is “0”. On the other hand, during execution of a substantial round including the 1R's eye, the value of the payout ball counter (payout ball number) is 10 each time the gaming ball wins the first large winning hole 36 or the second large winning hole 37 Increase. As a result, in the blue meter display unit 900, the number of payout prize balls is additionally displayed by 10 for each winning on the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37. FIG. 182 (B) shows a state in which “20” is displayed as the number of paid-out prize balls in the blue meter display portion 900.

  After that, when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed within the valid period, or when the pressing period 9A is not operated at all and the valid period elapses, the operation of the roulette is stopped. At this time, for example, when the output of the roulette stops at “600”, as shown in FIG. 182 (C), an image showing “+600” of the superimposing number determined as the initial value on the screen of the display area 4A. 862 is displayed. Then, after the predetermined time has elapsed (for example, after 2 s), “600” of the total winning balls is presented on the red meter display unit 910 by adding and displaying “+600” of the additional number. Also, in FIG. 182 (C), for convenience, in a state in which “+600” of the superimposing number is displayed on the screen, “600” is additionally displayed on the red meter display unit 910, but in practice The superimposing number is displayed on the screen, and the superimposing number is added and displayed on the red meter display unit 910 according to the fact that the superimposing number is switched to non-display. On the other hand, the blue meter display unit 900 additionally displays 10 pay-out balls for each winning until the end of the actual round, and for example, "40" is presented as the pay-out balls. In addition, when the actual number of winnings does not reach the upper limit winning number per round at the end of the actual round, a numerical value less than 100 is once displayed as the number of payout prize balls on the blue meter display unit 900. Even in this case, the value of the remaining prize ball counter is added to the payout ball counter, whereby a value corresponding to the upper limit payout ball number (100) is added to the payout ball counter. As a result, “100” is presented on the blue meter display unit 900 as the number of paid-out prize balls for the first R. Also, when the actual number of winnings exceeds the upper limit number of winnings per round, the remaining winnings ball counter value becomes “0” and the number exceeding the upper limit paying out balls is added to the paying out ball counter There is nothing to do. Therefore, even in such a case, “100” is presented as the payout prize ball number of the first R on the blue meter display unit 900 at the end of the first R, which is a substantial round. In the following description, the blue meter display unit 900 additionally displays the payout prize ball number “10” at a time, and appropriately omits the illustration about the increase in the payout prize ball number every time of the actual round. The description will be made mainly with respect to the addition display of the total number of prize balls displayed on the red meter display unit 910.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 182E, when it is time to execute the second R, a "character appearance success-no combo" effect animation 864 corresponding to the effect type D is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Ru. In this effect animation 864, it is shown that it is not clear whether or not the opponent's character appears in the tug of war (see FIG. 182E). At this time, an aura of a predetermined color is displayed on the background of the "Don-chan" character, and a presentation button and a meter of the effective period are displayed. The size of the effect button and the color of the aura are determined by lottery using the chance-up lottery table of FIG. Depending on the size of the effect button and the color of the aura, more additional numbers can be expected. In addition, although illustration description is abbreviate | omitted in the following, when the production animation of tug of war is displayed, the aura and presentation button determined using the table for chance-up lottery are displayed. Thereafter, when the depression operation button 9A is depressed within the effective period or the effective period elapses without any depression operation button 9A being operated, as shown in FIG. 182 (F), the effect animation 865 showing the result is displayed. Is displayed. In this effect animation 865, the appearance that the cow character appears downward based on the effect type D is shown, and an additional number (addition value) "+100" corresponding to the character appearance defined in the additional bonus scenario table is presented. Ru. Such effect moving images 864 and 865 are character effect pattern numbers determined using the character type lottery table of FIG. 84 (other than effect type D or J + next effect type F for the next round) based on the effect type and the number of additions. No. It is based on 4.

  After such effect moving images 864 and 865 are displayed, as shown in FIG. 182 (G), on the screen of the display area 4A, “+100” of the additional number presented in the previous effect moving image 865 is shown. An image 866 is displayed. After that, the red meter display portion 910 adds and displays “+100” of the additional number, and “700” is presented as the total award ball number.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 182 (H), similarly, when the 3R's eye is finished and the 4R's eye is executed, the aura and effect buttons are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the effect type D is supported. The effect animation 867 of "character appearance success-no combo" is displayed. In this effect moving image 867, an additional number (addition value) "+50" corresponding to the character appearance specified in the additional bonus scenario table is also presented. Such effect moving image 867 is a character effect pattern number No. determined using the character type lottery table of FIG. 84 (other than effect type D or J + next effect type F of the next round) based on the effect type and the number of additions. . It is based on 3. Although not particularly shown, after the effect animation 867 is displayed, an image showing “+50” of the superimposing number is displayed on the red meter display unit 910, and then the superimposing number is additionally displayed to display the grand prize ball. "800" will be presented as the number.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (I), when it is time to execute the 5th R, a character appearing success-combo corresponding to the effect type E is displayed via the display of the aura and the effect button on the screen of the display area 4A. A presentation video 868 of “Yes” is displayed. In this effect moving image 868, an additional number (addition value) "+50" corresponding to the character appearance defined in the additional bonus scenario table and an addition number (addition value) "+100" corresponding to the combo are presented. Such an effect moving image 868 is a character effect pattern determined using the character type lottery table of FIG. 85 (effect type E or F or K or L + additional value due to character appearance + 50) based on the effect type and the number of additions. Number No. It is based on 16.

  After such a presentation moving image 868 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 183 (J), “+100” and “+50” of the additional numbers presented in the preceding presentation moving image 868 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. An image 869 is displayed. After that, the red meter display portion 910 adds and displays “+100” and “+50” of the additional numbers, and “950” is presented as the total award ball number. Further, in the blue meter display unit 900, “480” is presented as the number of paid-out prize balls under execution for the 5th R, for example.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (K), at the time of execution of the 6R's, after the display of the aura and the effect button on the screen of the display area 4A, "character appearance success-combo available corresponding to effect type F An animation 870 of “RUSH rush” is displayed. In this effect moving image 870, an additional number (addition value) "+50" corresponding to the character appearance specified in the additional bonus scenario table and an additional number (addition value) "+100" corresponding to the combo are presented. A presentation button is displayed that suggests that the presentation of "combo RUSH" is executed in the round of. Such an effect moving image 870 is a character effect pattern determined using the character type lottery table of FIG. 85 (effect type E or F or K or L + additional value due to character appearance + 50) based on the effect type and the number of additions. Number No. However, as described below, the timing and content of adding the superimposing number to the red meter display unit 910 are different from those described above.

  That is, as shown in FIG. 183 (L), when the predetermined time passes in the 6Rth, “+100” and “+50” of the number of additions presented in the previous effect moving image 870 are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. While the image 871 shown is displayed, the effect button indicating “combo RUSH” in the next round is continuously displayed as it is, while the red meter display unit 910 displays “+100” and “+50” of these additional numbers. "" Is not added and displayed, and "950" which is the same as that of the previous time (when the fifth R end) is presented as the total number of prize balls. In addition, in the blue meter display unit 900, “580” is presented as the number of paid-out prize balls under execution of the 6th R, for example.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 183 (M), when it is time to execute the 7Rs, the effect moving image 872 of “combo RUSH” corresponding to the effect type G is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. In this effect moving image 872, an effect button and an effective period are provided to perform an effect of further adding the additional number “+100” corresponding to the combo among the additional numbers “+100” and “+50” in the previous image 871. The message "Continuous strike!" Is displayed with a meter indicating. When the pressing operation button 9A is operated within the effective period after the display of such a presentation moving image 872, within the range of "+100", the number of additions (addition value) corresponding to RUSH defined in the addition bonus scenario table, Based on the operation number pattern determined using the combo RUSH lottery table of FIG. 77, the number of additions “+100” corresponding to the combo is “+150” → “+200” each time the pressing operation button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times. Is displayed additively. FIG. 183 (M) shows a state in which the superimposing number corresponding to the combo is added and displayed from “+100” to “+150”. Thereafter, when the pressing operation button 9A is operated a predetermined number of times based on the operation number pattern within the effective period, the following image is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 183 (N), in addition to the superimposing number “+50” corresponding to the character appearance presented in the previous presentation moving image 872 on the screen of the display area 4A at the time of execution of the 7Rs, An image 873 indicating the additional number "+200" corresponding to the combo added by the combo RUSH is displayed. The additional number "+200" corresponds to the additional number corresponding to the combo presented before the execution of the "Combo RUSH" rendering of the "+100" among them, and the remaining "+100" by the "Combo RUSH" rendering It corresponds to the added amount. After that, the red meter display portion 910 adds and displays all of the superimposition numbers “+200” and “+50”, and “1200” is presented as the total award ball number. In addition, even if the predetermined number of operations is not reached within the valid period, or even when the pressing operation button 9A is not operated at all, the additional numbers corresponding to “combo” and “combo RUSH” are added and displayed. Also, on the screen, with the addition number corresponding to the appearance of the character, the addition number corresponding to the combo presented before the execution of the effect of "combo RUSH" remains as it is, and the addition number added by the effect of "combo RUSH" It may be displayed separately.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 183 (O), when the eighth R is executed, the aura and the effect button are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the effect of “character appearance failure” corresponding to effect type C A video 874 is displayed. At this time, in the additional bonus scenario table, a value to be added as the additional number in the corresponding eighth R is not defined. As a result, as shown in FIG. 183P, when the eighth R eye ends, an image showing the effect of the addition display is not displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the red meter display unit 910 Also, the number of additions will not be displayed additively.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 184 (Q), when the 10R is started, a presentation moving image 875 showing a cow character may be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. On the background of the cow character, an aura of a predetermined color is displayed. The color of this aura is determined by lottery using the table for bull character resurrection lottery in FIG. In the screen display example shown in FIG. 184 (Q), only the blue or green aura is displayed on the background of the cow character, and the No. 1 cow character revival pattern determined based on the effect type A. 1 or No. It corresponds to 2.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time (for example, 6 s) elapses, as shown in FIG. 184 (R), “wait for character revival” corresponding to effect type A on the screen of the display area 4A at the time of execution of the 10Rs. A presentation animation 876 is displayed. Such effect animation 876 is based on the bull character revival pattern (No. 1 to 4) determined using the bull character revival lottery table. Even when such a presentation moving image 876 is displayed, it is not shown in particular, but an image showing the effect of the addition display is not displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. The added number is not displayed as an addition.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 184 (S), when the 11Rth is started, a presentation animation 877 showing a cow character and a presentation button and a meter of the effective period is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. May be In this effect moving image 877, a cow character with an aura of a predetermined color added to the background is displayed. The color of the aura and the size of the effect button are determined by lottery using the cow character revival lottery table shown in FIG. In the screen display example shown in FIG. 184 (S), a red aura is displayed on the background of the cow character, and a presentation button having any of large, medium, and small sizes is displayed. No. of cattle character revival pattern determined It corresponds to any of 5-7.

  Thereafter, when the pressing operation button 9A is pressed within the valid period, or when the pressing period does not operate at all, the valid period elapses, as shown in FIG. 184 (T), on the screen of the display area 4A. , A presentation moving image 878 of “character return” corresponding to the presentation type I is displayed. That is, when the effect button is displayed by the effect moving image 877, the next effect moving image 878 can be displayed promptly by pressing the pressing operation button 9A within the effective period. This effect animation 878 is based on the cow character revival pattern (No. 5 to 7) determined using the cow character revival lottery table. After that, although not shown in the drawings, at the time of execution of the 12th and 13th eyes, effect moving images corresponding to the effect type D as shown in FIGS. 182 (E) to (G) are displayed and displayed as respective effect moving images The predetermined additional number is additionally displayed on the red meter display portion 910, and "1500" is presented on the red meter display portion 910 as the total award ball number that finally matches the total number specified in the additional bonus scenario table. It will be. After that, even when the 14th and 15th eyes are executed, “1500” is presented on the red meter display unit 910 as the total number of prize balls.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 185A, for example, at the time of execution of the fourth R, an “animation flower revival-combo nothing” corresponding to the effect type J is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. There is a case. FIG. 185 (A) shows a state in which only the character of "Kohana" is initially displayed. According to the effect moving image 879 based on the effect type J, after the “Yohana” character is displayed, effect moving images as shown in FIGS. 182 (E) to (G) are displayed, and are specified in the bonus bonus scenario table The red meter display unit 910 adds and displays "+100" of the superimposing number (addition value) corresponding to the appearance of the "Kohana" character. Such effect moving image 879 is a No of character effect pattern number determined using the character type lottery table (except for effect type D or J + effect type F of the next round) of FIG. 84 based on the effect type and the number of additions. . It is based on 4. Although not shown in particular, after that, the red meter display unit 910 adds and displays “+100” of the superimposition number to present “500” as the total prize ball number.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 185B, for example, when the fourth R is executed, there may be a case in which a presentation moving image 880 of “SP character appearance” corresponding to the presentation type H is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. . In the effect moving image 880, an additional number (addition value) "+1100" corresponding to the character appearance specified in the additional bonus scenario table is presented. Such effect moving image 880 is a No. of character effect pattern number determined using the character type lottery table (effect type C or H) of FIG. 82 based on the effect type and the number of additions. It is based on 2. Although not shown in particular, after that, the red meter display unit 910 additionally displays "+1100" as the superimposition number, thereby presenting "1500" which has reached the upper limit as the total prize ball number.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 185C, for example, at the time of execution of the fourth R, there may be a case in which a “moving image 881 of“ character appearance failure ”corresponding to the effect type C is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. . The effect moving image 881 is a No. of character effect pattern number determined using the character type lottery table (effect type C or H) of FIG. It is based on 1. After that, when it is time to execute the 5th R, as shown in FIG. 185 (D), an effect image 882 indicating a message of an end screen such as “end of bonus on completion still!” Is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, on the screen of the display area 4A, the display of the blue meter display unit 900 and the red meter display unit 910 is temporarily erased. Such an effect image 882 is displayed in the early stage in which the short release of the hit pattern 5 in the 5Rth is repeatedly performed a plurality of times. Further, effect image 882 is the No. of the end display pattern determined using the table for lottery on the end of the bonus in FIG. Although the display content is the same as 3, the effect image 882 is displayed as the first half of the effect video of “end screen − reverse” corresponding to the effect type M. By displaying such an effect image 882, although the additional bonus is not ended internally, the player receives an impression as to whether the additional bonus has ended.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185E, in the second half of the 5th R (immediately before the first opening of the middle), on the screen of the display area 4A, the "end screen-reverse" corresponding to the effect type M As the effect moving image, an effect moving image 883 representing the character turning upside down is displayed. In this effect moving image 883, “+1100” that reaches the upper limit value is presented as an additional number (addition value) corresponding to the character appearance specified in the additional bonus scenario table.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 185 (F), an image 884 indicating “+1100” of the number of additions presented in the preceding effect moving image 883 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. Then, the red meter display unit 910 additionally displays “+1100” as the superimposition number, thereby presenting “1500” which has reached the upper limit as the total number of prize balls.

[Effect of the gaming machine of the first embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the first embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the big hit gaming state, the first large winning opening 36 is controlled to be changed into the open state and the closed state multiple times in at least one round game, while the second The large winning opening 37 is controlled so that the V winning to the specific area 38A is easy long opening in at least one round game, and the second large winning opening 37 is specified in at least one other round game It is controlled such that the V opening to the area 38A is a difficult open short. Thereby, while performing the round game of the big hit gaming state a plurality of times using the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the number of times of execution of the round game, and The long opening of the special winning opening 37 can facilitate the transition to the probability change gaming state.

  In addition, as a big hit game state, while being able to execute the big winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit pattern 2) in which a round game leading to a short opening precedes a round game becoming long opening for the second big winning opening 37 is made possible, On the contrary, a large winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit patterns 4 to 11) in which a round game leading to a long opening is preceded by a round game opening for the short opening for the second large winning opening 37 is made executable. That is, since the timing (round number) at which a long open round game that facilitates transition to the probability variation gaming state is executed can be made different as the 1R-th or 11R-th eyes, such a round number as well as for the big hit gaming state It can enhance interest.

  In addition, according to the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33 where the game ball has won, the above-mentioned large winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit pattern 2) or the large winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit patterns 4 to 11) can be executed It is considered that the execution timing (round number) of the long open round game that makes it easy to shift to the probability variation gaming state can be made different as the 1R or 11R eye, so the player can set the round number to be long open. By checking, it is easy to determine which of the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 the corresponding big winning opening opening / closing pattern is executed based on which starting opening the game ball has won. It can be recognized.

  In addition, when V winning of the game ball in the specific area 38A is not detected for a predetermined time (approximately 13s) after the second big winning opening 37 starts opening, a warning notification urging V winning is performed, so the game The player can clearly recognize the round game in which the second large winning opening 37 which is easy to shift to the probability variation gaming state is long open even in a situation where it is difficult to recognize the number of rounds. That is, the player can reliably avoid such a disadvantage that the player does not shift to the probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state without making the game ball V prize in the specific area 38A without knowing.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the number of rounds is displayed by the icon 800 as the round number notification image in the big hit gaming state, and a round game in which V winning is easy is executed in advance. In the case where the prior notification for notifying that is performed using the icon 800, the display color of the icon 800 corresponding to the execution timing of the prior notification is changed, and such an icon 800 is used. The timing at which the display color changes is enhanced, and the player's interest in the transition to the probability change gaming state due to the V prize as well as the expectation for the round game where the V prize is easy is enhanced, thereby improving the interest of the game. It can be done.

  In addition, even in the gaming machine provided with only one large winning opening and provided with a specific area in which V winning can be made, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is provided. By doing this, the same effect can be obtained. In addition, even in the gaming machine which decides the transition to the probability variation gaming state according to the type of the winning symbol without using the specific area in which V prize can be won, a notification is made to that effect when a round game with easy winning is executed. The display color of the icon can be changed according to whether or not the number of rounds falls, and in such a case, the same effect as the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment can be obtained.

  Further, in the big hit gaming state, since the display color of the icon 800 is changed each time a round game is performed, the rendering effect can be gradually enhanced according to the number of rounds.

  In addition, the display color of the icon 800 is associated with the number of rounds, and the display color of the icon 800 is determined depending on whether the number of rounds corresponds to the execution time of the advance notification. The icon pattern can be determined so as to change the display color of the icon 800, and the player can gradually increase the expectation for the round game in which the V winning is easy each time the round game is performed.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, the game ball is V-prized in the specific area 38A during the big hit gaming state to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hitting gaming state, and the big hit gaming state The total award ball number is displayed on the red meter display unit 910 in each round game, and after the execution of the round game (1R in this embodiment) in which the V winning is easy, the total award displayed within the range of the total number The number of balls is changed. Thus, in the jackpot gaming state, the transition to the probability gaming state is made to be conscious, and the total number of prize balls displayed on the red meter display unit 910 does not reach the total number scheduled for the jackpot gaming state. Since it will be difficult to know how long the big hit gaming state will continue, it is possible to enjoy the playability by V winning and the playability of making the continuation of the big hit gaming state unclear, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. In addition, even in the gaming machine provided with only one large winning opening and provided with a specific area in which V winning can be made, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is provided. By doing this, the same effect can be obtained.

  In addition, during execution of the actual round game, blue meter display of the number of winning balls that were paid out or were scheduled to be paid out each time the game ball wins the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37 The number of winning balls corresponding to the number exceeding the upper limit winning number is not displayed as the number of winning balls even though display is possible in section 900, so the total number of winning balls displayed on red meter display portion 910 is finally displayed. There may be no contradiction in the number of payout prize balls displayed on the blue meter display portion 900 and the blue meter display portion 900.

  In addition, during execution of the actual round game, even if the gaming ball does not win until it exceeds the upper limit winning number for the first large winning opening 36 or the second large winning opening 37, the quantity corresponding to the upper limit winning number Therefore, even in such a place, the total award ball number displayed on the red meter display unit 910 and the disbursed award ball number displayed on the blue meter display unit 900 are contradictory to each other. Can be avoided.

  Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as a big hit gaming state in which a round game is executed a plurality of times, a round game having a possibility of V winning is executed twice, and only the first round game is V The first big hit gaming state (corresponds to the hit pattern 4 to 12) and the second big hit gaming state (corresponds to the hit pattern 2 that made only the last round game the V round that is easy to win). And a third big hit gaming state (corresponding to hit pattern 1) in which all the two round games are V games that are easy to win a round. That is, the first to third big hit gaming states have different patterns of the number of rounds in which a V-praid easy round game is executed, so it is possible to enhance the game characteristic of making it difficult to understand the V-prize easy round game. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the jackpot gaming state. In addition, even in the gaming machine provided with only one large winning opening and provided with a specific area in which V winning can be made, the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment is provided. By doing this, the same effect can be obtained.

  Specifically, in the first big hit gaming state, a round game in which the V winning easy is executed only for the first R is executed based on the hit patterns 4 to 12, and in the second big hit gaming state, the hit pattern 2 Based on the 11Rs, a round game with easy V winning is executed, and in the third big hit gaming state, a round game with easy V winning is performed in any of the 1R and 11R eyes. That is, in the third big hit gaming state, even if it is not possible to V-play the game ball in the specific area 38A in the 1R-th, transition to the probability change gaming state by V-winning the game ball in the specific area 38A in the 11R-th It can be done. Thereby, in the third big hit gaming state, the round game can be executed more advantageously for the player than the first and second big hit gaming states, and the player can carry out such third big hit gaming state You can advance the game while expecting

  In addition, since the player can recognize the number of rounds of round games for which V winning is easy is easy according to various effect patterns, it is possible to clearly indicate that the round game for which V is easy for winning is to be executed, It is possible to recognize the number of rounds in which the V winning easy round game is executed.

  In addition, according to the pachinko gaming machine of the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to avoid disadvantages such as not being transferred to the probability variation gaming state without knowing, by performing the alert notification prompting V winning. The following effects can also be obtained. That is, when a round game easy for V winning is performed on the 1R and 11R eyes (in the case of hit pattern 1), even if V winning on the specific area 38A is not detected in the first 1R, the last 11R Since the alert notification for promoting the V winning to the specific area 38A is performed in the eyes, such alert notification can be performed at an appropriate timing without unnecessarily performing such alert notification.

  In addition, during execution of the round game easy to win V, to the specific area 38A if the game ball does not pass the specific area 38A until the predetermined time (10s) elapses after the displacement member 39 is opened. Since a warning notification prompting passage of the game ball (V prize winning) is performed, such warning notification is appropriately performed without performing the game ball when the game ball can not pass through the specific area 38A with the displacement member 39 closed. It can be executed at the timing of

  In addition, when the game ball does not pass the specific area 38A during the predetermined time (10s) after the start of the period when the displacement member 39 is opened and the V winning in the specific area 38A is easy to be performed. Since a warning notification to urge passage of the game ball to the specific area 38A (V winning) is performed, such warning notification is executed at an appropriate timing when V winning on the specific area 38A becomes easier. be able to.

[Example of another embodiment]
Next, an example of another embodiment will be described using FIGS.

  FIG. 186 is a perspective view showing a special winning opening of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. In addition, about the component the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Further, the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 186 is provided with only one big winning opening.

  As shown in FIG. 186, a large winning opening 37 is provided in part of the game board. Inside the big winning opening 37, a ball passage 37B for guiding the gaming ball downward is formed. At the lower end of the ball passage 37B, a specific area 38A and a nonspecific area 38B are provided to be adjacent to each other on the left and right. At the position where it enters the ball passage from the special winning opening 37, a special winning opening count switch 370 is disposed. The specific area switch 380A is disposed in the specific area 38A, and the V winning of the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is detected by the specific area switch 380A. A non-specific area switch 380B is disposed in the non-specific area 38B, and the passage of gaming balls to the non-specific area 38B is detected by the non-specific area switch 380B. In the vicinity of the specific area 38A and the non-specific area 38B inside the ball passage 37B, a displacement member 39 'which is displaceable to the left and right is provided. In FIG. 186, the position in which the displacement member 39 'is indicated by a solid line is the position after displacement, and in FIG. 186, the position in which the displacement member 39' is indicated by an imaginary line is an initial position.

  The displacement member 39 'switches the specific area 38A to the open state or the closed state. As shown by the solid line in FIG. 186, when the displacing member 39 'is at the left fixed position farthest from the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is opened, and the game ball V wins to the specific area 38A. Make it easy. At this time, the displacement member 39 'forms a gap between the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the gaming ball to allow sufficient passage. Thus, the gaming ball guided from above the ball passage 37B can be guided downward between the right side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 'and pass through the specific area 38A. is there. In addition, when the displacement member 39 'is in the fixed position on the left side, a gap through which the gaming ball can pass is formed between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39'. Thus, the gaming ball guided from above the ball passage 37B may pass through the non-specific area 38B by passing between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 '.

  When the specific area is in the open state, the displacement member may be moved to a position where the gaming ball can not pass through the non-specific area. In addition, when the specific area is opened, the first position of the displacement member where the gaming ball can pass through the non-specific area, and the first position of the displacement member where the gaming ball can not pass through the non-specific area The displacement member may be fixed at any one of two positions, and the displacement member may be controlled to move to the first position or the second position according to the game mode or the like. For example, when the displacement member is fixed at the second position, the game ball always passes the specific area if winning in the special winning opening, which is more advantageous for the player than in the first embodiment described above. Game mode can be provided.

  On the other hand, as shown by phantom lines in FIG. 186, when the displacement member 39 'is in the fixed position on the right side closest to the specific area 38A, the specific area 38A is closed and the gaming ball to the specific area 38A is Make the V winning a prize impossible. At this time, the displacement member 39 'forms a gap through which the gaming ball can pass with the left side wall of the ball passage 37B. Thus, the gaming ball guided from above the ball passage 37B is guided downward between the left side wall of the ball passage 37B and the displacement member 39 'and always passes through the non-specific area 38B. Become.

  Even in a pachinko gaming machine using such a displacement member 39 ', it is possible to shift to a probability variation gaming state or the like after the end of the big hit gaming state which succeeded in V winning in the specific area 38A in the big hit gaming state.

  FIG. 187 is a view showing a special winning opening / closing pattern (modification) of a game machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 188 is a diagram showing a displacement member operation pattern corresponding to the special winning opening / closing pattern of FIG. 187. Note that the special winning opening / closing pattern and the displacement member actuation pattern shown in FIGS. 187 and 188 are applied to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 187, the modification of the special winning opening / closing pattern is basically the same as the special winning opening / closing pattern shown in FIG. 11, and is applied to one special winning opening provided with a specific region. It is a possible big winning opening opening and closing pattern. In such a big winning opening opening and closing pattern, as shown in FIG. 188, the displacement member 39 ′ for opening and closing the specific area 38A is, for example, activated at only the 1R and 11R eyes, and in the position shown by the solid line in FIG. It will be in a certain state. On the other hand, at the 2nd to 10th eyes and the 12th to 16th eyes, the displacement member 39 'is brought into the non-operational state, and is in the state shown by the phantom line in FIG. Even in a pachinko gaming machine in which such a special winning opening / closing pattern is applied to one large winning opening, the same effect as that of the first embodiment described above can be realized.

  FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing special symbol control processing of a gaming machine according to another embodiment of the present invention. In this special symbol control process, only one large winning opening is provided, but a specific area is not provided, and the main CPU determines whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol. Applies to

  As shown in FIG. 189, first, in S1000, the main CPU performs a process of determining the presence or absence of start storage. In this process, when the main CPU determines that there is no start memory for the special symbol game, that is, when data is not stored in the special symbol start storage area (0) to the special symbol start storage area (4), the data is stored. Repeat this process until stored. On the other hand, when the main CPU determines that there is start storage, the process proceeds to S1001.

  At S1001, the main CPU executes a big hit determination process. In this processing, the main CPU is for the high probability big hit determination table having a large number of big hit determination values or a low probability for a small number of big hit determination values depending on whether or not the gaming state flag indicates the probability variation gaming state. Refer to the big hit judgment table of. Further, the main CPU is extracted at the time of winning of the game ball, and refers to the random value for hit determination of the special symbol start storage area and the selected big hit determination table. Then, when the hit determination random number value and the big hit determination value match, the main CPU determines that it is a big hit. That is, the main CPU determines whether or not to make the jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, either a big hit or a loss is determined as a result of the special symbol game. When this process ends, the process moves to S1002.

  In S1002, the main CPU determines whether the determination result of S1001 is a big hit. In this process, when the main CPU determines that the game is a big hit, it shifts the process to S1003. On the other hand, if the main CPU determines that it is not a big hit, that is, if it determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S1000.

  At S1003, the main CPU controls the jackpot gaming state. That is, the main CPU performs a large winning opening open display command, a large winning opening open data setting, and the like. When this process ends, the process moves to S1004.

  In S1004, the main CPU performs processing to determine whether or not the control of the jackpot gaming state executed in S1003 is based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit. If it is determined that it is based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, the processing is shifted to S1006. If it is determined that it is not based on the special symbol of the probability variation big hit, the processing is shifted to S1005.

  In S1005, the main CPU performs control of the non-probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state which started control in S1003. That is, in the big hit gaming state based on a special symbol other than the definite variation big hit, it will shift to the non-probable variation playing state after the end. When shifting to such a non-probability changing gaming state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

  In S1006, the main CPU performs control of the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state which started the control in S1003. That is, in the big hit gaming state based on the special symbol of the definite variation big hit, it will shift to the probability changing gaming state after the end thereof. When shifting to such a probability change gaming state, the main CPU shifts the processing to S1000 again.

  In a pachinko gaming machine to which such special symbol control processing is applied, by providing the same effect mode and the like as the first embodiment described above, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game for the easy-to-win round to the big winning opening it can.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment, which has substantially the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and additionally achieves different game characteristics and specifications, with reference to FIGS. I will explain in detail. In addition, about the component the same as that of 1st Embodiment mentioned above, or similar, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

[Game board]
FIG. 190 is a front view of the game board according to the second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, on the left side and the right side of the stage 31, a first passing gate 35A and a second passing gate 35B are provided so that they can be aimed by hitting left and right. Although not particularly illustrated, a first pass gate switch is provided behind the first pass gate 35A, and a second pass gate switch is provided behind the second pass gate 35B. Basically, when the player strikes the left, the game ball is likely to pass through the first passing gate 35A by flowing down the left side of the stage 31, and the passing of the game ball in the first passing gate 35A is the first pass gate switch When the signal is detected, the main control circuit 60 is supplied with a predetermined detection signal corresponding thereto. On the other hand, when the player strikes the right, the game ball is likely to pass through the second passing gate 35B by flowing down the right side of the stage 31. Then, a predetermined detection signal corresponding thereto is supplied to the main control circuit 60. Such a first passing gate 35A and a second passing gate 35B are basically provided as those pertaining to the normal symbol lottery, but in the present embodiment, they function as a mechanism for starting control of the round game. In addition to this, it is also used as a device for making a player select a large winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit pattern) described later. Further, in the present embodiment, the first starting opening 32 and the first starting opening 32 may be such that the game ball can get a starting winning prize in any of the first starting opening 32 and the second starting opening 33 regardless of right or left hitting. Both of the second starting opening 33 are lower than the second big winning opening 37, and are located at a position where gaming balls flow down from both the left and right directions. As an example, the first starting opening 32 is adjacent to the left of the second starting opening 33 It is provided to be located. According to the arrangement of the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33, the upper end surface of the cover member 43 without entering the second large winning opening 37 by, for example, hitting the right in the big hit gaming state The game ball which has flowed down along may start winning in any of the first starting opening 32 or the second starting opening 33. That is, in the jackpot gaming state, there is a possibility that both the start memory according to the first special symbol and the start memory according to the second special symbol may be increased. The same applies to gaming states other than the jackpot gaming state.

[Large winning opening opening and closing pattern (hit pattern)]
FIG. 191 is a diagram showing a special winning opening / closing pattern of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, as the special winning opening / closing pattern (hit pattern), a hit pattern 14 is newly defined in addition to the same hit patterns 1 to 13 as those according to the first embodiment described above. The hit pattern 14 is a hit pattern that occurs during a definite variation bonus to be described later, and in which the specified number of rounds is 12R and the actual number of rounds is specified as 2R. The hit pattern 14 is defined so that the second large winning opening 37 becomes the opening and closing pattern A at the 1R and 11R eyes, and the first large winning opening 36 becomes the opening and closing pattern H at the 2R-10R and 12R eyes. ing. That is, in the hit pattern 14, only the 1R and 11R eyes correspond to a substantial round game, and a V prize in the specific area 38A is executed as an easy round in any of the 1R and 11R eyes, so that the probability change game Transition to the state is implemented as an easy open / close pattern.

[Table for winning symbol determination]
FIG. 192 is a view showing a hit symbol determination table of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The hit symbol determination table is stored in the main ROM 62, and is referred to in the special symbol determination process of the main CPU 61 (see FIG. 102). As shown in the figure, as the winning symbol determination table, the big hit symbol determination table (first special symbol) according to the first special symbol, and the big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol) according to the second special symbol And a small hitting symbol determination table (second special symbol) according to the second special symbol. In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, when the main CPU 61 determines that the big hit is made in the big hit determination process (see S178 in FIG. 101), the big hit symbol determination table (first special symbol) Alternatively, the big hit symbol is determined when the big hit symbol is determined using the big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol) and the small CPU is determined by the main CPU 61 in the small hit determination process (see S179 of FIG. 101). A small hit symbol is determined using a table (second special symbol). The big hit determination process and the small hit determination process are performed by random number lottery which extracts a predetermined random number from a random number range of 0 to 65535, for example. For example, in the non-probability changing gaming state, when the jackpot probability is relatively low 1 / 239.18 (274/65536), and one of random numbers 0 to 273 defined as the jackpot determination value is extracted, the jackpot It will be won. On the other hand, in the probability variation gaming state, when the jackpot probability is relatively high 1 / 81.92 (800/65536), and one of the random numbers from 0 to 799 defined as the jackpot judgment value is extracted, the jackpot is won It becomes. In addition, when it is not big hit winning either in the definite variation gaming state and non definite variation gaming state, small hitting probability is made 1 / 299.25 (219/65536), either of 800-1018 specified as the small hitting decision value If a random number is extracted, a small hit is won. If random numbers other than these are extracted, it will be a loss that is neither a big hit nor a small hit.

  The jackpot symbol determination table (first special symbol) may be awarded according to jackpot symbols 1 to 3 and jackpot symbols 1 to 3 that can be determined when the result of jackpot determination according to the first special symbol is a jackpot win The number of time saving (100 times or 30 times) and lottery value information (selection rate) for determining the big hit symbols 1 to 3 by random number lottery are defined. Although the lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value within a predetermined random number range (0 to 99), for convenience, FIG. 192 shows the selection rate. That is, in the special symbol determination process using the big hit symbol determination table (first special symbol), the big hit symbol 1 is determined as the first special symbol with a probability that the selectivity will be 5/100, and 100 times as the number of time reductions The big hit symbol 2 is determined as the first special symbol with a probability that the selectivity will be 45/100, and 30 times will be given as the number of time reductions, and the first special symbol with a probability that the selectivity will be 50/100 As the jackpot symbol 3 is determined, 30 times are given as the number of time savings. In addition, the time reduction number is granted on the condition of the big hit in the non short time gaming state, after the end of the big hit gaming state according to the condition, non-probability variation without transitioning to the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) It is defined as being granted only when shifting to the gaming state.

  The jackpot symbol determination table (second special symbol) is according to the jackpot symbol 1, 2, 4 and the jackpot symbol 1, 2, 4 in which the result of the jackpot determination according to the second special symbol can be determined in the case of a jackpot win The number of time reductions (100 times or 30 times) that can be given, and lottery value information (selection rate) for determining the jackpot symbols 1 to 3 by random number lottery are defined. Even in this big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol), the lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value within a predetermined random number range (0 to 99), but for convenience, 192 shows the selectivity. That is, in the special symbol determination process using the big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol), the symbol 1 is determined as the second special symbol with a probability that the selectivity will be 8/100 and 100 times as the number of time saving The big hit symbol 2 is determined as the second special symbol with a probability that the selection rate is 2/100 and 30 times is given as the number of time reductions, and the second special symbol is given a probability of 90/100 As the jackpot symbol 4 is determined, 100 times are given as the number of time savings. In addition, the number of time reductions granted using the big hit symbol determination table (second special symbol) is also granted on the condition of the big hit in the non-time saving gaming state, and the end of the big hit gaming state according to the condition After that, it is defined as being granted only when shifting to the non-probability gaming state without shifting to the probability gaming state (ST gaming state).

  The small hit symbol determination table (second special symbol) is to determine the small hit symbol that can be determined when the result of the small hit judgment related to the second special symbol is the small hit, and the small hit symbol by random number lottery And the lottery value information (selection rate) of Also in this small hitting symbol determination table (second special symbol), the lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value within a predetermined random number range (0 to 99), but for convenience, FIG. 192 shows the selectivity. That is, in the special symbol determination process using the small hit symbol determination table (second special symbol), the small hit symbol is determined as the second special symbol with a probability that the selectivity will be 100/100. Since the gaming state basically does not change before and after transition to the small hitting gaming state triggered by the small hitting win, the number of time reductions corresponding to the small hitting symbol is not defined.

  By having such a big hit symbol determination table, in the present embodiment, the specifications regarding the time saving game state are different from those in the first embodiment described above. That is, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the probability variation gaming state (ST gaming state) after the end of the big hit gaming state, as in the first embodiment described above, it is digested 190 times as the number of games (number of fluctuations of special symbol) The odd change gaming state continues until the momentary short game state is also continued until the number of times of the game is absorbed 190 times in conjunction with the positive change gaming state. On the other hand, if there is a big hit in the non short time gaming state, and accordingly there is a big hit gaming state, and if it shifts to the non positive variation gaming state after the big hit gaming state ends, it can not shift to the probability variation gaming state Is a time-saving gaming state in which the number of time-savings is up to 100 times or up to 30 times depending on the jackpot symbols specified in the table for determining the jackpot symbols. However, if there is a big hit in the short time game state, and accordingly there is a big hit game state, and if it shifts to the non probability game state without being able to shift to the probability change game state after the end of the big hit game state, Without relying on the jackpot symbol determination table will always be a time-saving gaming state up to 100 times of time reduction.

  In addition, the big hit symbol 1 specified on the big hit symbol determination table corresponds to the combination pattern of the decorative symbol "3" or "7", and the big hit symbol 2 has the decorative symbol "1" or "5". The big hit symbol 3 corresponds to the combination mode of “2”, “4”, or “6”, and the big hit symbol 4 corresponds to the combination pattern of “2”, “4” or “6”. It corresponds to what becomes a combination aspect of 8 ".

[Pattern selection table]
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a hit pattern selection table of the game machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. The hit pattern selection table is stored in the main ROM 62, and is referred to in a hit pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 197) of the hit pattern selection process of the main CPU 61 described later. As shown in the figure, as a table for selecting a hit pattern, a table for selecting a hit pattern (big hit symbol 1) related to a big hit symbol 1 and a hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2) related to a big hit symbol 2 and a big hit A hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 3) according to the symbol 3 and a hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 4) according to the big hit symbol 4 are provided. In the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol is determined by the main CPU 61 in the special symbol determination process, the hit pattern selection table corresponding to the determined big hit symbol is referred to.

  The hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 1) is random number lottery of hit pattern 1 and hit pattern 1 which can be determined based on the value (“01H” and “02H”) of the gate passage flag described later and the big hit symbol 1 And the lottery value information (selection rate) to be determined. The lottery value information is actually defined as a predetermined value within a predetermined random number range (0 to 99), but for convenience, FIG. 193 shows the selection rate. The selectivity is similarly shown in the other tables shown in FIG. The gate passage flag is set to "01H" when the passage of the game ball is detected first by the first passage gate switch after the determination of the big hit symbol, while the second passage gate switch is made first This is an internal flag that is set to “02H” when the passage of the game ball is detected. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 1), when the big hit symbol 1 is determined, the gate passing flag is either "01H" or "02H", The hit pattern 1 is determined with the probability that the selectivity will be 100/100.

  The hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2) is a hit pattern 1 to 3 and 14 that can be determined based on the gate passing flag values ("01H" and "02H") described later and the hit symbol 2 and a hit pattern It defines lottery value information (selection rate) for determining 1 to 3 and 14 by random number lottery. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2), when the big hit symbol 2 is determined and the gate passing flag is "01H", the selectivity is 5 / The hit pattern 1 is determined with a probability of 100, and the hit pattern 14 is determined with a probability of 95/100. Further, in the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2), when the big hit symbol 2 is determined and the gate passing flag is "02H", the selectivity is 2 Hit pattern 1 is determined with a probability of / 100, hit pattern 3 is determined with a probability of 3/100 selectivity, and hit pattern 3 is determined with a probability that the selectivity is 95/100. That is, when the game ball passes through the first pass gate 35A on the left side preferentially when the big hit gaming state is started based on the big hit symbol 2, the probability of becoming a probability variation bonus of the hit pattern 14 is high, substantially round Although the number is small, the probability of becoming a big hit gaming state that easily shifts to the probability variation gaming state from the possibility of the V winning in the specific area 38A is increased. On the other hand, if the game ball passes the second pass gate 35B on the right with priority, the possibility of becoming a challenge bonus for the hit pattern 3 becomes high, and it is difficult to shift to the probability change gaming state The probability of becoming a gaming state increases.

  The hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 3) is random number lottery of hit pattern 3 and hit pattern 3 which can be determined based on the value ("01H" and "02H") of the gate passage flag described later and the big hit symbol 3. And the lottery value information (selection rate) to be determined. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 3), when the big hit symbol 3 is determined, the gate passing flag is either "01H" or "02H". The hit pattern 3 is determined with the probability that the selectivity will be 100/100.

  The hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 4) is a hit pattern 1, 4 to 12 that can be determined based on the gate passing flag values ("01H" and "02H") described later and the big hit symbol 4 and a hit pattern It defines with lottery value information (selection rate) for determining 1, 4 to 12 by random number lottery. In the hit pattern determination process using the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 4), when the big hit symbol 4 is determined, the gate passing flag is either "01H" or "02H". The hit pattern 1 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 10/100, the hit pattern 4 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 8/100, and the hit pattern 5 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 1/100. And the hit pattern 6 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 1/100, the hit pattern 7 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 4/100, and the hit pattern 8 is the probability that the selectivity is 11/100. The hit pattern 9 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 30/100, and the hit pattern 10 is determined with the probability that the selectivity is 5/100, and the selectivity is 20/100. Rate per pattern 11 is determined by, per pattern 12 is determined by the probability that the selected rate is 10/100.

  In addition, also in this embodiment, when the round game of the big hit gaming state is executed according to the hit pattern, the same effect mode as the first embodiment described above is executed, but the first embodiment described above You may make it perform an effect mode different from.

[Startup storage area in secondary control circuit]
FIG. 194 is a diagram for describing a starting storage area in the sub control circuit of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention. As shown in the figure, in the work RAM 73 of the sub control circuit 70, as in the main RAM 63 of the main control circuit 60, a start storage area for storing hold information on a special symbol game as start storage is secured. . The start storage related to the first special symbol is stored in the first start storage area 731, and the start storage related to the second special symbol is stored in the second start storage area 732. The first startup storage area 731 has an 8-bit startup storage area (1-1) and an startup storage area (1-2), and the second startup storage area 732 also has an 8-bit startup storage area (2 -1) and a start storage area (2-2).

  As shown in FIG. 194, the start storage itself is composed of 4 bits. In the present embodiment, on the basis of the information indicating the random number for hitting determination included in the starting winning command and the information indicating the random number for deciding the winning symbol, the big hit symbol showing the big hit or small hit or loss at the time of definite variation or non definite variation The starting memory is represented by a 4-bit binary code to indicate the type of. The start winning command also includes information indicating which of the first start opening 32 and the second start opening 33 is the start winning. For example, as the contents of expression of the starting memory according to the first special symbol, "0001" is lost, "0010" is "big hit symbol 1" at big change, big hit, "0011" is big change at definite change or non definite change 1) Big hit, "0100" is definite variation "big hit pattern 2" Big hit, "0101" is definite variation or non definite variation "big hit design 2" big hit, "0111" is definite variation "big hit design 3" big hit, "1000" corresponds to "big hit pattern 3" big hit at the time of definite variation or non definite variation. As the contents of expression of the starting memory concerning the second special symbol, "0001" is lost, "0010" is "big hit symbol 1" when big change big hit, "0011" is "big hit symbol 1" when positive change or no definite change Big hit, "0100" is a definite change "big hit pattern 2" Big hit, "0101" is a definite change or non definite change "big hit design 2" big hit, "0111" is a definite change "big hit design 4" big hit, "1000" "The jackpot pattern 4" jackpot when fixed variation or non definite variation, "1001" corresponds to a small hit. The free space is "0000".

  Such start storage is written, for example, sequentially from the smaller start storage number allocated to the first start storage area 731 and from the upper 4 bits of the free space. The first start storage area 731 reads the start storage from the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (1-1), and then the start storage to be read is read from the start storage area (1-2). -1) and further from the lower 4 bits to the upper 4 bits. The starting memory in the second starting memory area 732 is similar. That is, in the first start storage area 731 and the second start storage area 732, the start storages are read out in order from the oldest one by the FIFO method. However, in the case where the starting storage coexists in both the first starting storage area 731 and the second starting storage area 732, the starting storage is preferentially read from the second starting storage area 732.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 194, the first start storage area 731 includes the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (1-1), the lower 4 bits of the start storage area (1-1), and the start storage area (1- 2) upper order 4 bits, start order storage area (1-2) lower order 4 bits, "0001" (loss), "0001" (loss), "0001" (loss), "1000" (time of definite change or The "big hit pattern 3" big hit) at the time of non-deterministic change is stored. In the second start storage area 732, the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (2-1), the lower 4 bits of the start storage area (2-1), the upper 4 bits of the start storage area (2-2), In the order of the lower 4 bits of the start storage area (2-2), "0001" (loss), "0010" ("big hit symbol 1" big hit at the time of positive variation), "0000" (empty area), "0000" (empty Area) is stored. In this case, assuming that no further start memory is generated, the jackpot gaming state corresponding to "big hit symbol 1" is obtained based on the start memory "0010" of the second start memory area 732 and after the end of the jackpot gaming state Specifically, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state, and in this probability variation gaming state, it shifts to the big hit gaming state corresponding to the "big hit symbol 3" based on the start storage "1000" of the first start storage area 731. In the big hit gaming state corresponding to "big hit symbol 3", since the round game is executed based on the hit pattern 3, information indicating the determination result of the hit that is difficult to shift to the probability variation gaming state is stored as the starting memory It will be done. In the case where such start storage is stored in the first start storage area 731, in the present embodiment, that effect is notified. This will be described later.

[Control by main CPU and sub CPU]
Next, processing executed by the main CPU 61 and the sub CPU 71 of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 195 to 204 show the processing by the main CPU 61, and FIGS. 205 to 215 show the processing by the sub CPU 71. The description of the same or similar processing as the processing according to the first embodiment described above will be simplified or omitted as appropriate.

[Special symbol control process]
FIG. 195 is a flowchart showing special symbol control processing executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol control process of FIG. 195 is configured by substantially the same steps as the special symbol control process of FIG. 100, but the following points are largely different. That is, the main CPU 61 executes the hit pattern selection process of S1104 after finishing the special symbol display time management process of S1103, and when the process of S1104 ends, shifts to the hit start interval management process of S1105. Since the hit pattern selection process of S1104 is added, the value (03H) of the control state flag is assigned to the step of S1104, and the value of the control state flag corresponding to each step after S1105. Are raised one by one from those shown in FIG. That is, when the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the selection of the hit pattern, the main CPU 61 determines the hit pattern, and then sets the value (04H) indicating the hit start interval management in the control state flag. In such hit pattern selection processing, a hit pattern corresponding to the present jackpot gaming state is determined. Note that each process of S1103 to S1109 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

[Special symbol display time management process]
FIG. 196 is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation time management process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol variation time management process of FIG. 196 is configured by substantially the same steps as the special symbol control process of FIG. 104, but the following points are largely different.

  As shown in FIG. 196, the main CPU 61 executes the processing of S1200 to S1203 in the same manner as S220 to S223 of FIG. 104, and after finishing the processing of S1203, executes the hit pattern selection processing in the gaming state flag in S1204. Perform processing to set a value (03H) to be set. When this process ends, the process moves to S1217.

  Also, the main CPU 61 executes the processing of S1205 to S1214 in the same manner as S224 to S233 of FIG. 104, and when it is determined in S1214 that the game is a small hit, a value indicating the start interval management processing in the game state flag ( 04H) is set (S1215). When this process ends, the process moves to S1216.

  Then, the main CPU 61 executes the processing of S1216 to S1218 in the same manner as S234 to S236 in FIG. 104, or controls the value (08H) indicating the end processing of the special symbol game in S1219 similarly to S238 in FIG. Execute the process to set to. When these processes are completed, the special symbol display time management process routine is ended.

  That is, after the value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection processing is set in the control status flag in S1204, the waiting time timer is not set and the value of the next control status flag (04H until the hit pattern is determined. ) Is not set. Note that after the processing of S 1204, the waiting time timer is configured to be set, and if the hitting pattern is not determined when the set waiting time timer reaches 0, either of the hit patterns is forcibly set. It may be selected.

  If it is determined in S1214 that the hit is a small hit, the hit pattern 13 is uniquely determined. Therefore, in S1215, the value (04H) indicating the hit start interval management process is set in the control state flag. Ru. It should be noted that a plurality of types of small hits are provided with a plurality of corresponding hit patterns, and even in the case of small hits, a hit pattern selection process is performed to obtain a type of hit pattern corresponding to a plurality of types of small hits. May be determined.

[Pattern selection process]
FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing a hit pattern selection process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit pattern selection process is performed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 197, in S1300, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection processing. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process, the process proceeds to step S1301. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection processing, the hit pattern selection processing routine is ended.

  In S1301, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the gate passage flag is “00H”. The gate passage flag is an internal flag indicating which one of the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B is the first passage of the game ball detected. If the gate passage flag is "00H", it indicates that passage of the game ball has not been detected for any of the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B. Further, when the gate passage flag is "01H", it indicates that passage of the game ball is detected first for the first passage gate 35A, and when the gate passage flag is "02H", the second passage gate 35B is the most. It indicates that the passage of the game ball has been detected earlier. If the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the gate passing flag is “00H”, it ends the hit pattern selection processing routine, and if it determines that the value is not “00H”, the processing proceeds to S1302.

  In S1302, the main CPU 61 extracts a hit pattern determination random number, and executes a hit pattern determination process based on the random number. In this process, the main CPU 61 selects a hit pattern selection table according to the big hit symbol as the special symbol determined in the special symbol determination process (see FIG. 102), and determines the value of the gate passing flag and the extracted hit pattern The hit pattern is determined based on the random number. Here, in the case of the big hit symbols 1, 3 and 4, the kind of hit pattern which can be determined even if the value of the gate passing flag is either "01H" or "02H" is not changed, but in the case of the big hit symbol 2 Is that if the value of the gate passing flag is “01H”, one of the hit patterns 1 and 14 is determined, while if the value of the gate passing flag is “02H”, one of the hit patterns 1 to 3 Is determined, and the type of hit pattern is changed according to the value of the gate passage flag. Thereby, when the player desires a higher probability of shifting to the probability change gaming state when starting the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2, the first passing game to the first passing gate 35A If you want to hit the ball left to strike the ball, on the other hand, if you want to get more balls out, it is possible to strike the game ball first to pass the second pass gate 35B You can do If the process of S1302 ends, the process moves to S1303.

  In S1303, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set data indicating the determined hit pattern. The displacement member operation pattern data for opening and closing the specific area 38A is also set here. The main CPU 61 performs round control based on the data indicating the hit pattern and the displacement member operation pattern data. If this process ends, the process moves to S1304.

  In S1304, the main CPU 61 sets (stores) a hit pattern determination command in a predetermined area of the main RAM 63. The hit pattern determination command is data indicating the start of the round game. The hit pattern determination command is supplied from the main CPU 61 of the main control circuit 60 to the sub CPU 71 of the sub control circuit 70. If this process ends, the process moves to S1305.

  In S1305, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value (for example, 5 seconds) of the waiting time timer as the hit start interval time corresponding to the determined hit pattern in the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S1306.

  In S1306, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting the value (04H) indicating the hit start interval management processing in the control state flag of the main RAM 63. When this process ends, the process moves to S1307.

  At S1307, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the value of the gate passage flag to “00H”. When this process ends, the process moves to S1308.

  At S1308, the main CPU 61 clears the random number for hit pattern determination used in the hit pattern determination processing, and ends the hit pattern selection processing routine.

[Perform start interval management process]
FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a hit start interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit start interval management process of FIG. 198 is configured in substantially the same steps as the hit start interval management process of FIG. Specifically, the processes of S1400 and S1407 shown in FIG. 198 are merely performed by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1400 to S1411 are the processes of S240 to S251 shown in FIG. And substantially the same.

[Wait time management process before the big winning opening reopening]
FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing a waiting time pre-reopening waiting time management process executed by the main CPU 61. The waiting time management process before the special winning opening in FIG. 199 is also configured in substantially the same steps as the waiting time management process before the special winning opening in FIG. Specifically, the processes of S1500 and S1504 shown in FIG. 199 are merely performed by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1500 to S1508 are the processes of S260 to S268 shown in FIG. And substantially the same.

[A big winning opening open processing]
FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing a special winning opening open process executed by the main CPU 61. The special winning opening open processing of FIG. 200 is also configured in substantially the same steps as the special winning opening opening processing of FIG. Specifically, the processes of S1600, S1611, and S1614 shown in FIG. 200 are merely performed by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1600 to S1615 are S270 to S270 shown in FIG. It is substantially the same as the process of S285.

[Percent End Interval Management Process]
FIG. 201 is a flowchart showing the hit / end interval management process executed by the main CPU 61. The hit end interval management process of FIG. 201 is configured in substantially the same steps as the hit end interval management process of FIG. Specifically, the processes of S1700 and S1702 shown in FIG. 201 are merely performed by raising the value of the control state flag. Further, in S1708, the main CPU 61 performs processing for setting "30" or "100" as the number of time reductions corresponding to the big hit symbol to the value of the time reduction number counter of the main RAM 63. Thus, all the processes in S1700 to S1709 are substantially the same as the processes in S290 to S299 shown in FIG. The number of times may be three or more, or may be only one.

[Special symbol game end processing]
FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing the special symbol game end process executed by the main CPU 61. The special symbol game end process of FIG. 202 is configured by substantially the same steps as the special symbol game end process of FIG. Specifically, the process of S1800 shown in FIG. 202 is merely performed by raising the value of the control state flag, and all the processes of S1800 and S1801 are substantially the same as the processes of S300 and S301 shown in FIG. Is the same.

[Switch input processing]
FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing switch input processing executed by the main CPU 61. The switch input process of FIG. 203 is configured by substantially the same steps as the switch input process of FIG. 94, and is configured by newly added steps. Specifically, the processes of S1900 to S1903 shown in FIG. 203 are the same as the processes of S90 to S93 shown in FIG. 94, and after the process of S1903, the main CPU 61 performs the gate switch check process of S1904. It is configured. The gate switch check process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the switch input processing routine ends.

[Gate switch check process]
FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing gate switch check processing executed by the main CPU 61. This gate switch check process is performed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 204, in S2000, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the control state flag is a value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection processing. If the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is the value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection process, the process proceeds to step S2001. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the control state flag is not the value (03H) indicating the hit pattern selection processing, it ends the gate switch check processing routine.

  In S2001, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether the value of the gate passage flag is “00H”. When the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the gate passage flag is "00H", that is, at the time of execution of the hit pattern selection process, the game ball passes through for both the first passage gate 35A and the second passage gate 35B. If not yet detected, the process moves to S2002. On the other hand, when the main CPU 61 determines that the value of the gate passing flag is not “00H”, the main CPU 61 ends the gate switch check processing routine.

  In S2002, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not passage of the gaming ball in the first passage gate 35A is detected based on a detection signal from the first passage gate switch. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball in the first passage gate 35A is detected, the process proceeds to S2003, and it is determined that the passage of the game ball in the first passage gate 35A is not detected. If yes, move the process to S2005.

  In S2003, the main CPU 61 acquires a hit pattern determination random number, and stores the hit pattern determination random number in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 63. After this process ends, the process moves to S2004.

  At S2004, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the value of the gate passage flag to “01H”. Thus, the main CPU 61 recognizes that the gaming ball has passed the first passage gate 35A first. When this process ends, the gate switch check process routine ends.

  In S2005, the main CPU 61 performs processing to determine whether or not passage of the game ball in the second passage gate 35B is detected based on a detection signal from the second passage gate switch. In this process, when the main CPU 61 determines that the passage of the game ball in the second passage gate 35B is detected, the process proceeds to S2006, and it is determined that the passage of the game ball in the second passage gate 35B is not detected. If so, the gate switch check processing routine is ended.

  In S2006, the main CPU 61 acquires a hit pattern determination random number, and stores the hit pattern determination random number in a predetermined storage area of the main RAM 63. After this process ends, the process moves to S2007.

  At S2007, the main CPU 61 performs processing to set the value of the gate passage flag to “02H”. Thereby, the main CPU 61 recognizes that the gaming ball has passed the first to the second passing gate 35B. When this process ends, the gate switch check process routine ends.

Command analysis processing
FIGS. 205 and 206 are flowcharts showing command analysis processing executed by the sub CPU 71. This command analysis process is configured by almost the same process as the command analysis process shown in FIGS. 116 and 117, but differs in the following points. In the following description, although there is a portion overlapping with the description of the command analysis processing shown in FIGS. 116 and 117 described above, all the processing shown in FIGS. 205 and 206 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 205, in S2100, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether a command has been received. In this process, if the sub CPU 71 determines that a command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2101. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 71 determines that the command has not been received, the sub CPU 71 ends the command analysis processing routine.

  In S 2101, the sub CPU 71 reads the data of the received command, and performs processing according to the data of the command in the subsequent steps. The sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2102 when the reading of the data of the received command is completed.

  In S2102, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the variation pattern designation command has been received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S2103. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the variation pattern designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S2105.

  In S2103, the sub CPU 71 performs effect pattern determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines an effect pattern including the variation display mode of the decorative symbol based on the received variation pattern designation command. If the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is determined, the sub CPU 71 sets the determined effect pattern data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73. When this process ends, the process moves to S2104.

  In S2104, the sub CPU 71 performs start storage number update processing. The starting memory number updating process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  At S2105, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received as the command read at S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S2106. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol designation command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S2107.

  In S2106, the sub CPU 71 performs stop symbol determination processing. In this process, the sub CPU 71 determines a stop decoration symbol corresponding to the symbol designation command received from the main CPU 61. The sub CPU 71 sets the determined stop decoration symbol data in a predetermined storage area of the work RAM 73 when the stop decoration symbol is determined. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In the present embodiment, as the decorative symbols displayed in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, for example, there are numbers "1" to "7", and a predetermined number (for example, these numbers) of decorative symbols (numbers) are displayed. When three (three digits) are aligned with the same decorative symbol (number), the state is basically shifted to the jackpot gaming state. However, the round game is not started until the game ball passes the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B. Specifically speaking about the decorative symbol, the decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 corresponds to the number string that becomes the line of "333" or "777", and the decorative symbol corresponding to the big hit symbol 2 is "111" Alternatively, the decorative symbol corresponding to the number string that corresponds to "555" and corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 corresponds to the number string that corresponds to "222", "444", or "666", and the jackpot symbol The decorative symbol corresponding to 4 corresponds to the number string which becomes the mark of "888", and the decorative symbol corresponding to the small hit symbol corresponds to the number string which becomes the specific appearance of "135", corresponding to the loss The decorative symbol to be displayed is a string of numbers that will be discolored eyes other than the specified number.

  At S2107, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the symbol stop command has been received as the command read at S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S2108. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the symbol stop command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S2110.

  In S2108, the sub CPU 71 performs a decorative symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the decorative symbol that is being variably displayed. When this process ends, the process moves to S2109.

  In S2109, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode frequency counter update processing. The effect mode frequency counter update processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S2110, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the start winning command has been received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the start winning command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S2111. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the start winning command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S2112.

  In S2111, the sub CPU 71 performs start storage number update processing. The start storage number update process is the same as the process of S2104, and will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  At S2112, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit start display command has been received as the command read at S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S2113. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit start display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2114.

  In S2113, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit start effect process. The hit start effect process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S2114, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit pattern determination command has been received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit pattern determination command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S2115. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit pattern determination command has not been received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S2116.

  In S2115, the sub CPU 71 executes a special winning opening pre-opening effect process. The special winning opening pre-opening effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S2116, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the special winning opening open display command has been received as the command read in S2101. If it is determined that the special winning opening open display command has been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2117. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special winning opening open display command is not received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2200 in FIG.

  In S2117, the sub CPU 71 executes the special winning opening open process. The process for opening the special winning opening will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S2200 of FIG. 206, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the hit end display command has been received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S2201. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the hit end display command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2202.

  In S2201, the sub CPU 71 executes a hit end effect process. The hit / end effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S2202, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not a game state command has been received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command has been received as the read command, the process proceeds to S2203. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the gaming state command has not been received as the read command, the sub CPU 71 shifts the processing to S2204.

  In S2203, the sub CPU 71 executes effect mode control processing. The effect mode control processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S2204, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the specific area passage command is received as the command read in S2101. If the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passage command is received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S2205. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 71 determines that the specific area passage command is not received as the read command, the process proceeds to step S2206.

  In S2205, the sub CPU 71 executes V winning notification processing. The V prize notification process will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

  In S2206, the sub CPU 71 executes other processing corresponding to the received command. This process includes, for example, the discharge error notification process described in the first embodiment described above. When this process ends, the command analysis process routine ends.

[Production mode frequency counter update processing]
FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing effect mode count counter update processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect mode number counter update process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 207, in S2300, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". In this embodiment, the effect mode flag has a value "01H" corresponding to the effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "normal mode") according to the non-probability change and the non-time-short play state, the effect according to the non-probability change and the time-short play state The value corresponding to the mode (hereinafter referred to as "time saving mode") is "02H", and the value corresponding to the effect mode (hereinafter referred to as "ST mode") according to the probability variation and the time saving gaming state is "03H". The background image and the contents of the effect are different according to the value of such effect mode flag. If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the process proceeds to S2301. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the process proceeds to S2302.

  In S2301, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for subtracting one from the value of the time saving mode frequency counter. The hour reduction mode number counter is a counter controlled by the sub CPU 71, and is for counting the number of games in the time reduction mode (number of symbol variations) set up to a predetermined number of times (100 or 30 in this embodiment). is there. When this process ends, the effect mode number counter update processing routine ends.

  In S2302, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the effect mode flag is "03H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "03H", the process proceeds to S2303. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "03H", the effect mode number counter update processing routine is ended.

  In S2303, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for subtracting one from the value of the ST mode frequency counter. The ST mode number counter is a counter controlled by the sub CPU 71, and is used to count the number of ST mode games (number of symbol variations) up to a predetermined number (190 in this embodiment). When this process ends, the effect mode number counter update processing routine ends.

[Start memory number update process]
FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the starting memory number updating process executed by the sub CPU 71. The starting memory number updating process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 208, in S2400, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the command read in S2101 in FIG. 205 is a start winning command. If it is determined that the read command is the start winning command, the process proceeds to S2401. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read command is not the start winning command, the process proceeds to S2404.

  In S2401, the sub CPU 71 determines whether the start winning command corresponds to the start winning of the first starting opening 32 based on the information included in the read start winning command. If it is determined that the start-up winning command corresponds to the start-up win for the first starting opening 32, the process proceeds to S2402. On the other hand, if it is determined that the start winning command does not correspond to the start winning of the first start opening 32, that is, if it corresponds to the start winning of the second start opening 33, the process proceeds to S2403.

  In S2402, the sub CPU 71 executes a first start storage addition process. In this first start storage addition process, a big hit symbol etc. relating to the first special symbol is shown together with the big hit based on the information indicating the hit determination random number included in the start winning command and the information indicating the hit symbol determination random number. Startup storage including information is written to the free space of the first startup storage area 731. If this process ends, the process moves to S2407.

  In S2403, the sub CPU 71 executes a second start storage addition process. Also in this second start memory addition processing, the big hit symbol etc. pertaining to the second special symbol along with the winning of the big hit based on the information indicating the hit determination random number included in the start winning command and the information indicating the hit symbol determination random number. Startup storage including the indicated information is written to the free space of the second startup storage area 732. If this process ends, the process moves to S2407.

  In S2404, the sub CPU 71 determines whether or not the command read in S2101 of FIG. 205 is a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol. If it is determined that the read command is a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, the process proceeds to S2405. On the other hand, if it is determined that the read command is not a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol, that is, if it is a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the second special symbol, the process moves to S2406.

  In S2405, the sub CPU 71 executes a first start storage subtraction process. In this first start storage subtraction process, the oldest start stored in the start storage area (1-1) of the first start storage area 731 is triggered by the reception of the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the first special symbol. Memory is read out. At this time, in the first start storage area 731, the remaining start stores are shifted by 4 bits. If this process ends, the process moves to S2407.

  In S2406, the sub CPU 71 executes a second start storage subtraction process. Also in this second start storage subtraction process, the oldest stored in the start storage area (2-1) of the second start storage area 732 triggered by the reception of the variation pattern designation command corresponding to the second special symbol Startup memory is read out. At this time, in the second startup storage area 732, the remaining startup storage is shifted by 4 bits. If this process ends, the process moves to S2407.

  In S2406, the sub CPU 71 executes display mode change processing. This display mode change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. When this process is ended, the starting memory number updating process routine is ended.

[Display mode change processing]
FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing the display mode change process executed by the sub CPU 71. This display mode change process is performed in the following steps. The display mode change process is executed each time the start winning command or the fluctuation pattern designation command is received, but may be executed every predetermined period (for example, every 2000 ms).

  As shown in FIG. 209, in S2500, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag is "01H". The first start memory storage content notification flag is stored in the first start memory area when start memory indicating that a predetermined big hit is determined (determination that a big hit has been made in the big hit determination process) is stored. Is an internal flag for indicating that the notification is to be made, "01H" is set when the notification is given, and "00H" is set when the notification is not given. If it is determined that the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag is "01H", the display mode change processing routine is ended. If it is determined that the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag is not "01H", the process proceeds to S2501.

  In S2501, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the effect mode flag is "03H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "03H", the process proceeds to S2502. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "03H", the process proceeds to S2507.

  In S2502, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the ST mode frequency counter is 10 or less. In this process, it is determined whether or not the remaining number of times in the ST mode has become, for example, 10 or less. A value corresponding to the number of times other than 10 may be applied as the threshold. If it is determined that the value of the ST mode frequency counter is 10 or less, the process moves to S2503. If it is determined that the value of the ST mode frequency counter is not 10 or less, the process moves to S2505.

  In S2503, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not there is a start storage corresponding to a big hit in the first start storage area 731. If it is determined that the start storage corresponding to the big hit is present in the first start storage area 731, the process proceeds to S 2504. If it is determined that there is no start storage corresponding to the big hit in the first start storage area 731, the display mode change processing routine is ended.

  In S2504, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag to “01H”. Thereby, sub CPU71 will inform the information which shows the big hit election (big hit symbol) which relates to the 1st special symbol. When this process ends, the display mode change processing routine ends. It should be noted that only the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit gaming state which is easy to shift to the probability variation gaming state may be notified, or only the big hit symbol corresponding to the big hit gaming status which is difficult to shift to the positive variation gaming state may be notified. . In addition, whether or not to notify may be determined by lottery, and may be notified based on the determination result.

  In S2505, the sub CPU 71 executes first start storage area and second start storage area determination processing. In this process, it is determined whether the condition (change determination condition) for changing the display mode of the starting storage is satisfied for the starting storage stored in the first starting storage area 731 and the second starting storage area 732 Ru. As the change determination conditions, a first change determination condition having a high priority and a second change determination condition having a low priority are defined. The first change determination condition is that in the first start storage area 731, there is a start memory including information indicating a big hit by the big hit symbol 3 in the probability change gaming state, and the start memory written after the start memory is also If there is information indicating the jackpot symbol 1 or 2 in the non-probability changing gaming state in the later start-up memory of the former, regardless of the number of start-up memories in the second start-up storage area 732, the former start-up The condition is that the display mode relating to storage is maintained as a normal mode. Further, as the second change determination condition, in the first start storage area 731 there is a start storage including information indicating a big hit by the big hit symbol 3 and the number of start stores in the second start storage area 732 is 1 or less In this case, for example, a notification message such as "DANGER" is displayed, and the display mode relating to the former starting memory is changed to the predetermined mode from the normal mode. In addition, after making a determination based on the first change determination condition or the second change determination condition, whether to change the display mode may be determined by lottery. Also, for example, the process of displaying the notification message of "DANGER" and changing the display mode of the start storage may be performed even when the start storage corresponding to the first special symbol indicating the big hit symbol 3 is not stored. Good. Moreover, it corresponds to the second special symbol by displaying the notification message of "DANGER" and changing the display mode of the starting storage corresponding to the starting storage stored in the second starting storage area. It may be notified that the start memory includes information indicating a big hit. When such first start storage area and second start storage area determination processing is ended, the processing is shifted to S2506. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 223 to 225 described later, the pre-reading effect performed in the probability variation gaming state (pre-reading effect performed when the second change determination condition is satisfied), shown in FIGS. As described above, there are pre-reading effects (pre-reading effects performed when the first change determination condition is satisfied) to be performed when shifting from the probability variation gaming state to the short-time gaming state, and these pre-reading effects are performed or not The process of S2505 is to be executed to determine whether or not.

  In S2506, the sub CPU 71 executes display control processing according to the determination result of the processing of S2505. According to this display control process, the display mode of the starting memory corresponding to the first special symbol is changed or maintained according to the determination result. When this process ends, the display mode change processing routine ends.

  In S2507, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the effect mode flag is "02H". If it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is "02H", the process proceeds to S2508. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect mode flag is not "02H", the display mode change processing routine is ended.

  In S2508, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the time saving mode frequency counter is 15 or less. In this process, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining times of the time saving mode is, for example, equal to or less than 15 times. A value corresponding to the number of times other than 15 may be applied as the threshold value. The threshold may be smaller than or equal to the threshold used to determine the number of remaining ST modes. If it is determined that the value of the hour reduction mode frequency counter is 15 or less, the process moves to S2509. If it is determined that the value of the ST mode frequency counter is not 15 or less, the display mode change processing routine is ended.

  In S2509, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of determining whether or not there is a start storage corresponding to a big hit in the first start storage area 731. If it is determined that the start storage corresponding to the big hit is present in the first start storage area 731, the process proceeds to S 2510. If it is determined that there is no start storage corresponding to the big hit in the first start storage area 731, the display mode change processing routine is ended.

  In S2510, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag to “01H”. Thereby, sub CPU71 will inform the information which shows the big hit election (big hit symbol) which relates to the 1st special symbol. When this process ends, the display mode change processing routine ends.

[Perform start presentation processing]
FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the hit start effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit start rendering process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 210, in S2600, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not the starting gaming state is a small hit. If it is determined to be a small hit, the process moves to S2601. If it is determined not to be a small hit, the process moves to S2602.

  In S2601, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set effect data for small hit. As a result, an effect image or the like corresponding to the small hit gaming state is displayed. When this process ends, the hit start effect processing routine ends.

  In S2602, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the round counter. If this process ends, the process moves to S2603.

  In S2603, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data according to the jackpot symbol. Thus, for example, in the case of the jackpot symbol 2, as described in the first embodiment described above, a selection image for selecting the type of challenge bonus (one game, three times challenge, surprise) is displayed, and others If the jackpot symbol of, the effect image and the like prompting a right is displayed. When this process ends, the hit start effect processing routine ends.

[High winning opening before opening effect processing]
FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening pre-opening effect processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The special winning opening pre-opening effect processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 211, in S2700, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting a value corresponding to the hit pattern in the hit pattern flag. The hit pattern flag is an internal flag indicating a hit pattern. When this process ends, the process moves to S2701.

  In S2701, the sub CPU 71 performs processing of setting effect data corresponding to the value of the hit pattern flag. As a result, for example, an effect image corresponding to a super big bonus or the like is displayed, and in addition, notification indicating a big hit is performed according to a hit pattern to be executed. When this processing is ended, the special winning opening pre-opening effect processing routine is ended.

[Process when opening a big winning opening]
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening open process performed by the sub CPU 71. The special winning opening opening process is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 212, in S2800, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for adding one to the value of the round counter. When this process ends, the process moves to S2801.

  In S2801, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the round counter is a value corresponding to the substantial round. In this process, the sub CPU 71 identifies the type of hit based on the value of the hit pattern flag, and determines whether the value of the round counter corresponds to a substantial round. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is a value corresponding to the actual round, the process moves to S2802. If it is determined that the value of the round counter is not a value corresponding to the actual round, the process moves to S2809.

  In S2802, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the V prize notification flag is "01H". If it is determined that the value of the V prize notification flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S2803. If it is determined that the value of the V prize notification flag is not "01H" but "00H" and the notification of the V prize is not performed, the process proceeds to S2809. It should be noted that the processing after S2802 may be performed other than the execution of the substantial round (including the execution of processing other than the special winning opening opening processing).

  In S2803, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the value of the big hit medium end notification flag is "01H". The big hit medium end notification flag is based on whether or not the starting memory exists in the first starting memory area 731 in the big hit gaming state, and the starting memory includes information indicating a big hit by the big hit symbol 3 or not. It is an internal flag which shows whether a notice of displaying a notice message of "DANGER" and changing a display mode concerning the above into a predetermined mode from a usual mode is performed. In such a big hit middle end notification flag, "01H" is set when notification is performed, and "00H" is set when notification is not performed. If it is determined that the value of the big hit medium end notification flag is "01H", the process proceeds to S2803. If it is determined that the value of the big hit medium end notification flag is not "01H", the process proceeds to S2804.

  In S <b> 2804, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the number of start storages present in the second start storage area 372 is 1 or less. If it is determined that the number of start storages present in the second start storage area 372 is 1 or less, the process moves to S2805. If it is determined that the number of start storages present in the second start storage area 372 is not one or less, the process moves to S2809. In addition, as a determination criterion in this case, two or more numbers may be applied as the threshold value. Alternatively, the number of starting memories existing in the second starting memory area 372 may be determined, and it may be determined by lottery whether to proceed to the next step, and the process may proceed to the next step based on the determination result.

  In S2805, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether or not start storage including information indicating a big hit by the big hit symbol 3 is present in the first start storage area 731. If it is determined that the starting memory including the information indicating the big hit by the big hit symbol 3 is present, the process proceeds to S2806. If it is determined that there is no starting memory including information indicating a big hit by the big hit symbol 3, the process proceeds to S2809.

  In S2806, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "01H" to the value of the big hit medium end notification flag. As a result, during execution of the round game in the big hit gaming state, there is a starting memory in the first starting memory area 731, and it is shown that the starting memory includes information indicating a big hit winning by the big hit symbol 3. The notification message of "DANGER" is displayed to indicate that the display mode relating to the start memory is changed from the normal mode to the predetermined mode and that it is difficult to shift to the probability change gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state. Be done. If this process ends, the process moves to S2809.

  In S2807, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the number of start storages present in the second start storage area 372 is two or more. If it is determined that the number of start storages present in the second start storage area 372 is two or more, the process moves to S2808. If it is determined that the number of start storages present in the second start storage area 372 is not two or more, the processing moves to S2809. Note that, as the determination criterion in this case, for example, three or more may be applied as the threshold in consideration of the determination criterion of S2804. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to proceed to the next step after determining the number of start memories existing in the second start storage area, and the process may proceed to the next step based on the determination result.

  In S2808, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the big hit medium end notification flag. As a result, when the number of starting memories existing in the second starting memory area 372 is two or more, the display mode relating to the starting memory of the first starting memory area 731 mentioned above is changed or the notification message of "DANGER" is displayed. There is no notification that In addition, even after such notification is performed once, the value of the big hit medium end notification flag is maintained at "01H", and the above notification is performed if the round game is being executed in the big hit gaming state. May be Also, even if the start memory present in the first start memory area does not include information indicating a big hit by the big hit symbol 3 and includes information indicating a big hit by the big hit symbol 1, for example, The value of the big hit medium end notification flag may be maintained at "01H" to perform the above notification. In this case, although the number of start memories stored in the second start memory area is two or more, the above notification can be performed to make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In S2809, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set corresponding effect data during the round game according to the value of the hit pattern flag. Thereby, an effect image according to the execution of the round game is displayed, and at that time, a notification such as changing the display mode related to the start storage of the first start storage area 731 or displaying a notification message of "DANGER" Is done. When this processing is ended, the special winning opening opening processing routine is ended.

[Per win end production processing]
FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing the hit / termination effect process executed by the sub CPU 71. The hit / end effect processing is executed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 213, in S2900, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting effect data corresponding to the time of the end of the hit according to the value of the hit pattern flag. Thereby, the effect image according to the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is displayed. If this process ends, the process moves to S2901.

  In S2901, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting "00H" to the value of the V prize notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S2902.

  In S2902, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "00H" to the value of the big hit medium end notification flag. If this process ends, the process moves to S2903.

  In S2903, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "00H" to the value of the hit pattern flag. When this process ends, the hit end effect processing routine ends.

[Demonstration mode control processing]
FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing effect mode control processing executed by the sub CPU 71. The effect mode control process is performed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 214, in S3000, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the information included in the gaming state command indicates a probability change, based on the received gaming state command. If it is determined that the information included in the game state command indicates a definite change, the process proceeds to S3001. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information included in the game state command does not indicate a definite change, the process moves to S3003.

  In S3001, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting "03H" to the value of the effect mode flag. As a result, the ST mode is executed as an effect mode according to the probability change and the time saving game state. When this process ends, the process moves to S3002.

  In S3002, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set the number of probability variation gaming states included in the gaming state command to the ST mode number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, the value corresponding to “190” is set in the ST mode frequency counter. When this process ends, the effect mode control processing routine ends.

  In S3003, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to determine whether the information included in the game state command indicates time saving, based on the received game state command. If it is determined that the information included in the game state command indicates time saving, the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, if it is determined that the information included in the game state command does not indicate time saving, the process proceeds to S3006.

  In S3004, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting "02H" to the value of the effect mode flag. Thus, the time saving mode is executed as the effect mode according to the non-probability change and the time saving gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S3005.

  In S3005, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the number of time saving game states included in the game state command in the time reduction mode number counter. That is, in the present embodiment, a value corresponding to "100" or "30" is set in the time saving mode frequency counter. When this process ends, the effect mode control processing routine ends.

  In S3006, the sub CPU 71 performs processing to set "01H" to the value of the effect mode flag. Thus, the normal mode is executed as the effect mode according to the non-probability change and the non-time-short play state. Thereafter, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting the value of the first start storage storage content notification flag to "00H", and when this processing ends, the effect mode control processing routine ends.

[V prize notification process]
FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing the V winning notification process performed by the sub CPU 71. The V winning notification process is performed in the following steps.

  As shown in FIG. 215, in S3100, the sub CPU 71 performs processing for setting V winning notification data. That is, the sub CPU 71 sets V prize notification data for notifying that the game is shifted to the probability variation gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state when the V winning is detected by the game ball passing through the specific area 38A. Do. As a result, in the display area 4A of the liquid crystal display device 4, an effect image according to the V winning is displayed, and predetermined sound generation and light emission are performed using the speakers 10a to 10c and the lamp / LED 27. . If this process ends, the process moves to S3101.

  In S3101, the sub CPU 71 performs a process of setting "01H" to the value of the V winning notification flag. When this process is ended, the V winning notification process routine is ended.

  As is clear from the above description, in the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B realize the first passing area and the second passing area through which game media can pass. ing. The main CPU 61 is configured to play at least one of the first passing area and the second passing area when the specific gaming state transition determining means determines that the determination to shift to the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) is obtained. Each of the first variable winning device (first large winning opening 36) and the second variable winning device (second large winning opening 37) is individually changed to the first aspect and the second aspect on condition that the medium passes. A round game pattern determination means capable of determining a round game pattern (hit pattern) for executing a plurality of times for a round game to be played is realized. Further, the main CPU 61 implements a round game execution means for executing a round game a plurality of times based on the round game pattern determined by the round game pattern determination means in the specific game state.

  Further, main CPU 61 functioning as round game pattern determination means includes a round game in which the first variable winning device changes to the first aspect and the second aspect on condition that game media has passed through the first passage area. It is possible to determine a first round gaming pattern (hit pattern 14) including an easy-to-pass round game that fluctuates in the first aspect and the second aspect so that the second variable winning device facilitates the passage of gaming media to a specific area The second variable winning device includes a round game in which the first variable winning device changes to the first aspect and the second aspect on condition that game media has passed through the second passing region, and the second variable winning device moves to the specific region. It is possible to determine a second round game pattern (hit pattern 3) including a difficult-to-pass round game that fluctuates in the first and second modes so as to make it difficult to pass game media. . The first round gaming pattern and the second round gaming pattern correspond to the second round gaming pattern more than the total time in which the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are in the first mode in accordance with the first round gaming pattern. The total time for the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device to become the first aspect is defined to be long.

  Further, the sub CPU 71 implements an effect execution unit that executes a predetermined effect.

  Further, in the big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state, the ratio of the round gaming pattern determined by the round gaming pattern determining means is one of the first passing area and the second passing area according to the passing area through which the gaming media has passed. It is determined by the round game pattern determination means regardless of the passage area through which the game medium has passed, among the first passing area and the second passing area, among the different first specific gaming states (the jackpot gaming state based on the jackpot symbol 2) The second specified gaming state (the jackpot gaming state based on symbols other than the jackpot symbol 2) in which the proportion of the round gaming pattern is the same is included. The sub CPU 71 functioning as the effect execution means performs the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state in the effect mode from transitioning to the specific gaming state until the game medium passes through the first passing area or the second passing area. And can be implemented as different presentation modes.

  Further, the first start storage area of the main RAM 63 and the first start storage area 731 of the work RAM 73 shift to the specific gaming state on condition that the game medium has entered the first start area (the first start opening 32). The second start storage area of the main RAM 63 and the second start storage area 732 of the work RAM 73 are implemented by a first storage unit capable of storing a plurality of first start storages including information for determining whether or not to be stored. Second storage means capable of storing a plurality of second starting memories including information for determining whether or not to shift to the specific gaming state on condition that gaming media has entered the starting area (second starting opening 33) Is realized. The first special symbol display unit 53 can perform variable display of the first identification information based on the first start storage under the first condition that the first start storage is stored in the first storage means A first identification information display means capable of stopping and displaying the first identification information in a specific display mode when the first start memory determines the transition to the specific gaming state; (2) The special symbol display unit 54 can perform variable display of the second identification information based on the second start storage, with the second condition that the second start storage is stored in the second storage means In addition to the above, the second identification information display means is realized which can stop and display the second identification information in a specific display mode when the second start memory decides to shift to the specific gaming state. Further, the second condition is defined to be prioritized over the first condition, and the specific gaming state includes a special specific gaming state in which only the second round gaming pattern is determined, and the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal In the special game state, the display device 4 implements notification means for performing a predetermined notification when the first storage means stores the first start memory for determining the transition to the special specific game state.

  Further, the main CPU 61 is a first round game execution means capable of executing a first round game in which the first variable winning device is varied to the first aspect and the second aspect in the specific gaming state, and in the specific gaming state, the second A second round game execution means capable of executing a second round game in which the variable winning device is changed to the first aspect and the second aspect is realized. Further, the main CPU 61 is a display mode in which the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is specific after the specific gaming state is ended on condition that the game medium has passed the specific area in the specific gaming state. On the condition that the game medium does not pass the specific area in the special gaming state, and the special gaming state control means that can be controlled to the special gaming state (probable variation gaming state) that is relatively easy to Realize the non-special game state control means capable of controlling the non-special game state (non-probable variation game state) in which the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is less likely to be relative to the specific display mode ing. Further, the main CPU 61 functioning as the second round game execution means, as a second round game, is a passing easy round game in which game media are relatively easy to pass through the specific area, and the game medium is relatively passing through the specific area It is possible to execute difficult difficult round game. The specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state in which a first round game and a passing difficulty round game are executed at least, and a second specific gaming state in which a first round game and a passing easy round game are executed at least. Including. The main CPU 61 functioning as the specific gaming state control means has a relatively higher probability that the first identification information has a relatively higher probability in the case of the specific display mode than in the case of the second identification information having the specific display mode. The first specific gaming state can be controlled, and the second specific gaming state can be controlled with relatively low probability. In the special game state, the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 functioning as the notification means store the first start memory for determining the first specific game state in the first memory means, or the first memory means (1) It is possible to perform a predetermined notification on the condition that one of the first start memories for determining the specific gaming state is not stored.

  In addition, the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 that function as notification means can perform predetermined notification when the second start storage stored in the second storage unit is less than a predetermined number. In the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 functioning as notification means, the first storage means for storing the first specific game state is stored in the first storage means, and the other is stored later than the first start memory. In the case where there is a first start memory, it is possible to perform a predetermined notification on the condition that the other first start memory does not determine the second specific gaming state.

  Further, when the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is a specific display mode, the main CPU 61 realizes a specific gaming state control means for controlling to a specific gaming state, and the specific gaming state ends. After that, the special game state control means capable of controlling the special game state in which the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information tends to be relative to the specific display mode is realized. The main CPU 61 functioning as the special gaming state control means reaches the predetermined number of times (190 number of games in the probability variation gaming state (ST mode)) the variation display number of the first identification information and the second identification information after the specific gaming state is over. It is possible to control the non-special game state in which the stop display mode of the first identification information or the second identification information is less likely to be made to the specific display mode, on the condition that it is done. The sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 that function as notification means have a special number (the probability variation gaming state (ST mode)) in which the number of times of variation display of the first identification information and the second identification information is smaller than the predetermined number The predetermined notification can be performed on the condition that the number of remaining games reaches 10) and the first start storage for determining the specific gaming state is stored in the first storage means.

  Also, the sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 that function as informing means, the number of times of variation display of the first identification information and the second identification information reaches the special number after the end of the specific gaming state, and the special game state in the first storage means The predetermined notification is performed on the condition that the first start memory for determining the specific gaming state (the first specific gaming state) is stored. Further, the wing member 34 realizes a variable member that can be changed into an open mode in which game media can easily enter the second start area and a closed mode in which game media can not easily enter the second start area. The main CPU 61 implements special game state control means capable of controlling the special game state (short time game state) in which the variable member can easily change to the open mode after the end of the specific game state. When the main CPU 61 functioning as the special game state control means is controlled to the special game state after the end of the specific game state, the number of times the first identification information and the second identification information change is displayed for a specific number of times The variable member can be controlled to a non-special game state (non-time-saving game state) which is hard to change to the open mode on condition that the number has reached 100 times or 30 times). Further, the main CPU 61 is controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means, and is controlled to the special gaming state after the termination of the specific gaming state, the first specific number of times (30 And a specific number determining means for determining any one of a plurality of types including a second specific number (100 times) greater than the first specific number. The main CPU 61 functioning as the specific number determining means determines the second specific number of times in the special gaming state rather than the non-special gaming state as the gaming state before being controlled to the specific gaming state by the specific gaming state control means The probability is relatively high. The sub CPU 71 and the liquid crystal display device 4 that function as notification means have a special number (the number of remaining games in the time-saving gaming state is smaller than the specific number). The predetermined notification is performed on the condition that the first start memory for determining the specific gaming state is stored in the first start memory, and the number of times the number of times becomes 15) is reached.

[Display example]
Next, screen display examples will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIGS. 216 and 217 are diagrams showing screen transition from the normal mode to the ST mode or the time saving mode through the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 2 as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

  First, as shown in FIG. 216 (A), a plurality of decorative symbols 700 corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol are displayed on the screen of the display area 4A as in the first embodiment described above. In addition to being displayed, the first hold count information 701 corresponding to the start storage of the first special symbol and the second hold count information 702 (see FIG. 220 etc.) corresponding to the start store of the second special symbol are displayed, An information display area 710 indicating the type of effect mode is displayed. In FIG. 216A, the “normal mode” is displayed in the information display area 710. As a result, it is recognized that the gaming state is the non-probability variation and the non-time-short playing state corresponding to the normal mode. Moreover, in FIG. 216 (A), while the four 1st pending number information 701 is displayed, it is in the state in which the three decoration symbols 700 were stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. In addition, none of the second hold count information 702 is displayed. Thereby, it is recognized that as the next display state, the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 will be started together with the variable display of the special symbol using the starting memory according to the first special symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 216 (B), three pieces of the first reserved number information 701 are deleted by being displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the variation display of the three decorative symbols 700 is displayed. It is started. At this time, if the start memory corresponding to the deleted first holding number information 701 includes information indicating the big hit winning corresponding to the big hit symbol 2, as shown in FIG. 216 (C), the display area 4A is displayed. On the screen, the left and right two decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed with the same symbol, for example, “1”, and the variable display of the central decorative symbol 700 is continued.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 216 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 in the middle is stopped and displayed, and the three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the big hit symbol 2, for example, a match of “111” It will be displayed as Incidentally, in FIG. 216 (D), one start storage is added in response to the start winning at the first start opening 32, one first hold number information 701 is also added and four are displayed again. It is in a state of

  Thus, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of "111", the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2 is started, and as shown in FIG. 216 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A. , A message image 720 such as "big hit" indicating the start of the big hit gaming state is displayed. At this time, in the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2, if one of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B is selected to preferentially pass the gaming ball, a desired hitting pattern is selected. Round game is easy to be executed. Therefore, the following screen is displayed in the display area 4A.

  As shown in FIG. 217 (F), so-called connection is likely to occur on the screen of the display area 4A if it is targeted so that the left passage is selected and the first passing gate 35A is preferentially passed. If you select “← 連 荘” as the selection instruction image 721 and “right-handed” and aim to pass the second pass gate 35 B preferentially, it is easy to obtain a large number of winning balls in general. And a message image 723 such as “Aim at any gate!”. Such a selection instructing image 721, 722 and the message image 723 continue to be displayed as long as the game ball does not pass through at least one of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B. Ru. That is, even if the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 2 is started, while the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (F) is displayed, the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 open and close. Round game does not start.

  After the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (F) is displayed, when the gaming ball passes the first passage gate 35A first, as shown in FIG. 217 (G), on the screen of the display area 4A, In order to clearly show the state, only the selection instruction image 721 of "連" is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 217 (H), the display of the selection instruction image 721 is erased on the screen of the display area 4A, and the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening An image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting to aim at 37 right is displayed. Thereby, the round game is executed based on the hit pattern determined by the hit pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 8). In this case, it is a big hit game state according to the big hit symbol 2 and corresponds to the case where the game ball passes the first pass gate 35A first, so the round game is easy to be executed based on the hit pattern 14 (Refer to the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2) in FIG. 193). In this case, although the probability is low, the hit pattern 1 may be determined. When a round game is executed based on the hit pattern 1, a screen as shown in FIG. 218 (N) described later is displayed.

  In the round game based on the hit pattern 14, only the 1st and 11th eyes correspond to a substantial round. As a result, in the round game based on the hit pattern 14, although the number of winning balls generally decreases, the V winning in the specific area 38A is basically detected at the 1R or 11R eyes. Therefore, when the V winning is actually detected, as shown in FIG. 217 (I), an image 740 such as "V" indicating that the V winning is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. . As a result, notification that transition to the probability variation gaming state has been decided is notified. An image 740 of “V” indicating that transition to such a probability change gaming state has been determined is continuously displayed until the big hit gaming state ends. When displaying a screen as shown in FIG. 217 (I), a screen as shown in FIG. 221 or 222 described later may be displayed, which will be described later.

  Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 217 (J), a message image 741 such as “ST mode entry” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, 190 times will be given as the number of games in ST mode. However, if V winning is not detected, even if the big hit gaming state ends, the time saving mode is set without shifting to the ST mode, so a screen as shown in FIG. 217 (J ') described later is displayed It will be.

  When the ST mode starts, as shown in FIG. 217 (K), the decorative symbol 700 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the stop display mode at the time the big hit gaming state starts, and the first hold number information 701 And the like are displayed, and the information display area 710 also displays that the “ST mode” is set. In addition, an image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting a right strike is also displayed.

  On the other hand, after the screen as shown in FIG. 217 (F) is displayed, when the game ball passes the second pass gate 35B first, as shown in FIG. 217 (G ′), the screen of the display area 4A On the top, only the “→ one strike” selection indication image 722 is displayed to clearly show the state. Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses, as shown in FIG. 217 (H ′), the display of the selection instruction image 722 is erased on the screen of the display area 4A, and the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning An image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting to aim at the mouth 37 rightward is displayed. Thereby, the round game is executed based on the hit pattern determined by the hit pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 8). In this case, it is a big hit game state according to the big hit symbol 2 and corresponds to the case where the game ball passes the first pass gate 35B first, so the round game is easy to be executed based on the hit pattern 3 (Refer to the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 2) in FIG. 193). Also in this case, although the probability is low, there is a possibility that the hit pattern 1 or the hit pattern 2 may be determined. For example, when a round game is executed based on the hit pattern 1, a screen as shown in FIG. 218 (N) described later is displayed. Further, when a round game is executed based on the hit pattern 2, although not shown in the drawings, a screen may be displayed, for example, to shift to a challenge bonus.

  In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, the 1Rth and 11Rth eyes are not a substantial round, and the 2Rth to 10Rth eyes and the 12Rth eyes corresponding to the number of remaining rounds correspond to a substantial round. As a result, in the round game based on the hit pattern 3, although it is difficult to detect the V winning in the specific area 38A, a large number of winning balls are generally obtained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 217 (I ′), an image such as “V” indicating that the V winning is detected is extremely unlikely to be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. That is, in most cases, it is notified that it can not shift to the probability variation gaming state.

  Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 217 (J ′), a message image 742 such as “time saving mode rush” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, if the jackpot symbol 2 is determined in the normal mode (non-time-saving gaming state), 30 times will be given as the number of games in the time-saving mode. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol 2 is determined in the ST mode or the time saving mode (time saving gaming state), 100 times will be given as the number of games in the time saving mode.

  When the time saving mode starts, as shown in FIG. 217 (K ′), the decorative symbol 700 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the stop display mode at the time the big hit gaming state starts, and the first hold number information In addition to the display 701, the information display area 710 also displays that the "time saving mode" is set. In addition, an image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting a right strike is also displayed.

  FIG. 218 is a diagram showing a screen transition from the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 in the normal mode to the transition to the ST mode as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 218 (L), after the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal mode, three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the big hit symbol 1 on the screen of the display area 4A, for example “777” It may be displayed as a match.

  In this manner, when the three decorative symbols 700 stop and display at the alignment of "777", the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 is started, and although not particularly shown, "big hit" as shown in FIG. After the message image indicating is displayed, as shown in FIG. 218 (M), an image 730 of “→ right strike” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A so as to prompt a right strike. In addition, at the start of the big hit gaming state corresponding to big hit symbol 1, it is only a trigger for simply determining the hit pattern, regardless of which of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B the game ball passes. , It can not be a factor related to the decision result. Therefore, for example, an image prompting a left strike may be displayed, or an image indicating that either of the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B may be aimed may be displayed. The displayed image 730 continues to be displayed as long as the gaming ball does not pass through at least one of the first pass gate 35A and the second pass gate 35B. That is, even if the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 is started, while the screen as shown in FIG. 218 (M) is displayed, the first big winning opening 36 and the second big winning opening 37 are opened and closed. Round game does not start.

  After the screen as shown in FIG. 218 (M) is displayed, when the gaming ball passes through the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B, as shown in FIG. 218 (N), on the screen of the display area 4A. , An image 731 indicating transition to the super big bonus is displayed.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time passes, as shown in FIG. 218 (O), the display of the image 731 is erased on the screen of the display area 4A, and the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 are displayed. An image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting to aim at the right strike is displayed. After the image 730 is displayed, a round game is executed based on the hit pattern determined by the hit pattern determination process (see S1302 in FIG. 8). In this case, it is a big hit game state according to the big hit symbol 1 and corresponds to the case where the game ball passes the first pass gate 35A or the second pass gate 35B, so the round game is executed based on the hit pattern 1 (See the hit pattern selection table (big hit symbol 1 in FIG. 193)).

  In the round game based on the hit pattern 1, the 1Rth and 11Rth eyes are substantially rounds, and the 2Rth to 10Rth eyes and 12Rth to 16Rth eyes corresponding to the number of remaining rounds also correspond to the substantial rounds. As a result, in the round game based on the hit pattern 1, a large number of winning balls are generally obtained, and basically, the V winning in the specific area 38A is detected in the 1Rth or 11Rth eyes. Therefore, when the V winning is actually detected, as shown in FIG. 218 (P), an image 740 such as “V” indicating that the V winning is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. . As a result, notification that transition to the probability variation gaming state has been decided is notified. An image 740 of “V” indicating that transition to such a probability change gaming state has been determined is continuously displayed until the big hit gaming state ends. When displaying a screen as shown in FIG. 218 (P), a screen as shown in FIG. 221 or 222 described later may be displayed, which will be described later.

  Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 218 (Q), a message image 741 such as “ST mode entry” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. However, if V winning is not detected, even if the big hit gaming state ends, the time saving mode is set without shifting to the ST mode, so a screen as shown in FIG. 217 (J ') described above is displayed In some cases. When the ST mode starts, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K) is displayed, although not shown. On the other hand, in the time saving mode, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K ') is displayed.

  FIG. 219 is a diagram showing a screen transition from the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 in the normal mode to the shift to the time saving mode as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 219 (A), after the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the normal mode, three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the big hit symbol 3 on the screen of the display area 4A, for example “222” It may be displayed as a match.

  As described above, when the three decorative symbols 700 stop and display at the alignment of "222", the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is started, and although not particularly shown, "big hit" as shown in FIG. After the message image indicating is displayed, as shown in FIG. 219 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, an image 730 of “→ right strike” is displayed so as to prompt a right strike. In addition, at the start of the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3, it becomes an opportunity to simply determine the hit pattern, regardless of which of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B the game ball passes. It can not be a factor related to the decision result alone. Therefore, for example, an image prompting a left strike may be displayed, or an image indicating that either of the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B may be aimed may be displayed.

  Even if the game ball passes the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B after the image 730 as shown in FIG. 219 (B) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 219 (C), the display area 4A On the screen of, the state in which the image 730 is displayed is continued. That is, when the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is started, the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B is played without notifying the type of the big hit gaming state as shown in FIG. 218 (N). When the ball passes, a round game based on the hit pattern 3 is started.

  In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, the 1Rth and 11Rth eyes are not a substantial round, and the 2Rth to 10Rth eyes and the 12Rth eyes corresponding to the number of remaining rounds correspond to a substantial round. As a result, in the round game based on the hit pattern 3, although it is difficult to detect the V winning in the specific area 38A, a large number of winning balls are generally obtained. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 219 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A during round game execution, the user is urged to aim at the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37 by hitting the right "→ right Only when the image 730 such as "is hit" is displayed, an image such as "V" indicating that the V winning is detected is hardly displayed. That is, in most cases, it is notified that it can not shift to the probability variation gaming state.

  Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 219 (D), a message image 742 such as “time saving mode rush” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, if the jackpot symbol 3 is determined in the normal mode (non-time-saving gaming state), 30 times will be given as the number of games in the time-saving mode. On the other hand, if the big hit symbol 2 is determined in the ST mode immediately before switching to the normal mode or the time saving mode (time saving gaming state), 100 times will be given as the number of games in the time saving mode. When the time saving mode is started, although not shown, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K ') is displayed.

  FIG. 220 is a diagram showing a screen transition from the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 in ST mode to the transition to the ST mode again as a screen display example according to the second embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 220 (A), after the variable display of the decorative symbol 700 is started in the ST mode, three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the big hit symbol 4 on the screen of the display area 4A, for example "888" It may be displayed as a match. In addition, since the ST mode is an effect mode corresponding to the time saving game state, the second hold count information 702 tends to be displayed together with the first hold count information 701. Further, an image 730 for prompting a right is displayed in order to urge start winning to the second start opening 33.

  Thus, when the three decorative symbols 700 stop and display at the alignment of "888", the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 is started, and although not particularly shown, "big hit" as shown in FIG. 216 (E) After the message image indicating is displayed, as shown in FIG. 220 (B), an image 730 of “→ right” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A so as to urge right. In addition, at the start of the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 4, it becomes an opportunity to simply determine the hit pattern, regardless of which of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B the game ball passes. By itself, it can not be a factor related to the decision result. Therefore, for example, an image prompting a left strike may be displayed, or an image indicating that either of the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B may be aimed may be displayed.

  Even if the game ball passes the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B after the image 730 as shown in FIG. 220 (B) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 220 (C), the display area 4A On the screen of, the state in which the image 730 is displayed is continued. That is, when the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 is started, the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B is played without notifying the type of the big hit gaming state as shown in FIG. 218 (N). When the ball passes, a round game based on any of the hit patterns 1, 4 to 12 determined according to the big hit symbol 4 will be started.

  The round game based on the hit patterns 1 and 4 to 12 includes a substantial round other than the 11Rs, while at least the 1Rs are a substantial round. As a result, in the round game based on the hit patterns 1 and 4 to 12, a certain number of winning balls can be obtained, and V winning on the specific area 38 A can be easily detected in at least the first R. Therefore, when the V winning is actually detected, as shown in FIG. 220C, an image 740 such as "V" indicating that the V winning is detected is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. . As a result, notification that transition to the probability variation gaming state has been decided is notified. An image 740 of “V” indicating that transition to such a probability change gaming state has been determined is continuously displayed until the big hit gaming state ends. When displaying a screen as shown in FIG. 220 (C), a screen as shown in FIG. 221 or 222 described later may be displayed, which will be described later.

  Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 220 (D), a message image 741 such as “ST mode entry” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. However, if V winning is not detected, even if the big hit gaming state ends, the time saving mode is set without shifting to the ST mode, so a screen as shown in FIG. 217 (J ') described above is displayed In some cases. When the ST mode starts, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K) is displayed, although not shown. On the other hand, in the time saving mode, a screen similar to that shown in FIG. 217 (K ') is displayed.

  FIGS. 221 and 222 are diagrams showing screen transition during a big hit as an example of screen display according to the second embodiment.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 221 (A), an image 730 for prompting a right is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A during execution of the round game, and “V showing that V winning is detected is displayed. "" May be displayed.

  At this time, if there are, for example, four starting memories of the first special symbol but there is no starting memory of the second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 221 (B), the screen of the display area 4A On the upper side, four pieces of the first reserved number information 701 are displayed according to the start storage of the first special symbol, and none of the second held number information 702 is displayed according to the start storage of the second special symbol.

  Then, when the start memory of the first special symbol includes one including information indicating the big hit symbol 3, the message image 750 of "DANGER" is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A as shown in FIG. 221 (C). Is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 221 (D), the display of the message image 750 of “DANGER” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A, and the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 in the first hold quantity information 701 is included 1) The specific first reserved number information 701A according to the start memory of the special symbol is highlighted. The big hit symbol 3 determines that a round game based on the hit pattern 3 is executed together with the big hit. The hit pattern 3 is to execute the 1Rth and 11Rth eyes as a round game in which the V winning in the specific area 38A is not detected. That is, the start of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 (information indicating that the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol 3 was won in the probability variation gaming state) during the execution of the round game in which the V prize is determined If there is a memory, although it has been decided to shift to the ST mode (probable change gaming state) after the end of the big hit gaming state according to the V prize, it will soon be the starting memory associated with the big hit symbol 3 There is a possibility that it will be a big hit game state according to the hit pattern 3 based on it, and it will be a big hit game state soon after that even if the number of digested games in ST mode is small. . In order to notify such a state, the message image 750 of "DANGER" and the specific first hold count information 701A associated with the big hit symbol 3 are displayed. In addition, when starting memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 does not exist, notification may be made by displaying a message image indicating that or the like.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 221 (B '), there may be four starting memories of the first special symbol, for example, and there may be one or less starting memories of the second special symbol, in this case, On the screen of the display area 4A, four first pending number information 701 is displayed according to the starting storage of the first special symbol, and the second pending number information 702 is displayed according to the starting storage of the second special symbol. For example, one is displayed.

  And also in such a case, when the start memory of the first special symbol includes information indicating the big hit symbol 3, as shown in FIG. 221 (C ′), it is on the screen of the display area 4A. , A message image 750 of "DANGER" is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 221 (D ′), the screen of the display area 4A includes the information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 of the first hold quantity information 701 instead of the display of the message image 750 of “DANGER”. The specific first reserved number information 701A according to the start memory of the first special symbol is highlighted. At this time, the second hold count information 702 is displayed as it is without particularly changing the display mode. That is, in the big hit gaming state after V prize winning is decided, if there is one or less starting memory of the second special symbol, the starting memory of the first special symbol including the information indicating the big hit symbol 3 If there is, the message image 750 of "DANGER" and the specific first hold count information 701A associated with the jackpot symbol 3 are displayed to notify such a state.

  On the other hand, there are cases where there are, for example, four starting memories of the first special symbol and two or more starting memories of the second special symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 221 (B ′ ′), four first reserved number information 701 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A according to the start and storage of the first special symbol, and the second special For example, two pieces of second pending number information 702 are displayed according to the start storage of the symbol.

  As described above, even if the start memory of the first special symbol includes information indicating the big hit symbol 3, two or more pieces of the second reserved number information 702 are displayed according to the start memory of the second special symbol. In this case, as shown in FIG. 221 (C ′ ′), the message image 750 of “DANGER” is not displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 221 (D ′ ′), on the screen of the display area 4A, the specific first reserved number information 701A according to the start storage of the first special symbol including the information indicating the big hit symbol 3 is emphasized Even if there is a first special symbol starting memory including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 during the execution of the round game in which the V prize is determined, the second special symbol If there is a possibility that a big hit will be made based on the starting memory of the second special symbol by the existence of two or more starting memory, it is very likely to shift to the time saving mode immediately after the transition to the ST mode Since it is not a state, the message image 750 of "DANGER" and the specific first hold count information 701A are not displayed. In addition, as a condition which determines the number of starting memory of the second special symbol, as described above, it is not limited to one or less and two or more, for example, two or less and three or more or three or less and four or more It may be a condition such as

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 222 (A), as in the screen shown in FIG. 221 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A during execution of the round game, the image 730 for prompting a right hit is shown with V prize winning. An image 740 of "V" may be displayed.

  And as with the screen shown in FIG. 221 (B), if there are four starting memories for the first special symbol, for example, while there is no starting memory for the second special symbol, FIG. 222 (B As shown in), on the screen of the display area 4A, four pieces of first pending number information 701 are displayed according to the start storage of the first special symbol, and the second hold according to the start storage of the second special symbol. The number information 702 is not displayed at all.

  At this time, if there is nothing including information indicating the big hit symbol 3 (information indicating that the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 in the probability variation gaming state) is present in the start memory of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. As shown in the diagram, the message image 750 of "DANGER" is not displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 222 (D), the specific first hold count information 701A is not highlighted on the screen of the display area 4A. That is, if there is no start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the big hit symbol 3 during execution of the round game in which the V prize is fixed, the mode shifts to the time saving mode immediately after transition to the ST mode. Since there is no possibility, the message image 750 of "DANGER" and the specific first hold count information 701A are not displayed. In addition, even if the start memory of the first special symbol including information indicating the big hit symbol 3 is present, it is the start memory stored after that and information indicating the big hit symbol other than the big hit symbol 3 (non-probable change gaming state If there is a starting memory of the first special symbol including information indicating that the corresponding big hit has been won other than the big hit symbol 3 in the case of “DANGER” as shown in FIG. 222 (A) to (D) The message image 750 and the specific first hold count information 701A may not be displayed.

  FIGS. 223 to 225 show, as screen display examples according to the second embodiment, from transitioning to the ST mode immediately after the big hit end, to transition to the time saving mode via the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 in the ST mode. It is a figure which shows screen transition.

  When the big hit gaming state ends and shifts to the ST mode, as shown in FIG. 223 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, a stop display mode (for example, "888") at the time of the big hit gaming state started. The decorative symbol 700 is displayed, and the first hold count information 701 and the second hold count information 702 are displayed, and in addition, in the information display area 710, it is displayed that the "ST mode" is set. In addition, an image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting a right strike is also displayed. At this time, it is assumed that four pieces of first pending number information 701 are displayed and two pieces of second pending number information 702 are displayed. In addition, the first hold count information 701 includes the specific first hold count information 701A corresponding to the start storage of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, but at this time, the second hold count information Since two or more pieces of the number information 702 are displayed, they are not highlighted as the specific first reserved number information 701A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is reduced from two to one by preferentially using the start storage of the second special symbol. The reduced display is performed, and the variable display of the three decorative patterns 700 is started. At this time, since the second hold count information 702 is less than or equal to one, the specific first hold count information 701A included in the first hold count information 701 is highlighted. Further, in the information display area 710, a message such as "DANGER" is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 223 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, one second held number information 702 is displayed according to the start winning to the second start opening 33 while the decorative symbol 700 is fluctuating display. May be displayed in increasing numbers from two. In this case, since the second hold count information 702 is two or more, the display mode in which the specific first hold count information 701A is highlighted is changed to the normal display mode. Further, the information display area 710 is switched to a display state indicating that it is in the ST mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 223 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of losing based on the start storage of the second special symbol. Also at this time, the specific first hold count information 701A is displayed in the normal display mode, and the information display area 710 displays that the ST mode is set.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 223 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is reduced to one and displayed by preferentially using the start storage of the second special symbol. And the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the second hold count information 702 is less than or equal to one, the specific first hold count information 701A included in the first hold count information 701 is highlighted again. In addition, the information display area 710 is switched to the display state indicating the message "DANGER".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 223 (F), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of losing based on the start storage of the second special symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (G), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 becomes 0 by using the start storage of the second special symbol, and three decorative symbols 700 are displayed. The variable display of is started. Also in this case, since the number of the second hold count information 702 is 1 or less, the state in which the specific first hold count information 701A included in the first hold count information 701 is highlighted is maintained. Further, the information display area 710 also maintains the display state indicating the message "DANGER".

  After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (H), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of losing based on the start storage of the second special symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 224 (I), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from four pieces to three pieces by using the start storage of the first special symbol. And the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start storage of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is applied, the display itself of the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start storage is erased. In addition, the information display area 710 is also switched to the display state indicating the ST mode.

  And since the information which shows the big hit election corresponding to big hit symbol 3 is contained in the starting memory corresponding to the specific 1st pending number information 701A deleted, as shown in Drawing 224 (J), a display field On the screen of 4A, the left and right two decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the same symbol, for example, “2”, and the variable display of the central decorative symbol 700 is continued.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 224 (K), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 in the middle is stopped and displayed, and the three decorative symbols 700 correspond to the big hit symbol 3, for example, a match of “222” It will be displayed as

  In this way, when the three decorative symbols 700 stop and display at the alignment of "222", the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is started, and as shown in FIG. 224 (L), on the screen of the display area 4A. , A message image 720 such as "big hit" indicating the start of the big hit gaming state is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 225 (M), on the screen of the display area 4A, an image 730 prompting a right is displayed, and a round game based on the hit pattern 3 corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is performed. In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, the 1Rth and 11Rth eyes are not a substantial round, and the 2Rth to 10Rth eyes and the 12Rth eyes corresponding to the number of remaining rounds correspond to a substantial round. As a result, in the round game based on the hit pattern 3, it is difficult to detect the V winning in the specific area 38A. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 225 (M), only when an image 730 prompting a right on the screen is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A during the round game, “V showing that V winning is detected is displayed. It is extremely unlikely that an image such as

  Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 225 (N), a message image 742 such as “time saving mode rush” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  When the time saving mode starts, as shown in FIG. 225 (O), the decoration symbol 700 is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A in the stop display mode (for example, "222") at the time of the big hit gaming state started, In addition to the display of the first reserved number information 701 and the like, the information display area 710 also displays that the “time saving mode” is set. In addition, an image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting a right strike is also displayed.

  FIGS. 226 to 228 are diagrams showing screen transition from the middle of the time saving mode having the remaining number of time saving modes, for example, 16 times or more to the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 1 as the screen display example according to the second embodiment. .

  As shown in FIG. 226 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the lost, and the first held number information 701 and the second held number information 702 are displayed. In addition, in the information display area 710, it is assumed that "ST mode" is displayed. In addition, an image 730 such as “→ right strike” prompting a right strike is also displayed. At this time, it is assumed that two pieces of first pending number information 701 are displayed and two pieces of second pending number information 702 are displayed. In addition, the first hold count information 701 includes the specific first hold count information 701A corresponding to the start storage of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3, but at this time, the second hold count information Since two or more pieces of the number information 702 are displayed, they are not highlighted as the specific first reserved number information 701A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is changed from two to one by preferentially using the start storage of the second special symbol. The reduced display is performed, and the variable display of the three decorative patterns 700 is started. At this time, since the second hold count information 702 is less than or equal to one, the specific first hold count information 701A included in the first hold count information 701 is highlighted. In addition, the information display area 710 is switched to the display state indicating the message "DANGER".

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (C), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of losing based on the start storage of the second special symbol. At this time, the start memory of the first special symbol is added according to the start winning to the first start opening 32, and the first reserved number information 701 is 2 to correspond to the start memory of the first special symbol for this additional amount. Suppose that the number is increased from three to three. In addition, it is assumed that the start memory of the first special symbol added this time includes information indicating a big hit symbol 1 or a big hit symbol 2 corresponding to a hit pattern 1 or the like which is easy to win a V prize together with a big hit. That is, the first reserved number information 701 includes special first reserved number information 701B according to the start storage of the first special symbol including the information indicating the big hit symbol 1 or the big hit symbol 2. In this case, although the first hold count information 701 includes the specific first hold count information 701A, it includes special first hold count information 701B that can be digested later and become an advantageous big hit gaming state. It becomes. At this time, although it is applied as a priority condition that the first hold count information 701 includes the first hold count information 701 B although the second hold count information 702 is not more than one, the screen of the display area 4A Above, the display mode in which the specific first hold count information 701A is highlighted is changed to the normal display mode. Further, the information display area 710 is switched to a display state indicating that it is in the ST mode.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 becomes zero by using the start storage of the second special symbol, and three decorative symbols 700 are displayed. The variable display of is started. Also in this case, although the number of the second hold count information 702 is 1 or less, it is applied as a priority condition that the first hold count information 701 includes the special first hold count information 701B. The state in which the first reserved number information 701A is displayed in the normal display mode is maintained without being highlighted. Further, the information display area 710 also maintains the display state indicating the ST mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 226 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of losing based on the start storage of the second special symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 226 (F), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from three pieces to two pieces by using the start storage of the first special symbol. And the variable display of the three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start storage of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is applied, the display itself of the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start storage is erased.

  And since the information which shows the big hit election corresponding to big hit symbol 3 is included in the starting memory corresponding to the specific 1st pending number information 701A deleted, as shown in Drawing 227 (G), a display field On the screen of 4A, three decoration symbols 700 are displayed as a match of "222" corresponding to the big hit symbol 3, for example.

  Thus, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of “222”, the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is started, and as shown in FIG. 227 (H), on the screen of the display area 4A. , A “big hit” message image 720 indicating the start of the big hit gaming state is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 227 (I), an image 730 prompting a right is displayed, and a round game based on the hit pattern 3 corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is performed. In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, it is difficult to detect the V winning on the specific area 38A. Therefore, there is a possibility that an image such as "V" indicating that V winning is detected may be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A during the round game execution only by the image 730 prompting to hit the right. Extremely low.

  Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 227 (J), a message image 742 such as “time saving mode rush” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A.

  When the time saving mode starts, as shown in FIG. 227 (K), the stop display mode (for example, “222”) at the time when the big hit gaming state starts on the screen of the display area 4A as in FIG. The decorative symbol 700 is displayed on the screen, and the first hold count information 701 and the like are displayed, and in the information display area 710, a message indicating that the "time saving mode" is displayed is displayed. In addition, an image 730 prompting a right is also displayed. At this time, the first hold count information 701 includes special first hold count information 701B.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 227 (L), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from two to one by using the start storage of the first special symbol. The variable display of three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, the first hold count information 701 includes special first hold count information 701B. In addition, the information display area 710 maintains the display state indicating the time saving mode.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 228 (M), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of losing based on the start storage of the first special symbol.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 228 (N), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is reduced from one to zero by using the start storage of the first special symbol. The variable display of three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, for example, since the start storage of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 1 is applied, the display itself of the special first reserved number information 701B corresponding to the start storage is erased.

  And since the information which shows the big hit winning corresponding to big hit symbol 1 is included in the starting memory corresponding to the special 1st pending number information 701B deleted, as shown in the figure 228 (O), a display area On the screen of 4A, the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as a match of "777" corresponding to the big hit symbol 1, for example. As a result, the time-saving mode ends and the big hit gaming state according to the hit pattern 1 starts, and if it is V prize winning, it will generally shift to the ST mode after the end of the big hit gaming state.

  FIGS. 229 and 230 are diagrams showing screen transition from the time saving mode to the time saving mode through the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 as a screen display example according to the second embodiment, in the non-probable variation gaming state It is a figure which shows performing predetermined | prescribed presentation according to whether the information which shows a big hit is contained in 1st starting memory | storage.

  As shown in FIG. 229 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the lost, and the first held number information 701 and the second held number information 702 are displayed. In addition, in the information display area 710, it is assumed that the "time saving mode" is displayed. Also, four first pending number information 701 is displayed, and four second pending number information 702 is also displayed, and the first pending number information 701 includes information indicating a jackpot symbol 3 It is assumed that the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the starting memory of the first special symbol is included. At this time, since two or more pieces of second pending number information 702 are displayed, they are not highlighted as the specific first pending number information 701A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 229 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is changed from four to three by preferentially using the start storage of the second special symbol. The reduced display is performed, and the variable display of the three decorative patterns 700 is started. At this time, if the remaining number of time saving mode is 15, the information display area 710 displays information indicating “the remaining time saving mode is 15 times”. Then, the specific first hold count information 701A included in the first hold count information 701 is changed from the normal display mode to the highlighted display mode. As described above, when the number of remaining times in the time saving mode is 15 or less, the condition that the specific first pending number information 701A is not highlighted if the second pending number information 702 is two or more in the ST mode described above This will be applied as a priority condition, and the specific first pending number information 701A will be highlighted. However, the message "DANGER" is not displayed in the information display area 710.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 229 (C) and (D), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of losing based on the start storage of the second special symbol. At this time, the information display area 710 displays that the time saving mode is set.

  After that, although not shown in the figure, when the remaining number of time saving mode is 15 times or less, the variation display of the decoration symbol 700 and the stop display of the stop display mode of losing are repeated based on the start memory of the second special symbol. Accordingly, when the second reserved number information 702 is sequentially reduced to zero, the variation display of the decorative symbol 700 is performed based on the start and storage of the first special symbol. Then, as shown in FIG. 229 (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of losing based on the start storage of the first special symbol. At this time, the first reserved number information 701 is displayed by being reduced from four pieces to three pieces by using the starting storage of the first special symbol, and as the first reserved number information 701 to be used in the next order, a specific first The pending number information 701A is highlighted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230 (F), on the screen of the display area 4A, the first reserved number information 701 is displayed by being reduced from three to two by using the start storage of the first special symbol. The variable display of three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start storage of the first special symbol including information indicating the jackpot symbol 3 is applied, the display itself of the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the start storage is erased.

  As shown in FIGS. 230 (G) and (H), since the start memory corresponding to the specific first reserved number information 701A that has been erased includes information indicating the big hit winning corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 In addition, on the screen of the display area 4A, the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as a match of “222” corresponding to the big hit symbol 3, for example.

  In this manner, when the three decorative symbols 700 stop and display at the alignment of "222", the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is started, and as shown in FIG. 230 (I), on the screen of the display area 4A. , A “big hit” message image 720 indicating the start of the big hit gaming state is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 230 (J), an image 730 for prompting a right is displayed, and a round game based on the hit pattern 3 corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is performed. In the round game based on the hit pattern 3, it is difficult to detect the V winning on the specific area 38A. Therefore, there is a possibility that an image such as "V" indicating that V winning is detected may be displayed on the screen of the display area 4A during the round game execution only by the image 730 prompting to hit the right. Extremely low.

  Then, when the big hit gaming state ends, as shown in FIG. 230 (K), a message image 742 such as “time saving mode rush” is displayed on the screen of the display area 4A. At this time, since the big hit symbol 3 has been determined in the time saving mode (time saving gaming state), 100 times will be given as the number of games in the time saving mode.

  FIGS. 231 and 232 are diagrams showing the screen transition from the time saving mode to the predetermined remaining number of times until the big hit corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 as a modification of the second embodiment, and the non-probability changing gaming state It is a figure which shows performing predetermined | prescribed presentation according to whether the information which shows a big hit is contained in 1st starting memory | storage.

  As shown in FIG. 231 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, three decorative symbols 700 are variably displayed based on the start memory of the second special symbol, and “in the information display area 710 Information such as “Time saving mode remaining 15 times” is displayed. Also, three first pending number information 701 is displayed, two second pending number information 702 is displayed, and first pending number information 701 includes information indicating a jackpot symbol 3 It is assumed that the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the starting memory of the first special symbol is included. At this time, since the number of remaining times of the time saving mode is 15 times, the specific first holding number information 701A is highlighted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 231 (B) and (C), after the decorative symbol 700 is variably displayed based on the start memory of the second special symbol on the screen of the display area 4A, in the stop display mode of losing Stop display. At this time, the start memory of the second special symbol is added according to the start winning to the second start opening 33, and the second reserved number information 702 is 2 so as to correspond to the start memory of the second special symbol for this addition. It is displayed increasing from three to three. In addition, it is assumed that the start memory of the second special symbol added this time includes information indicating, for example, the big hit symbol 4 corresponding to the hit pattern in which the V winning is easy as well as the big hit. That is, the second reserved number information 702 includes special second reserved number information 702A according to the start storage of the second special symbol including the information indicating the big hit symbol 4. In this case, although the first hold count information 701 includes the specific first hold count information 701A, the first hold count information 701 includes the special second hold count information 702A that can be digested earlier and become an advantageous big hit gaming state. It will be. At this time, although the number of remaining times of the time saving mode is 15 times or less, the addition of the special second number-of-retentions information 702A is applied as a priority condition, and a specific screen is displayed on the display area 4A. The display mode in which the first hold count information 701A is highlighted is changed to the normal display mode.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 231 (D) and (E), on the screen of the display area 4A, decoration is performed based on the start memory of the second special symbol in a state where the number of remaining time reduction mode is 15 or less. The variable display of the symbol 700 and the stop display as the stop display mode of the loss are performed, and accordingly, the second reserved number information 702 is reduced to two.

  Next, as shown in FIGS. 232 (F) and 232 (G), on the screen of the display area 4A, again based on the start memory of the second special symbol, it becomes the variation display of the decorative symbol 700 and the stop display mode of losing. The stop display is performed, and accordingly, the second hold count information 702 is reduced to one. The second hold count information 702 corresponds to the special second hold count information 702A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 232 (H), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is reduced from one to zero by using the start storage of the second special symbol. The variable display of three decorative symbols 700 is started. At this time, since the start storage of the second special symbol including information indicating the big hit symbol 4 is applied, the display itself of the special second reserved number information 702A corresponding to the start storage is erased.

  And, since the information indicating the big hit winning corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 is included in the starting memory corresponding to the special second reserved number information 702A which has been erased, as shown in FIGS. 230 (I) and (J) In addition, on the screen of the display area 4A, the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed as a match of "888" corresponding to the big hit symbol 3, for example. As described above, when the three decorative symbols 700 are stopped and displayed at the alignment of "888", the big hit gaming state corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 is started. As described above, when the special second reserved number information 702A corresponding to the big hit symbol 4 is digested first and the big hit gaming state is started, the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the big hit symbol 3 is emphasized It can be made not to be displayed.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram showing screen transition until the ST mode reaches a predetermined remaining number of times as a screen display example according to the second embodiment, and in the probability variation gaming state, the first start memory includes information indicating a big hit It is a figure which shows performing predetermined | prescribed presentation according to whether it is.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (A), on the screen of the display area 4A, the decorative symbol 700 is stopped and displayed in the stop display mode of the lost, and the first held number information 701 and the second held number information 702 are displayed. In addition, in the information display area 710, it is assumed that "ST mode" is displayed. Also, four first pending number information 701 is displayed, and four second pending number information 702 is also displayed, and the first pending number information 701 includes information indicating a jackpot symbol 3 It is assumed that the specific first reserved number information 701A corresponding to the starting memory of the first special symbol is included. At this time, since two or more pieces of second pending number information 702 are displayed, they are not highlighted as the specific first pending number information 701A.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 233 (B), on the screen of the display area 4A, the second reserved number information 702 is changed from four to three by preferentially using the start storage of the second special symbol. The reduced display is performed, and the variable display of the three decorative patterns 700 is started. At this time, if the remaining number of times in the ST mode is ten, information such as “the remaining ten times in ST mode” is displayed in the information display area 710. Then, the specific first hold count information 701A included in the first hold count information 701 is changed from the normal display mode to the highlighted display mode. As described above, even when the number of remaining times in ST mode is 10 or less, the condition that the specific first number of held information 701A is not highlighted if the number of second held number information 702 is 2 or more in ST mode described above This will be applied as a priority condition, and the specific first pending number information 701A will be highlighted.

[Effect of game machine of the second embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  In such a configuration, the hit pattern 14 and the hit pattern 3 have a difference in the easiness of receiving the game balls by the first large winning opening 36 and the second large winning opening 37. That is, in hit pattern 14, although the total number of acceptances relatively decreases from the total time when the round game is in the open state, the second large winning opening 37 continues to be open for a predetermined time at the 1R and 11R eyes. It becomes easy to shift to a probability change gaming state by the round game which is easy to pass the specific field 38A being executed. On the other hand, in hit pattern 3, the round game in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area 38A is executed by the time when the second large winning opening 37 is in the open state relatively short in the first R and the 11 R eyes. Although it is difficult to shift to the gaming state, the total acceptance number is relatively larger than the hit pattern 14 from the total time when all the round games are open. Therefore, according to such a configuration, when transitioning to the big hit gaming state, the hit pattern 14 and the hit pattern 14 are generally determined depending on which of the first pass gate 35A and the second pass gate 35B preferentially passes the game ball. Since the big hit gaming state corresponding to any one of the hit patterns 3 can be selected, it is possible to realize the technical intervention that allows the player to select whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state. Then, in selecting the big hit gaming state corresponding to the hit pattern 14 or the hit pattern 3 by the preferential passing of the first pass gate 35A or the second pass gate 35B, the big hit gaming state corresponding to any hit pattern is selected. Even in this case, since the gaming profit and the disadvantage occur, the balance between the profit and the disadvantage received by the player and the game machine installation shop can be properly maintained.

  In addition, according to such a configuration, the contents of the effect depending on when the control of the big hit gaming state is started based on the big hit symbol 2 and when the control of the big hit gaming state based on the big hit symbol other than the big hit symbol 2 is started Are different from each other, the player changes the determination ratio of the hit pattern according to the passage of either the first passage gate 35A or the second passage gate 35B as to whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state, and It is possible to distinguish the situation where the determination ratio of the hit pattern becomes the same by passing either of the first passing gate 35A and the second passing gate 35B, and it is possible to play against the first passing gate 35A or the second passing gate 35B. It is possible to clearly identify the situations that can be selected as to whether or not to shift to the probability change gaming state and the situations where such selection can not be made before passing the ball. That. For example, when the control of the big hit gaming state is started based on the big hit symbol 2 and it is possible to select whether or not to shift to the special gaming state accordingly, the big hit game of the content that explicitly indicates that By executing the effect according to the state (see FIG. 217 (F)), the player can surely recognize such a selectable situation, and the desired first passing gate 35A or the second It is possible to play a game by aiming the passing gate 35B to pass the game ball.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, in the probability variation gaming state, information indicating the big hit symbol 3 of the hit pattern 3 and indicating the determination result to shift to the big hit gaming state is stored in association with the first start memory In the case where it is determined that the transition to the jackpot gaming state is determined, but it is difficult to transition to the probability change gaming state again after the transition to the jackpot gaming state, information corresponding to that is stored. Is notified (see FIG. 223 and FIG. 224). A player who receives such a notification can quickly recognize that it is difficult to shift to the probability variation gaming state again in the probability variation gaming state. The player who has detected such a situation, for example, plays the game so as to prioritize as much as possible the variable display and the stop display of the second special symbol based on the second start memory, and the probability change gaming state immediately ends. Can be avoided.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 222, when it is notified that information indicating the big hit symbol 3 of the hit pattern 3 which is hard to shift to the probability variation gaming state is not stored, the variable display and the stop display of the second special symbol Since there is no need to give priority to the game, the game can be interrupted as appropriate. Thus, since the way of proceeding of the game changes according to the content to be notified, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the game.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 223 and 224, when the number of the second start memories is less than two, for example, the determination result of transitioning to the big hit gaming state which is difficult to shift to the probability variation gaming state Is notified that the first starting memory indicating. In other words, if there are two or more second starting memories, and the second special symbol's variable display and stop display are given priority, whether such first starting memories are stored or not It will not be notified in particular. This gives a sense of security that the probability change gaming state will not be interrupted for a while if there is a large number of second starting memories and there is no disadvantage for the player even if the above notification is not given. It is possible to advance the game while.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, there is a case where the first start memory indicating the determination result to shift to the big hit gaming state which is hard to shift to the probability variation gaming state is stored, and further, it is stored later If there is another first start memory that has been made and it does not indicate the determination result that the other first start memory is made to shift to the big hit gaming state which is easy to shift to the probability variation gaming state, it shifts to the probability variation gaming state It is informed that the first starting memory to the effect that it is difficult to store is stored. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 226 to 228, even if the first starting memory to the effect that it is difficult to shift to the probability variation gaming state is stored, it is easy to shift to the probability variation gaming state later than that When the first start-up memory is stored, the first start-up memory to be stored first will not be notified. That is, although it temporarily shifts to the non-probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it shifts to the big-hit gaming state thereafter based on the other first start memory, and it is easy to shift to the probability variation gaming state again after the big-hit gaming state is over In the case where it is decided, since the above notification is not performed, it is possible to prevent useless notification from being performed excessively, and to appropriately notify useful information according to the situation. It is possible to proceed with peace of mind.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 233, after the end of the big hit gaming state, in the probability variation gaming state, the number of times of variation display of the special symbol is the special number (number of times the probability variation gaming state is 10 times remaining) The first start memory that determines the jackpot pattern 3 of the hit pattern 3 that is hard to shift to the probability change gaming state is stored if the remaining to a certain number of times (190 times) to the end of the probability change gaming state Since this is notified, it is possible to perform significant notification contributing to the player's profit as notification of the content indicating whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state again in the probability variation gaming state. That is, since the first start memory is not digested prior to the second start memory, the variation display of the first special symbol based on the first start memory is not performed until the end of the probability change gaming state unless the predetermined notification is given. There is a fear. Moreover, since the target to be notified is the first start storage that determines the big hit symbol 3, when the variable display based on the first start storage is performed, the transition to the probability variation gaming state is not made. In short, for the first start memory, based on the information indicating the random number for hitting determination, it may decide the big hit gaming state in the probability variation gaming state, but it does not decide the big hit gaming status in the non probability variation gaming state Since there is also a possibility, it may be disadvantageous for the player without shifting to the jackpot gaming state. In order to cope with such a case, by performing the predetermined notification as described above, it is possible to urge the variable display based on the first starting memory not to be preferentially digested, and to prevent the player from being disadvantaged. can do. That is, although the profit related to the probability change gaming state is lost, the loss of the profit of the big hit gaming state can be prevented as much as possible.

  Moreover, according to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 231 and FIG. 232, after the end of the big hit gaming state, even in the time saving game state, the number of times of variation display of the special symbol is the special number (time saving game state remains 15 times When the number of times the gameplay state ends is reduced to a specific number (100 times or 30 times) until the end of the short game state, for example, the big hit pattern 3 of the hit pattern 3 which is hard to shift to the probability change game state is determined If the start memory is stored, that effect is notified, so that it is possible to perform a significant notification contributing to the player's profit even in the time saving game state. That is, since it is easier for the time saving gaming state to be more frequently given the time saving number than the non-time saving gaming state, it is possible to obtain a further profit relating to the time saving gaming state by performing the predetermined notification.

  Next, a pachinko gaming machine according to a third embodiment, which is partially different from the second embodiment described above, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In addition, about the component the same as that of the thing by 1st Embodiment and 2nd Embodiment mentioned above or similar, the same code | symbol etc. is attached and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment, only one passage gate 35A is provided as a passage gate, and the player is allowed to select a hit pattern according to the timing when the game ball passes through the passage gate 35A. Is configured as. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, only the big hit symbol 2 is determined as the big hit symbol, and either the hit pattern 3 or the hit pattern 14 is determined as the hit pattern.

[Game flow of gaming machine according to the third embodiment]
FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing a game flow of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment. Note that the flowchart in the figure shows the main flow of the entire game, and does not distinguish between the processing by the main CPU 61 and the processing by the sub CPU 71. Therefore, the execution subject of each process is simply described as a CPU.

  As shown in FIG. 234, in S4000, the CPU determines whether or not there is start storage. If it is determined that there is startup storage, the CPU shifts the processing to S4001. On the other hand, when it is determined that the start storage is not present, the CPU repeatedly executes the process of S4000 until it is determined that the start storage is present.

  In S4001, the CPU executes the jackpot determination process based on the probability according to the gaming state. If this process ends, the process moves to S4002.

  In S4002, the CPU performs processing to determine whether or not it is a big hit. If the CPU determines that it is a big hit, it shifts the processing to S4004. On the other hand, if the CPU determines that it is not a big hit, it shifts the processing to S4003.

  In S4003, the CPU fluctuates the special symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs a process of stopping and displaying the lost symbol. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4000 again.

  In S4004, the CPU fluctuates the special symbol for a predetermined time, and then performs processing to stop and display the big hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the jackpot symbol 2 is stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the CPU shifts the processing to S4005.

  In S4005, after starting the control of the jackpot gaming state, the CPU performs processing for setting a predetermined value in the hit pattern determination timer. The hit pattern determination timer is a timer for clocking a plurality of predetermined times (periods) before the game ball passes through the pass gate 35A. As the predetermined value, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds is set as the first period. Thereafter, the CPU shifts the processing to S4006.

  In S4006, the CPU performs processing for setting hit pattern determination data. In the present embodiment, data for determining the hit pattern 14 is set as hit pattern determination data corresponding to the first period. Thereafter, the CPU transfers the process to S4007.

  In S4007, the CPU performs processing for setting notification data corresponding to the hit pattern determination data. That is, in the present embodiment, notification data for notifying that the hit pattern 14 is to be executed is set by the game ball passing through the pass gate 35A within the time of the first period. Thereafter, the CPU shifts the processing to S4008.

  In S4008, the CPU performs processing to determine whether passage of the gaming ball in the passage gate 35A is detected based on a detection signal from the passage gate switch. In this process, if the CPU determines that passage of the gaming ball in the passage gate 35A is detected, the process proceeds to S4009, and if it is determined that passage of the game ball in the passage gate 35A is not detected, S4010 Transfer the process to

  In S4009, the CPU performs a process of determining a hit pattern based on the hit pattern determination data. For example, when the hit pattern determination data corresponding to the first period is set, the hit pattern 14 is determined. On the other hand, hit pattern determination data corresponding to a second period described later may be set, and in this case, hit pattern 3 is to be determined. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4015.

  In S4010, the CPU performs subtraction processing on the hit pattern determination timer. This process is executed such that, for example, when "3000" is set as the predetermined value corresponding to 6 seconds in the hit pattern determination timer in the process of S4005, 1 is subtracted every 2 ms. Thus, a period corresponding to 6 seconds is measured. Thereafter, the CPU shifts the processing to S4011.

  In S4011, the CPU performs processing to determine whether the value of the hit pattern determination timer is “0”. In this process, if the CPU determines that the value of the hit pattern determination timer is "0", the process proceeds to S4012, and if the value of the hit pattern determination timer is determined not to be "0". The process returns to S4008.

  In S4012, the CPU performs processing to set a predetermined value in the hit pattern determination timer again. In S4012, as the predetermined value, for example, a value corresponding to 6 seconds is set as the second period if the first period has elapsed. On the other hand, if the second period has elapsed, a value corresponding to 6 seconds is set as the first period. In the present embodiment, although the first period and the second period are both the same time (6 seconds), they may be different times. For example, the first period corresponding to hit pattern 14 may be a relatively long time, and the second period corresponding to hit pattern 3 described later may be a relatively short time. Thereafter, the CPU shifts the processing to S4013.

  In S4013, the CPU performs processing to change the hit pattern determination data. In this process, if the hit pattern determination data corresponding to hit pattern 14 is currently set, the CPU changes the hit pattern determination data corresponding to hit pattern 3 and corresponds to hit pattern 3 at present. If the hit pattern determination data is set, the hit pattern determination data corresponding to the hit pattern 14 is changed. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4014.

  In S4014, the CPU performs a process of setting notification data corresponding to the changed hit pattern determination data. That is, in this embodiment, when the first period has elapsed, notification data for notifying that the hit pattern 3 is to be executed is set by the game ball passing through the pass gate 35A within the time of the second period. Ru. Further, when the second period has elapsed, notification data for notifying that the hit pattern 14 is to be executed is set by the game ball passing through the pass gate 35A again within the time of the first period. Based on such notification data, before passing the gaming ball to the passing gate 35A, the corresponding hit pattern 3 or the hit pattern 14 is executed according to the first period or the second period when passing at the current time. Will be informed about Also, until the game ball passes through the pass gate 35A, the first period and the second period are sequentially switched, and every time the first period and the second period elapse, the hit pattern 3, the hit pattern 14 and related data are Be prepared alternately. After that, the CPU returns the process to S4008.

  In S4015, the CPU performs control to open and close the special winning opening based on the hit pattern in order to execute the round game in the big hit gaming state. After that, the CPU shifts the processing to S4016.

  In S4016, the CPU performs processing to determine whether or not the final round game has ended. In this process, when the CPU determines that the final round game has ended, the process moves to S4017, and when the CPU determines that the final round game has not ended, the process returns to S4015.

  In S4017, the CPU performs processing to determine whether the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 38A (V winning). In this process, if the CPU determines that the gaming ball has passed through the specific area 38A, it transfers the process to S4018, and if it is determined that the gaming ball has not passed through the specific area 38A, the first S4000. Return the process to

  In S4018, the CPU performs processing to control the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state to the probability variation gaming state. If the gaming ball has not passed through the specific area 38A, the process returns to the first S4000, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is controlled to the non-probability changing gaming state.

  Thereby, the CPU (main CPU 61) in the present embodiment determines that at least the first period and the second period are set as the plurality of periods when the determination result to shift to the specific gaming state is obtained by the specific gaming state transition determining means. Is implemented as a period setting means capable of setting. In addition, the CPU (main CPU 61) functioning as the round game pattern determination means is controlled by the first variable winning device (first) on condition that the game medium has passed through the passage area 38A in the first period set by the period setting means. The large winning opening 36) includes a round game varying in the first aspect and the second aspect, and the second variable winning device (second large winning opening 37) facilitates passage of gaming media to a specific area It is possible to determine a first round game pattern (per hitting pattern 14) including easy passing round games which fluctuate in one mode and second mode, and game media passes through the passing area 38A in the second period set by the period setting means On the condition that the first variable winning device includes a round game varying in the first aspect and the second aspect, and the second variable winning device passes the game medium to the specific area. Second round game pattern (per pattern 3) comprising a passage difficulties round game that varies the first and second aspects as a flame can be determined.

[Effect of game machine of the third embodiment]
According to the pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

  According to such a configuration, when transitioning to the big hit gaming state, the game ball is allowed to pass through the pass gate 35A within the time of the first period, or the game ball is passed within the time of the second period. Since it is possible to select the big hit gaming state corresponding to either one of the hit pattern 14 and the hit pattern 3 depending on whether or not, it realizes a technical intervention that allows the player to select whether or not to shift to the probability change gaming state. be able to. And, by selecting the big hit gaming state corresponding to the hit pattern 14 or the hit pattern 3 by passing the passing gate 35A within any time of the first period or the second period, the present invention corresponds to any hit pattern. Even if the jackpot gaming state is selected, since the gaming profits and disadvantages are generated, it is possible to appropriately maintain the balance of profits and disadvantages received by the player and the game machine installation store.

  In addition, this invention is not limited to the above-mentioned embodiment.

  For example, the effect mode or the decorative symbol may be determined according to the type of the big hit symbol as follows. If the decorative pattern is a golden pattern with "7" alignment, it is determined that the super big bonus is established. In addition, when making the decoration design “3” uniform and making it the red design, the success of the challenge bonus is decided on condition that it became the big hit design with the 1st special symbol, and it became the big hit design with the 2nd special symbol. The special effect mode defined in advance is executed on condition that the execution of the substance 15R is decided. In addition, when making the decorative design “1” or “5” as a pink pattern, the success probability of the challenge bonus is made relatively high on the condition that it becomes the big hit design with the first special symbol, and the second special On the condition that it becomes a big hit symbol with a symbol, it is considered as an additional bonus (effectively determined with 8R or more or a substantial 4R is relatively low) more advantageous than a blue symbol to be described later. When making a decorative pattern a blue pattern with “2”, “4”, or “6” as a set, whether to make the success probability of the challenge bonus relatively low on condition that it becomes a big hit symbol with the first special symbol Alternatively, it will be 0, and it will be an additional bonus which is more disadvantageous than the pink pattern on the condition that the second special symbol has become a big hit symbol.

  In addition, various effect patterns to be executed in the big hit gaming state may be selected from those predefined in accordance with the type of the big hit gaming state, and may not be determined for each round game.

  In the above embodiment, as the effect pattern in the challenge bonus and the bonus bonus, the effect pattern of each round game is determined each time on condition of transition to the big hit gaming state, but from all the effect patterns defined in advance By selecting one effect pattern, all the effect patterns to be executed in the challenge bonus and the additional bonus may be determined in one determination process.

  In the above-described embodiment, the challenge bonus determines the presentation content based on the three presentation patterns, refers only to the presentation content of the presentation pattern selected by the player, and produces the presentation content of the other presentation patterns. Although the content is to be discarded, the content of the effect corresponding to only the effect pattern selected by the player may be determined.

  Before the start of the jackpot gaming state relating to the challenge bonus, three types of effect patterns in the challenge bonus may be determined and the player may be made to select an effect pattern. In such a case, it is possible to notify in advance the display of an icon and the execution of a round game with an easy V prize, before the start of the challenge bonus.

  In the bonus bonus, the display mode of numerical values such as the number of payout prize balls and the number of total prize balls displayed may be different from those in the above-described embodiment. For example, in the above-described embodiment, although the number of winnings for the large winning opening is one and the numerical value displayed on the blue meter is "10", the numerical value displayed for each winning number is, for example, "1. It is good also as ". Further, addition may be expressed by changing the color in accordance with the number of winnings. More specifically, white is displayed when the number of winnings is “0”, blue is displayed when the number of winnings is “10”, and blue is displayed when the number of winnings is “50”. There is a way of expression. Such a color change addition method can be applied to the red meter as well.

  In addition, in the bonus bonus, even when the upper limit winning number is exceeded, a numerical value corresponding to the exceeding amount may be reflected on the payout award ball number displayed on the blue meter. For example, when the game ball of “11” exceeding the upper limit number of winnings is won in the special winning opening, the number of prize balls “10” corresponding to the winning of one game ball is taken into consideration and “110” as the payout ball number "" May be added and displayed. However, when such a blue meter addition display is performed, the blue meter and the red meter will be displayed for the execution of the round game thereafter by additionally displaying a value corresponding to the amount exceeding the upper limit winning number in the red meter. It is preferable that contradiction does not arise in the display content of and.

  In the second embodiment described above, the control of the big hit gaming state is started for the first pass gate 35A and the second pass gate 35B related to the normal symbol lottery, or the big winning opening open / close pattern (hit pattern) is selected as the player Although it was used also as a mechanism for making it do, you may provide such a mechanism separately from the passing gate which usually concerns on a symbol lottery.

  Further, in the second embodiment and the third embodiment, whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state is determined according to whether or not it is a V prize for the specific area 30A, but the probability variation The same configuration as that of the second embodiment or the third embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine configured to determine whether or not to shift to the gaming state by lottery similarly to winning of a big hit and the like. In addition, the same configuration as that of the second embodiment or the third embodiment can be applied to a gaming machine provided with only one big winning opening as shown in FIG. At this time, in order to correspond to one big winning opening, the hit patterns 1 to 13 shown in FIG. 187 are applied as the hit patterns 1 to 13 in FIG. 191, and the hit pattern 14 in FIG. It is sufficient to apply a hit pattern in which the 11Rth eye is the open / close pattern A. In this case, for example, the first round game in which the displacement member is activated and the opening / closing pattern B is executed as the easy-to-pass round game, and other round games (including the 11Rth round game serving as the opening / closing pattern A) Is executed as a difficult-to-pass round game when the displacement member becomes inoperative. That is, if the displacing member operates and the hitting pattern is an opening time (opening mode) of an extent that allows V prizes to be easily achieved, the round game of the hitting pattern becomes an easy passing round game. Therefore, the round game of the hit patterns A, D, and E can also be an easy-to-pass round game on the condition of the operation of the displacement member.

  In the second embodiment, the ST number (190 times) is larger than the time reduction number (100 times or 30 times), but for example, the ST number is set to 100 times or 30 times. The number of times may be shorter than the number of times ST, and may be five times. In addition, as the number of times of time saving, for example, 0 times may be determined, and there may be a case where it does not shift to the time saving game state after the end of the big hit game state. Also, the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery may be higher than 0% in the non-time-short game state.

As a modification of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 193, the big hit symbols 1 to 4 and the hit patterns 1 to 12 and 14 may be associated with each other. In this case, the following can be made as an example.
(Big hit design 1)
The hit pattern 1 is always determined with a probability of 100% without switching between the first period and the second period.
-During the jackpot gaming state, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 1) is notified until the hit pattern is determined.
(Big hit design 2)
-The time for which the hit pattern 1 can be selected is a period a, for example 0.03 seconds, the time for which the hit pattern 2 can be selected is b period, for example 0.03 seconds, the time that the hit pattern 3 can be selected is c The time is 0.22 seconds, and the time during which the hit pattern 14 can be selected is d, for example, 0.22 seconds. Then, a state in which a period, b period, c period, and d period sequentially elapse is set as one set, and a period in which 10 sets are performed is set as an A period (5 seconds). During this A period, the type of hit pattern is not notified during the jackpot gaming state (notified).
As a period to be switched next to the period A, there is provided a period B (5 seconds) in which only the hit pattern 3 can be selected. The B period corresponds to the second period in the third embodiment. In this B period, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 3) is notified.
As a period to be switched next to the B period, there is provided a C period (5 seconds) in which only the hit pattern 14 can be selected. Period C corresponds to the first period in the third embodiment. Also in this C period, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 14) is notified.
By switching in the order of period A, period B, and period C, a period in which notification is performed and a period in which notification is not performed are provided.
(Big hit design 3)
The hit pattern 3 is always determined with a probability of 100% without switching between the first period and the second period.
-During the jackpot gaming state, the type of hit pattern (hit pattern 3) is notified until the hit pattern is determined.
(Big hit design 4)
The time during which the hit patterns 1, 4 to 12 can be sequentially selected is switched, for example, every 0.02 seconds, and during this time, the type of hit pattern is not notified during the jackpot gaming state (notified).

  As in the modification of the third embodiment described above, when many hit patterns exist, the type of hit pattern may not be notified in any period.

  In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, the techniques in the other embodiments can be applied to one another as long as the features or effects of the features are not impaired.

1 game board 1p game area 4 liquid crystal display device (informing means, display means, effect executing means)
32 1st start port (1st start area)
33 2nd start port (2nd start area)
34 Wing member (variable member)
35A 1st passage gate (1st passage area)
35B 2nd passage gate (2nd passage area)
36 1st prize winning opening (1st variable winning prize device)
36A 1st Winning Mouth Shutter (1st Variable Winning Device)
37 2nd Prize Win (2nd Variable Winning Device)
37 Second winning opening shutter (second variable winning device)
38A specified area 38B non-specified area 39, 39 'displacement member 53 first special symbol display unit (first identification information display means)
54 second special symbol display (second identification information display means)
61 main CPU (specific game state transition determination means, specific game state control means, special game state control means, non special game state control means, first round game execution means, second round game execution means, first specific game state transfer Judgment means, second specific game state transition judgment means, round game pattern determination means, round game execution means, special game state control means, non-special game state control means, specific number of times determination means, period setting means)
63 Main RAM (First Storage Means, Second Storage Means)
71 Sub CPU (informing means, display control means, advance informing means, scheduled amount determining means, informing amount changing means, effect executing means)
73 work RAM (storage means, first storage means, second storage means)
83 Payout Device (Game Value Assigning Means)

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area in which game media can roll;
A passing area provided in the gaming area and through which gaming media can pass;
Determining means for determining whether or not to shift to a specific gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, on condition that game media has passed through the passage area;
Gaming state transition means for transitioning to the specific gaming state based on the determination result of the determination means;
A variable winning device that can be displaced into an open state in which game media can be easily received and a closed state in which the game medium is more difficult to receive than the open state;
A non-special game state control means capable of controlling a non-special game state which is a game state controlled after the specific game state ends and which is difficult to shift to the specific game state;
Special gaming state control means capable of controlling the special gaming state that is easy to shift to the specific gaming state after the specific gaming state is ended;
A gaming machine equipped with
In the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a round game to open and close the variable winning device a plurality of times,
Even in the middle of the opening and closing control, when a predetermined number of winnings occur in the variable winning device, control to end the round game of that time can be executed,
The effect executing means is capable of winning determined from among the plurality of types of possible prizes when starting the first round game for display concerning the possible number of prizes to the variable prize device in one specific gaming state After the initial display of the number is performed, the initial display is continuously displayed even after the first round game is finished and the variable winning device is closed, and the subsequent round game is started. It is possible to execute an addition display effect that increases the number of possible winnings from the initial display,
The specific display based on the game value given to the player in the round game from the start of the specific gaming state transitioning to the special gaming state to the transition to the non-special gaming state is at least transitioned from the special gaming state It is possible to perform in the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine characterized in that the specific display may not be displayed when a specific round game is executed.